JP7347563B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player.

2. Description of the Related Art As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine that can determine whether or not to give a bonus to a player is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

Here, there is still room for improvement from the perspective of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can satisfactorily increase attention to the game.

The present invention
a firing means for firing a game ball into a gaming area based on a firing operation by a player;
a first ball entry part and a second ball entry part provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined entry mode that can be switched between a first mode in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter the ball or easily enter the ball, and a second mode in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter the ball than the first mode. ball means;
a first lottery means for executing a first lottery to determine whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section;
a second lottery means for executing a second lottery to determine whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section;
A first special game state in which switching control is performed to change the predetermined ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode and then to the second mode based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery. a means by which the transition can be made;
A first state in which a privilege is more likely to be awarded based on the first lottery than the second lottery, and a second state in which a benefit is more likely to be awarded based on the second lottery than the first lottery. and the means by which it is possible to
a first switching means capable of switching from the second state to the first state in response to the number of drawings of the first drawing or the second drawing reaching a predetermined number;
A second switching means capable of switching from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the first lottery or the second lottery becoming a specific result and a predetermined condition being satisfied based on the specific result. and,
a third switching means capable of switching from the first state to the second state without going through the first special game state based on the first lottery or the second lottery;
Equipped with
The predetermined number of times includes a first number of times and a second number of times different from the first number of times,
The configuration is characterized in that by switching from the first state to the second state by the third switching means, the configuration is more advantageous to the player than before the switching.

It becomes possible to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in a closed state, and (b) It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in an open state. (a) It is a vertical sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the side side, and (b) It is a vertical sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the back side. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory diagram of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram of a distribution table. (a) It is an explanatory diagram of the support outline, (b) It is an explanatory diagram of the positional relationship between each operating port and the through gate, and (c) It is a timing chart showing the winning timing to each operating port and the through gate. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart showing winning processing for through. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart showing the first game round control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 1st fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows forced termination processing. It is a flowchart showing the second game round control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd fluctuation start. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows V distribution setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 1st variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 2nd variable display time. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for variable display by a performance control device. It is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and opening/closing execution modes. It is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and performance patterns. It is a flowchart which shows the (a) variable display time table switching process in 2nd Embodiment, (b), (c) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table. In the third embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table for special symbols, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table for regular symbols. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display time table switching process in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a switching counter addition table. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of production. It is a flowchart which shows (a) the variable display time table switching process in the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the relationship between the ceiling value of a switching counter, and each opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time table switching process in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of production. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time table switching process in the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time table switching process in the 4th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time table switching process in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table. It is an explanatory diagram of a distribution table of unfavorable special out results. It is a flow chart showing production processing for a specific period by the production control device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of production. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the contents of various counters used for lottery, etc. in the sixth embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of a table for conditions. It is an explanatory diagram of a normal table and a special table. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of internal states. It is a flowchart showing the first game round control process by the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 1st fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows condition satisfaction determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 1st variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows processing for condition cancellation. It is a flowchart showing the second game round control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 2nd variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows table restoration processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows table switching processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. It is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display. It is a flowchart which shows the special production start process by a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special performance end process. It is an explanatory view of the validity table of the 1st special figure in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of internal states. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of internal states. 3 is a flowchart showing a condition satisfaction determination process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows processing for condition cancellation. It is a flowchart which shows table switching processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display. It is an explanatory diagram of the validity table of the 1st special figure in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of internal states. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 1st fluctuation start by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows processing for addition judgment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display. It is an explanatory diagram of the validity table of the 1st special figure in a 9th embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of a normal table, special table A, and special table B. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of internal states. It is a flowchart which shows the state transition determination process by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 1st variable display time. It is a flowchart which shows table switching processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display. FIG. 12 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions in a modification of the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view of various validity tables in a 10th embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram of a normal table and a special table. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the variable display time table, the power support and the V jackpot probability, and (b) is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the internal state. (a) is an explanatory diagram of a distribution table for a variable display time table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a distribution table for a specified number of times. 12 is a flowchart illustrating storage processing of the first side 16R flag by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the storage process of a 2nd side advantageous release flag. It is a flowchart which shows table switching processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display. It is an explanatory view of arrangement of each operation port in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the third operating port viewed from the side. It is an explanatory view of the flow path to the 4th working port in a 12th embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, (a) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) is a front view showing the operation of the electric accessory provided at the fifth operation port. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining game nature.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and these inner rail portions 25 and outer rail portions 26 provide guidance means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 66a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 66a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired (see FIG. 2).

The game board 24 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front and back direction. Each opening includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first operating opening (or first starting ball entry part) 33, a second operating opening (or second starting ball entry part) 34, a through gate 35, and a variable opening. A display unit 36, a main display section 37, a common figure display section 38 as an accessory display section, and the like are provided. Note that a plurality of general winning holes 31 and a plurality of variable winning devices 32 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33, four prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 34, four prize balls are paid out. In this case, 5 prize balls are paid out, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 32, a payout of 10 prize balls is executed. 15 prize balls are paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same. The number of prize balls related to this may be smaller than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33. Further, the number of prize balls related to one variable winning device 32 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. The number of prize balls of each of the plurality of variable winning devices 32 may be different.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowest part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PE through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where game balls fired into the game area PE can fall is It is sectioned. Specifically, in the gaming area PE, there is an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left side area PE2 which is a left side area, a right side area PE3 which is continuous below the upper area PE1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36, and each of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PE4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 36 and is below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper region PE1. It starts flowing down. In this case, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PE1 → left area PE2 → lower area PE4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 as a second firing operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the player can move the firing operation device 28 to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper region PE1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PE1 → right area PE3 → lower area PE4. In other words, by adjusting the amount of rotational operation of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, and the right side area A game can be played as the game ball flows down the PE3.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the lower region PE4. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a will be explained. The electric accessory 34a has two states: a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second operating port 34, and an open state (support state or guide state) in which it is easier for game balls to enter the second operating port 34. It can be switched to

The operating port case constituting the first operating port 33 protrudes toward the front and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, with the upper side length<lower side length. At this time, the length of the upper side of the operating port case (that is, the left and right width of the first operating port 33) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the length of the lower side is set when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is greater than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the installation interval between the operation ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operation opening case and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

According to the above configuration, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating opening 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, it becomes possible to enter the second operating opening 34. Particularly at this time, during the movement of the electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state, the operation port case of the first operation port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. It is impossible to enter a game ball into the second operating port 34 until the accessory 34a is fully opened, and winning is possible only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. In other words, the game ball falling from above hits the side of the operating port case and is bounced outward, and does not directly enter the second operating port 34. As a result, if the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it becomes extremely difficult to enter the second operating port 34, and only when the electric accessory 34a remains open, the second operating port 34 It will be easier to win.

In addition to the configuration in which the operating port case of the first operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operating port case of the first operating port 33 may have a two-stage structure with a narrow upper part and a wider lower part, or Approximately V-shaped guide pieces may be provided on both left and right sides of the operating port 33, or obstruction nails may be installed diagonally below the operating port case.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided with a first winning detection sensor 33a and a second winning detecting sensor 34c, respectively, which can detect the passage of a game ball. The ball is detected by the first winning detection sensor 33a, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 is detected by the second winning detection sensor 34c. The detection result is output to the main control device, and the main control device performs processing such as an internal lottery based on winnings.

The through gate 35 is installed directly above the first operating port 33 as a passing type winning port. That is, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 is discharged to the gaming area PE after winning the prize, and enters the first operating port 33 to win the prize. The through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 are arranged such that the lower end of the through gate 35 and the upper end of the first operating port 33 are spaced shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, an event in which a prize is won in the first operating port 33 without winning in the through gate 35 does not occur.

More specifically, regarding the positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33, a pair of nails 24b are inserted into the gap between the lower end of the through gate 35 and the upper end of the first operating port 33 at a predetermined distance (slightly smaller than the diameter of the game ball). A game ball that passes through the through gate 35 passes between the pair of nails 24b and enters the first operating port 33. In this case, the gap between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 is filled by the pair of nails 24b, and the event that a prize is won in the first operating port 33 without winning in the through gate 35 does not occur. In addition, since the gap between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 is as narrow as one nail, the time required for the game ball that enters the through gate 35 to enter the first operating port 33 is minimized. It is set to be short. Note that the gap between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 may be made narrower without providing the nail 24b between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33, or the gap between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 may be narrower. The opening 33 may be provided in contact with the opening 33. Alternatively, the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 may be integrated into an integrated winning section, and one winning section may perform processing based on winning to the through gate 35 and processing based on winning to the first operating port 33. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which any of the above can be executed.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through prize detection sensor 35a that can detect the passage of a game ball, and the game ball that has won into the through gate 35 is detected by the through prize detection sensor 35a. The detection result is output to the main control device, and the main control device performs processing such as an internal lottery based on winnings.

As described above, by providing the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 in the lower area PE4, the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2. It is possible to win to the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 both when the game ball is in the right area PE3 and when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. be.

The lower part of the variable display unit 36 is provided with a stage 36b on which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction, and the game ball that rolls on the stage 36b has a first operating port 33 and a second operating port 34. and falls towards the through gate 35. A game ball entering from an entrance portion 36c provided on the left side of the variable display unit 36 is led out to the stage 36b via a guide path (not shown). In this way, the entrance portion 36c of the guide passage to the stage 36b is provided for the left side area PE2, and is not provided for the right side area PE3. It is more likely that the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will receive a prize compared to the case where the winnings flow downward. Furthermore, the arrangement of the game parts and nails 24b in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 is different when flowing down the left side area PE2 than when flowing down the right side area PE3. It is set so that winning at the gate 35 is likely to occur. The game balls flowing down the right side area PE3 hardly ever land in the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the through gate 35. In other words, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are in positions where it is easier for the ball to enter when the firing operation device 28 is operated in the first firing operation than in the second firing operation. It is located.

In addition, since the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided as a unit as described above, when a game ball is fired aiming at the first operating port 33, the game ball is fired from the second operating port 33. The game ball reaches the operating port 34, and when the game ball is fired aiming at the second operating port 34, the game ball reaches the first operating port 33. In other words, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are prize-winning portions that are difficult (impossible) to win separately.

When a prize is won at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, an internal lottery is held. If the player wins in the lottery, the game shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which it is possible to win a prize in the variable prize winning device 32.

The main display section 37 and the general figure display section 38 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the lower outer edge of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided in the front door frame 14 in order to make the gaming area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and The distance between them is narrower than the distance of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

A main display section 37 and a general figure display section 38 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. In other words, the main display section 37 and the general figure display section 38 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls fall in front of both display sections 37 and 38. This is prevented from happening. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the plurality of general prize winning holes 31 mentioned above is installed in an upwardly open state.

The main display section 37 clearly shows the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the variable prize winning device 32 enters the opening/closing execution mode (or when it enters the opening/closing execution mode) due to winning in the internal lottery. A round display section RS for displaying the winnings in the first operating port 33, a first special symbol displaying section AS for clearly indicating the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in the first operating port 33, and A second special symbol display section BS is provided to clearly display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the drawing.

In the round display section RS, the display of the number of round games is started at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A round game continues until the end condition of winning a predetermined upper limit number of prizes (for example, 10) to the variable winning device 32 or expiration of a predetermined upper limit release period (for example, 30 seconds) is satisfied. It is a possible game. Note that the round game ends even if the upper limit number of prizes won and the upper limit open period end conditions are not satisfied, for example, if the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times.

In the first special figure display section AS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the first operating port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the first operating port 33. The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the first operating port 33 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first special figure display section AS. After the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the second special figure display section BS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the second operating port 34. The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the second operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second special figure display section BS. After the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, a variable display is started in the corresponding special figure display section AS, BS, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above-mentioned variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

The general drawing display section 38 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the through gate 35. In this case, in the general figure display section 38, the winning pattern in the through gate 35 is used as a trigger to display the symbols in a changing manner, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the internal lottery that was performed based on the winning in the through gate 35 is displayed. The results are clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 35 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the support state in which the electric accessory 34a is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the general map display section 38. After the variable display is stopped, the state transitions to the support state. In the support state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operating port 34 is in an open state in a predetermined manner.

Although the main display section 37 and the general figure display section 38 are constructed of segment display devices having a plurality of segments, they are not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may also be used. good.

In this pachinko machine 10, a game round based on winnings in the first operating port 33 and a gaming round based on winnings in the second operating port 34 may be executed overlappingly. Specifically, if a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 while a variable display is being performed on the first special figure display section AS based on a winning in the first operating port 33, the first While continuing the variable display on the special figure display section AS, the variable display starts on the second special figure display section BS, and based on the winning in the second operating port 34, the variable display on the second special figure display section BS continues. If a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 while the game is being carried out, the variable display starts on the first special symbol display section AS while continuing the variable display on the second special symbol display section. However, there is an opening/closing execution mode when the winner is won in an internal lottery based on winning the first operating port 33, and an opening/closing execution mode when the winner is won in the internal lottery based on winning the second operating port 34. It is designed so that it will not be carried out in duplicate. These controls will be explained in detail later.

The variable prize winning device 32 is arranged downstream of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the lower region PE4. In other words, when the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to flow down the left side area PE2 (when the first firing operation is performed), and when the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to flow down the right side area PE3, A prize can be won regardless of whether the device 28 is operated (the second firing operation is performed). In other words, when the firing operation device 28 is operated aiming at the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35, the game ball is made to reach the variable prize winning device 32 without changing the operation mode. Is possible.

In this pachinko machine 10, a first variable winning device 32A and a second variable winning device 32B are provided as the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning devices 32A, 32B are opened depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode, etc. can be switched. The first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are arranged vertically so that the first variable winning device 32A is located upstream of the second variable winning device 32B.

First, the first variable winning device 32A will be explained with reference to FIG. 4.

The first variable winning device 32A is formed with a large winning hole (or special winning hole) 321 that is open in the front and back direction and is large enough for a game ball to pass through, and a game ball cannot pass through the large winning hole 321. Alternatively, it is provided with an opening/closing member 322 that switches between a closed state in which it is difficult to pass through and an open state in which game balls can pass through. The opening/closing member 322 is driven by the drive unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown) to be in an open state. In addition, the first variable winning device 32A is formed with a winning passing portion 324 at a position through which the game ball that enters the first variable winning device 32A through the big winning opening 321 is sure to pass. A detection sensor 325 for the big winning opening is provided so that a detection area exists at the position of the winning passage section 324. The detection sensor 325 for the big winning opening individually detects game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 32A.

Next, the second variable winning device 32B will be explained with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the second variable prize winning device 32B is formed with a sorting entrance 351 that is open in the front and back direction and has a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and also has a sorting entrance 351 that is open in the front and back direction and has a size that allows the game ball to pass through. It is provided with a distribution member 352 that switches between a closed state in which balls cannot pass through or difficult to pass through and an open state in which game balls can pass through. The distribution member 352 is brought into an open state by being driven by a distribution entrance drive unit 353 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 351 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game balls that flowed in from the distribution entrance 351 flow down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the guide passage 354 branches into two from a midway position, with an upstream area 355 forming an upstream side of the branching position, and one forming an upstream area 355 downstream of the branching position. It includes a V-winning area (or usable area) 356, and a discharge area (or unused area) 357, which constitutes the other downstream of the branching position. Further, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have arrived at the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the ejection area 357. When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game balls that have reached the branching position will flow into the discharge area 357, and when the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game balls will flow into the discharge area 357. The game ball that has reached the branch position will flow into the V winning area 356.

A detection sensor 361 for counting is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where game balls flowing into the upstream area 355 always pass. Based on the detection of game balls by the counting detection sensor 361, payout of prize balls corresponding to winnings to the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Further, a detection sensor 362 for V winning is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the V winning area 356 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 362, the opening/closing execution mode is started again after the opening/closing execution mode. More specifically, the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened is an opening/closing execution mode in which one round game is played, which is a so-called small win. After the opening/closing execution mode, the jackpot opening/closing execution mode in which round games are played a predetermined number of times (16 times) is executed.

Moreover, the detection sensor 363 for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game balls flowing into the ejection area 357 always pass. Based on the detection results from the ejection detection sensor 363 and the V-winning detection sensor 362, it is determined whether or not game balls remain in the second variable winning device 32B.

The shutter drive unit 359 is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. More specifically, from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened, the drive section 359 for the shutter is controlled to be driven at a predetermined period. As a result, the timing at which game balls won into the second variable winning device 32B are distributed to the V winning area 356 side and the timing at which they are distributed to the ejection area 357 side are periodically switched.

The opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened includes a plurality of opening/closing execution modes in which the timing at which the distributing member 352 of the second variable winning device 32B becomes open is different from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. Open/close execution mode is set. Although details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, by varying the timing at which the distribution member 352 becomes open, the probability that winning game balls will be distributed to the V winning area 356 will be relatively high or low. , an opening/closing execution mode for a high distribution mode (high expectation mode) and an opening/closing execution mode for a low distribution mode (low expectation mode) are set. That is, the probability that the game balls won into the second variable winning device 32B will be distributed to the V winning area 356 is higher in the opening/closing execution mode with a high distribution mode than in the opening/closing execution mode with a low distribution mode.

However, the total probability that the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low distribution mode and the opening/closing execution mode of the high distribution mode in which the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 32B. is set to be less than or equal to a predetermined probability (1/10). In other words, although the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the high distribution mode is increased, when combined with the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low distribution mode, , the winning rate to the second variable winning device 32B in the opening/closing execution mode of the high distribution mode and low distribution mode, the passing rate of the V winning area 356, and the second variable winning device 32B so that the probability is below a predetermined probability. The distribution ratio of the high distribution mode and the low distribution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is implemented is set.

The second variable winning device 32B is preferably formed so that it is possible to visually confirm from the front of the pachinko machine 10 which of the V winning area 356 and the ejection area 357 the winning game balls are distributed to. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the second variable prize winning device 32B is formed to be colored and transparent or colorless and transparent.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) symbols. In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed on the first special symbol display section AS based on a winning in the first operating port 33, a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols is performed in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol. At the same time, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the second special symbol display section BS based on a winning in the second operating port 34, a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed in accordance with that. . In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only a display performance triggered by a winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also an internal lottery based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is performed. If the winner is selected, a display effect will be performed during the opening/closing execution mode.

Display contents when symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6.

The pattern, which is a type of pattern, is composed of nine types of main patterns, each numbered from ``1'' to ``9'', and a sub-pattern consisting of a shell-shaped pattern. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It looks like this. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5(a), five effective lines are set on the display screen G, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. .

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display screen G based on a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts as follows. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols statically displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the fluctuating display of symbols ends, if it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that results in a jackpot (described later), a combination of the same odd numbered symbols will be formed on any active line, which will be described later. If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode which results in an advantageous special failure result, a combination of the same even number symbols is formed on any effective line.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

At the bottom of the display screen G, a first special figure display area GA for the first operating port 33 and a special figure display area GB for the second operating port 34 are set. In the first special figure display area GA, information regarding the internal lottery of the game round currently being executed in the first special figure display section AS is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display area GB, information regarding the internal lottery of the game round currently being executed in the second special figure display section BS is displayed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the game round on the first special figure display section AS and the game round on the second special figure display section BS may be executed in parallel. On the other hand, the game times based on the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 are executed so as to correspond to the game times of one of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Ru. In other words, although the game times in each special figure display section AS, BS are executed overlappingly, the game times on the symbol display device 41 are among the game times executed overlappingly on the special figure display sections AS, BS. is executed in such a way that it corresponds to only one of the .

The special figure display areas GA and GB each have a plurality of small display sections, and by blinking each of these display sections, variable display is possible. Further, it is possible to notify information of the corresponding internal lottery based on the combination of display colors when the blinking of each display section is stopped. That is, the special figure display areas GA and GB have an auxiliary role in the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, and when each game round overlaps, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 This is to notify the result of the game round on the side where the fluctuation display is not performed.

In this embodiment, the number of winnings entered into the first operating port 33 and the number of winnings entered into the second operating port 34 are not stored, and if a new winning occurs while the corresponding game is being played, The winning information is not stored. For example, if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 while a game round based on a winning in the first operating port 33 is being executed, the winning information is not stored and the currently running game round ends. After that, the internal lottery will not be held and the game round will not start until a new prize is won. In addition, if a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 while a game round based on a winning in the second operating port 34 is being executed, the winning information is not stored and the currently running game round ends. After that, the internal lottery will not be held and the game round will not start until a new prize is won.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of winnings entered into the through gate 35 is also not stored. In other words, if a new prize to the through gate 35 occurs while the symbols are being displayed in variable display on the general pattern display section 38 based on a prize to the through gate 35, information on that prize is displayed. is not memorized, and after the fluctuating display of the symbols being executed ends, the internal lottery is not performed until a new prize is entered into the through gate 35, and the fluctuating display of the symbols does not start.

However, if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 during the execution of a game round based on a winning in the first operating port 33, an internal lottery based on the winning during said execution will not be held, but the prize ball will be will be paid out. In addition, if a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 while a game round based on a winning in the second operating port 34 is being executed, an internal lottery based on the winning in the execution is not performed, but the prize ball will be paid out. On the other hand, if a winning occurs in the through gate 35 while the variable display based on the winning in the through gate 35 is being executed, an internal lottery etc. based on the winning in the execution is not performed and prize balls are not paid out. .

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of an inner frame 13 in which a game board 24 configured as described above is attached to a resin base 21. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a window 61 is formed in the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PE can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

Around the window section 61, light emitting means such as various lamp sections are provided. A display light emitting section 63 is provided on the right side of the window section 61 as a part of various lamp sections. Furthermore, an error light emitting section 64 is provided above the window section 61. Furthermore, a pair of left and right speaker sections 65 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge 66 and a lower bulge 67 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 67. The upper tray 66a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 67a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 66a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 81 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 81 includes a main control board housed in a board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 66a or the lower tray 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. It is equipped with a power source and a launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power source and launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal board 79 in addition to the dispensing mechanism section 73 and the control device assembly unit 74. The external terminal board 79 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 at the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15 and at an upper corner portion. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize the status of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 7.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 201 that controls the main control of the game, and a power monitoring board (power outage monitoring board) 205 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 201 is equipped with an MPU 202 . The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 and a RAM 204.

The ROM 203 is configured to use a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory for read-only purposes. The ROM 203 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data.

The RAM 204 is configured so that it can be used for reading and writing from memories such as SRAM and DRAM that require an external power supply to retain memory (that is, volatile storage means), and is capable of random access as well as When compared with the data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 203. The RAM 204 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 203.

In addition to the above elements, the MPU 202 or the main control board 201 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 203 and RAM 204 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 202, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply monitoring board 205, a payout control device 77, various prize detection sensors 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361, 362, 363, etc. are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. A power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to the power monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power monitoring board 205. Also, based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361, 362, and 363, the MPU 202 determines whether a winning ball has entered each ball entry section (ball entry judgment) or whether the ball has passed through each passing section. be exposed. Furthermore, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and also executes a support lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35.

A power monitoring board 205, a payout control device 77, and a performance control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result in the ball landing section. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the production control device 82. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 202, each drive unit 323, 353, 359 for the variable winning device 32 (first variable winning device 32A, second variable winning device 32B) and an electric accessory drive for the electric accessory 34a are provided. 34b, a main display section 37 having a first special symbol display section AS, a second special symbol display section BS, and a round display section RS, and a general symbol display section 38 are connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Further, an external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. The external terminal board 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals). For example, eight external terminals are provided, and the types of information externally output to the management computer are different. These plurality of external terminals include a terminal for externally outputting an opening/closing execution signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. The MPU 202 sets information in an external output buffer provided in the RAM 204 according to the progress of the game. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer, settings for signal output are made to the external terminal board 79, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer of the game hall. Note that each external terminal is configured using a photocoupler in order to enable transmission of electrical signals from the main control device 81 to the management computer while preventing the reverse flow.

The power supply monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and also monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and firing control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 201, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply and firing control device 78 is responsible for controlling the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 27, and drives the game ball firing mechanism 27 based on specifying a predetermined firing operation for the firing operation device 28.

The effect control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting section 63, error light emitting section 64, and speaker section 65 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. It controls the The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands input from the production control device 82.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 202>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 202 will be described using FIG. 8.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information to set the jackpot lottery, the support lottery of the electric accessory 34a, the display settings of the first special symbol display section AS and the second special symbol display section BS, and the symbol display settings of the symbol display device 41. , settings for the display of the ordinary figure display section 38, etc. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for drawing a jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used for drawing a jackpot result type, and a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. , a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in each special symbol display section AS, BS and the symbol display device 41, and an electric accessory opening counter used for a support lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 34a in a support state. C4 is used. Note that the counters C1, C2, CINI, and CS are provided in various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals.

The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is provided as an information storage means for acquiring pending information for the jackpot lottery when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The balls are stored in the reserved ball storage area 232. The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a first execution area RAE as an area for executing a jackpot lottery regarding reserved information based on winnings to the first operating port 33, and a first execution area RAE as an area for executing a jackpot lottery regarding pending information based on winnings to the second operating port 34. A second execution area RBE is provided as an area for executing the jackpot lottery.

In the first execution area RAE, each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is stored as pending information on the special drawing side based on the winning to the first operating port 33. Then, based on the reservation information stored in the first execution area RAE, a judgment on the validity of one game and a judgment on distribution are performed. The pending information stored in the first execution area RAE is deleted based on the completion of the game round being executed and the opening/closing execution mode based thereon.

In addition, in the second execution area RBE, each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is stored as pending information on the special drawing side, based on the winning to the second operating port 34. . Then, based on the pending information stored in the second execution area RBE, a judgment on the validity of one game and a judgment on distribution are performed. The pending information stored in the second execution area RBE is deleted based on the completion of the game round being executed and the opening/closing execution mode based thereon.

In these cases, in this embodiment, new pending information is not acquired (not stored) during the execution of one game, so the pending information is stored in the first execution area RAE and displayed in the first special figure display section. Even if a winning occurs at the first operating port 33 while the AS side (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "first special drawing side") game round or the opening/closing execution mode based on it is being executed, a new hold will not be issued. No information is stored in the first execution area RAE. In other words, in the first execution area RAE, pending information is stored based on the fact that a prize has been won to the first operating port 33 in a situation where the first special figure side game round and the opening/closing execution mode based on it are not performed. is stored and a game round is started. Also. While pending information is stored in the second execution area RBE and the game round on the second special figure display section BS side (hereinafter also simply referred to as "second special figure side") and the opening/closing execution mode based on it are being executed. Even if a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, new pending information is not stored in the second execution area RBE. In other words, in the second execution area RBE, pending information is stored based on the fact that a prize has been won to the second operating port 34 in a situation where the game round on the second special figure side and the opening/closing execution mode based on it are not being performed. is stored and a game round is started.

In the first execution area RAE and the second execution area RBE, it is possible to independently select whether the pending information is correct or not and to erase the pending information. Therefore, in a situation where pending information is stored in the first execution area RAE, if a winning occurs at the second operating port 34, the 2. Pending information is stored in execution area RBE. In addition, in a situation where pending information is stored in the second execution area RBE, if a winning occurs in the first actuating port 33, on the condition that pending information is not stored in the first execution area RAE, Pending information is stored in one execution area RAE.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first execution area RAE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second execution area RBE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. be done. In addition, in order to make the distinction between the first special figure side and the second special figure side easier to understand, in the following explanation, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area RAE will be referred to as the jackpot random number counter CA1, and the second execution The jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the area RBE is called the jackpot random number counter CB1.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 221 as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained using FIG. 9. As shown in FIG. 9, the success/failure tables include a win/fail table for the first special figure (first win/fail information group) in FIG. 9(a), and a win/fail table for the second special figure in FIG. 9(b) ( (second validity information group) is set. In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first special figure regarding reservation information based on winnings to the first operating port 33, and a second special symbol table regarding reservation information based on winnings to the second operating port 34. A validity table is also provided.

In each win/fail table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the results of the win/fail lottery. The random number that results in a jackpot is one in each special figure winning table, and the probability of winning a jackpot is the same on the first special figure side and the second special figure side.

As the result, a special result and a normal result are set. If the result is a special failure, one round of opening/closing execution mode is executed, whereas if the result is a normal failure, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. Based on the special winning result, the opening/closing execution mode by the second variable prize winning device 32B is performed. As already explained, in the opening/closing execution mode by the second variable winning device 32B, the shutter drive unit 359 is drive-controlled at a predetermined period determined in advance from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning game ball is placed in the V winning game ball. It is divided into an area 356 and a discharge area 357.

As the special losing result, there are provided an advantageous special losing result and a disadvantageous special losing result. When an advantageous special winning result is obtained, opening and closing control of the second variable winning device 32B is performed in a manner in which the game balls won into the second variable winning device 32B are easily distributed to the V winning area 356, resulting in a high distribution mode. mode is done. Furthermore, if the result is an unfavorable special loss, a low distribution mode is adopted in which the opening/closing control of the second variable winning device 32B is performed in a manner that makes it difficult for game balls that have won into the second variable winning device 32B to be distributed to the V winning area 356. An opening/closing execution mode is performed.

In this embodiment, the shutter drive unit 359 is driven and controlled 1.0 sec after the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning game balls are distributed to the V winning area 356. Further, the drive control is maintained for 3.0 seconds after the drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 is performed, and after 3.0 seconds, the drive control ends and the discharge area 357 is distributed. It is set as follows. That is, the shutter 358 distributes the game balls that have reached the branch position to the discharge area 357 until 1.0 sec from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the shutter 358 distributes game balls that have reached the branch position to the V winning area 356 from 1.0 sec to 4.0 sec from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, after 4.0 seconds from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the shutter 358 distributes the game balls that have reached the branch position to the discharge area 357.

In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode, which is a high distribution mode and is executed based on the advantageous special failure result, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after starting the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening period has passed, the 2 variable winning device 32B remains open for 30.0 seconds. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result, it becomes possible to enter the second variable winning device 32B after 0.5 seconds from the start timing, and during the winning period, the shutter 358 moves to the V winning area 356. It is set to include the period in which it is in a sorting state.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode that is a low distribution mode that is executed based on the unfavorable special result, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after starting the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening period has passed, the second The variable winning device 32B remains open for 0.3 seconds. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result, although it becomes possible to enter the second variable winning device 32B after 0.5 seconds from the start timing, during the period when the winning is possible, the shutter 358 is moved to the V winning area. It is set so that the period in which the data is distributed to 356 is not included.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 27 fires game balls at a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds in a situation where the firing operation device 28 is being operated. In the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result, the period during which it is possible to win the second variable winning device 32B is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. In addition, the period (0.5 sec) from when the second variable winning device 32B is opened to when the shutter drive unit 359 is drive-controlled is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the shutter drive unit The period (3.0 sec) during which the drive control of 359 is maintained is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result, in a situation where the distribution is made to the ejection area 357 side from when the second variable prize winning device 32B is in the open state until the drive section 359 for the shutter is controlled to be driven, In a situation where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter drive unit 359 is controlled to be distributed to the V winning area 356, one or more game balls enter the second variable winning device 32B. You can win.

In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result, the period from when the second variable prize winning device 32B is in the open state to when the shutter drive unit 359 is drive-controlled is determined by the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening/closing period. The period is shorter than the product of the execution mode's upper limit number of prizes. Therefore, after the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and before the shutter drive unit 359 is driven and controlled, the upper limit number of winnings is reached and the opening/closing execution mode ends (for V winnings). This prevents the opening/closing execution mode from ending without being distributed to the area 356.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result, the period (0.3 sec) during which the open state of the second variable winning device 32B is maintained is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, winning to the second variable winning device 32B is less likely to occur. Even if a winning occurs, the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state as described above does not overlap with the period in which the shutter drive unit 359 is drive-controlled, so the winning game The balls are distributed not to the V winning area 356 but to the ejection area 357 side.

In the win/fail table for the first special figure, one random number is set corresponding to an advantageous special winning result among the special winning results, and 597 random numbers are set corresponding to a disadvantageous special winning result. On the other hand, in the win/fail table for the second special symbol, 597 random numbers are set corresponding to advantageous special lose results among the special lose results, and 1 random number corresponding to disadvantageous special lose results is set.

In the success/failure table for each special figure, one random number corresponding to the normal result is set.

In other words, the probability of a jackpot result in the winning/failure lottery for the first special drawing is 1/600, the probability of a favorable special winning result is 1/600, and the probability of a disadvantageous special winning result is 600%. 597, and the probability of a normal result being a wrong result is 1/600. In addition, the probability of a jackpot result in the second special drawing lottery is 1/600, the same as the first special drawing, and the probability of a favorable special winning result is 600% higher than that of the first special drawing. The probability of an unfavorable special winning result is 1/600, which is lower than that on the first special drawing side, and the probability of a normal winning result is 1/600, the same as on the first special drawing side. Therefore, in the win/fail lottery on the first special drawing side, most of the results are unfavorable special lose results, and rarely there are normal win results, jackpot results, or advantageous special win results. In addition, in the win/fail lottery on the second special drawing side, most of the results are advantageous special lose results, and rarely there are normal win results, jackpot results, or unfavorable special win results.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first execution area RAE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second execution area RBE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. be done. In addition, in order to make the distinction between the first special figure side and the second special figure side easier to understand, in the following explanation, the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area RAE will be referred to as the jackpot type counter CA2, and the second execution The jackpot type counter C2 stored in area RBE is called jackpot type counter CB2.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 222 serving as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using FIG. 10. As shown in FIG. 10, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first special symbol in FIG. 10(a) and a distribution table for the second special symbol in FIG. 10(b). A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

In each distribution table, 8R jackpot results (results corresponding to small bonus awards) and 16R jackpot results (results corresponding to large bonus awards) are set as destinations to which game results are distributed. In the distribution table for the first special pattern, the 8R jackpot result is easier to sort than the 16R jackpot result, and in the second special pattern distribution table, the 16R jackpot result is more likely to be sorted than the 8R jackpot result. easy.

When an 8R jackpot result or a 16R jackpot result is obtained, the opening/closing execution mode is performed in the first variable prize winning device 32A. For the 8R jackpot result, the round game is played 8 times, and for the 16R jackpot result, the round game is played 16 times. In these opening/closing execution modes, in each round game, the upper limit number of winnings is set to 10, and the upper limit opening period is set to 30.0 seconds. In other words, the round game in each opening/closing execution mode depends on whether the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 32A reaches 10 or whether the open state of the first variable winning device 32A is maintained for 30.0 seconds. The process ends when either of the following conditions holds true. Here, the upper limit opening period of each round game is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit winning number. Therefore, in a round game with an 8R jackpot result or a 16R jackpot result, it is possible to expect to win the maximum number of prizes in each round game, and it is possible to obtain prize balls accordingly.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and the second special symbol display section BS of the main display section 37 and the variation display time of symbols in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU 202. used. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. The variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first execution area RAE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second execution area RBE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. be done. In order to make it easier to distinguish between the first special figure side and the second special figure side, in the following explanation, the variation type counter CS stored in the first execution area RAE will be referred to as the variation type counter CSA, and the second execution area The variation type counter CS stored in the area RBE is called a variation type counter CSB.

The variable display time on the first special figure side and the variable display time on the second special figure side are determined by the acquired variation type counters CSA and CSB and the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. It is decided based on. The configuration regarding this variable display time will be explained in detail later.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is configured such that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role execution area RCE of the electric role holding area 235 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, based on the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory execution area RCE, a support lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. Then, in accordance with the support lottery, a variable display is performed on the general figure display section 38, and based on winning the support lottery, the state shifts to the support state, and the electric accessory 34a becomes in the open state. Then, based on not winning the support lottery or ending the support state based on winning, the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area RCE is deleted.

In this embodiment, since the new electric accessory opening counter C4 (pending information on the general map side) is not acquired (not stored) during the execution of support lottery 1, the electric accessory is not stored in the electric role execution area RCE. Even if a winning occurs in the through gate 35 while the open counter C4 is being stored, new pending information on the common card side will not be stored. In other words, in the electric winning execution area RCE, based on the fact that a prize is won in the through gate 35 in a situation where the support lottery and the support state based on it are not performed, pending information on the general game side is stored and support is generated. The lottery begins.

Here, please refer to FIG. 11 for an overview of the support lottery conducted based on winnings to the through gate 35 and the support status, and the relationship between the occurrence of winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. I will explain.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when a support lottery is carried out based on winnings in the through gate 35, the time required for the support lottery, that is, the time during which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner on the general figure display section 38. In this embodiment, is a predetermined variation time (0.3 sec). The probability of winning in the support lottery is about 99.6%. Specifically, if the acquired electric accessory opening counter C4 is within the range of 0 to 249, it will be a support win, and if it is 250, it will be a support win. If so, you will not be elected. When the support is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening duration is 1.5 seconds.

In other words, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, it almost becomes a support win, and the electric accessory 34a is opened from 0.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the prize is won in the through gate 35.

Here, as already explained, the through gate 35 is arranged right above the first operating port 33, and when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs, a winning to the first operating port 33 also occurs. Further, the second operating port 34 is arranged downstream of the first operating port 33, and a prize can be won when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state.

The positional relationship between the through gate 35, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 11(b). The through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 are connected from the position of the through gate 35 (more specifically, the position where the game ball is detected by the through winning detection sensor 35a) to the position of the first operating port 33 (more specifically are arranged so that the time required for the game ball to flow down to the position where the game ball is detected by the first winning detection sensor 33a is approximately 0.1 sec. In other words, the game ball that enters the through gate 35 enters the first operating port 33 about 0.1 sec later than the winning timing.

On the other hand, the through gate 35 and the second operating port 34 extend from the position of the through gate 35 to the position of the second operating port 34 (more specifically, the position where the game ball is detected by the second winning detection sensor 34c). They are arranged so that the time required for the game balls to flow down is approximately 0.4 sec, which is longer than the time required for the game balls to flow down through the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33. That is, the game ball that did not enter the through gate 35 reaches the second operating port 34 0.4 seconds after passing by the through gate 35.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28, game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, for example, the game ball fired next to the game ball that entered the through gate 35 basically reaches the vicinity of the through gate 35 after about 0.6 seconds. If this game ball does not enter the through gate 35, it passes by the through gate 35 and reaches the vicinity of the second operating port 34 about 0.4 seconds later. In other words, approximately 1.0 sec after the previous winning in the through gate 35, the subsequent game ball will reach the second operating port 34. As described above, a support lottery is performed by winning through the through gate 35, and the game enters a support state based on the lottery. In this support state, the electric accessory 34a is in the open state from 0.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after winning the through gate 35. In other words, if a winning occurs in the through gate 35 and a subsequent game ball does not enter the through gate 35, the subsequent game ball will be placed in the electric prize at the timing when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. It is easy to reach the object 34a, and the game ball is easy to enter the second operating port 34.

The winning timing for each winning section 33 to 35 will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 11(c).

For example, if a winning occurs in the through gate 35 at timing t1, the game ball that entered the through gate 35 enters the first operating port 35 at timing t2, which is approximately 0.1 sec after the timing t1. Win a prize. Further, the support lottery is performed from the timing t1, and the fluctuation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display section 38 is carried out until the timing of t3, which is 0.3 seconds later. Then, at the timing t3, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the support state, and the electric accessory 34a is placed in the open state. This support state continues for 1.5 seconds, and the electric accessory 34a is kept in an open state from the timing t3 until the timing t6, which is 1.5 seconds later.

The game ball fired next to the game ball that entered the through gate 35 at the timing t1 reaches the through gate 35 at the timing t4, which is about 0.6 seconds later. If the game ball does not enter the through gate 35, the game ball reaches the electric accessory 34a at timing t5, which is 0.4 seconds later. As described above, at the timing t5, the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, and the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 34a at the timing t5 can enter the second operating port 34.

Here, the game ball fired next to the game ball that reached the through gate 35 at the timing t4 also goes to the second operating port 34 at the timing when it could have entered the second operating port 34 if it did not enter the through gate 35. On the other hand, the game ball fired after the game ball that reached the through gate 35 at the timing t4 is an electric accessory at the timing when it reaches the second operating port 34 even if it does not enter the through gate 35. 34a is in a closed state, making it difficult to enter the second operating port 34. In other words, after winning the first through gate 35, out of the game balls fired after the winning game ball, winning of a predetermined number (3) or more game balls into the second operating port 34 is restricted. It can be said that In other words, the configuration is such that two game balls, which are less than the predetermined number, can enter the second operating port 34 among the subsequent game balls for one support win.

In addition, since the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state at the timing when the game ball that was launched before the game ball that entered the through gate 35 at the timing t1 reaches the second operation port 34, the second operation is performed. It is difficult to win a prize of 34. Therefore, after winning into the first through gate 35, it can be said that the game ball that was fired before the winning game ball is also restricted from winning into the second operating port 34.

Therefore, the configuration is such that at most two game balls can enter the second operating port 34 for one support win.

Here, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 at timing t2, a game round on the first special figure side is executed based on the winning. If the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side is set to, for example, 10 seconds, the game round on the first special figure side will continue from the timing t2 to the timing t7, which is 10 seconds later. In this embodiment, the timing of the first special figure side is such that the timing from t3 to t6 when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state is included in the timing from t2 to t7 when the game round on the first special figure side is executed. The variable display time of game times can be set. In other words, if a winning to the second operating port 34 is possible, a game round on the first special figure side is being carried out, and a game round on the second special figure side based on a winning to the second operating opening 34 is being carried out. When this starts, it means that the game round on the first special figure side is being carried out.

As already explained, the MPU 202 uses the value of the variation type counter CS stored in each execution area RAE, RBE to calculate the variation display time in the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS. The variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination. In addition, the MPU 202 uses the values of the jackpot random number counters CA1, CB1 and the values of the jackpot type counters CA2, CB2 stored in each execution area RAE, RBE to display the first special figure display part AS and the second special figure display part AS. The stop result at the BS is determined using the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (eg, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a game ball has won into the through gate 35, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, the winning detection flag for the through gate, the winning detection flag for the first operating port, and the second operating port Stores corresponding winning detection flags such as winning detection flags for winnings. When it is determined that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 321, a winning detection flag for the big winning hole is stored. When a winning to the second variable winning device 32B occurs (a game ball is detected by the detection sensor 361 for counting), a winning detection flag for winning to the second variable winning device 32B is stored. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning area 356, a detection flag for V winning is stored. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge area 357, a discharge detection flag is stored. Note that in a configuration that does not have other sensors, such as a configuration that does not include the second variable prize winning device 32B, a configuration that does not perform the state reading process of those sensors may be adopted.

Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204.

In the subsequent step S104, a winning process for a through prize is executed in conjunction with a winning in the through gate 35. After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process advances to step S105, in which the winning process for the actuated openings associated with the winning of the operating openings 33 and 34 is executed, and this timer interrupt processing ends. do.

<Winning process for through>
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13, the through winning process will be described.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the prize in the through gate 35 or not based on the detection state of the through prize detection sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35, in step S202, it is determined whether or not the accessory reserve storage number SN stored in the electric role reserve area 235 is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment). Determine whether 1 is added to the accessory retention memory number SN when a support lottery is held in the electric role execution area RCE based on winnings in the through gate 35, and if you are not selected in the support lottery, or when the support lottery If the support status based on the support win ends in the event that the support win is won, 1 will be subtracted.

If it is not determined in step S201 that a prize has been won in the through gate 35, or if it is determined in step S202 that the value of the accessory retention memory number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (not 0), the electric accessory This winning process ends without storing the value of the open counter C4.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the accessory reserve memory number SN is 0, the process proceeds to step S203, and the accessory reserve memory number SN is incremented by 1. In the subsequent step S204, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electric role execution area RCE of the electric role holding area 235 of the RAM 204. After that, the main winning process ends.

<Winning process for actuation port>
Next, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S301, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 33 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 33. When it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, in step S302, a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 77 to pay out four game balls. In the following step S303, it is determined whether the first starting pending memory number RaN stored in the pending ball storage area 232 is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (whether it is 0 or not). The first start pending storage number RaN is incremented by 1 when a winning lottery is held in the first execution area RAE based on winnings to the first actuating port 33, and 1 is added to the first starting pending memory number RaN when a winning lottery is held in the first execution area RAE. In the case of a winning result, or in the case of a result corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot result, various special winning results), 1 is subtracted when the opening/closing execution mode based on the lottery result ends.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, a process of adding 1 to the first start pending storage number RaN is executed in step S304. Thereafter, in step S305, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (CA1), the jackpot type counter C2 (CA2), and the fluctuation type counter CS (CSA) in the first execution area RAE. In the following step S306, a first pending command setting process is executed. In this process, information that a prize has been won to the first operating port 33 is output to the performance control device 82 side, and the game information regarding the pending information acquired based on the current winning to the first operating port 33 is output. A process is performed to output the information on the game (game result information, variable display time information, etc.) to the performance control device 82 side.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a situation where pending information is stored in the first execution area RAE, even if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33, the pending information is not acquired. Even if a prize is won to the first operating port 33, the first pending command is not output. In other words, the case where a winning occurs in the first operating port 33, pending information is acquired, and the first pending command is output is the case where a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 and the first pending command is output. This is a case where the game round on the first special figure side can be started, and at the start of the game round on the first special figure side, commands for the game round (variation command, type command) are output as described later. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the first pending command is not output in any situation. This also applies to the second pending command, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in either step S301 or step S303, or after executing the process in step S306, the process advances to step S307. In step S307, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second operating port 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second operating port 34. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 77 to pay out five game balls in step S308. In the following step S309, it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the pending ball storage area 232 is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (whether it is 0 or not). The second start pending storage number RbN is incremented by 1 when a winning lottery is held in the second execution area RBE based on winnings to the second actuating port 34, and 1 is added to the second starting pending memory number RbN when a winning lottery is held in the second execution area RBE based on winnings to the second operating port 34. In the case of a winning result, or in the case of a result corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot result, various special winning results), 1 is subtracted when the opening/closing execution mode based on the lottery result ends.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, a process of adding 1 to the second start pending storage number RbN is executed in step S310. Thereafter, in step S311, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (CB1), the jackpot type counter C2 (CB2), and the fluctuation type counter CS (CSB) in the second execution area RBE. In the following step S312, a second pending command setting process is executed. In this process, information that a prize has been won to the second operating port 34 is output to the production control device 82 side, and the game information regarding the pending information acquired based on the current winning to the second operating port 34 is output. A process is performed to output the information on the game (game result information, variable display time information, etc.) to the performance control device 82 side. If a negative determination is made in either step S307 or step S309, or after executing the process in step S312, the winning process for the main operating opening is ended.

The prize ball command set in steps S302 and S308 above is transmitted to the payout control device 77 in the external output process of the normal process described later. Further, the hold command set in steps S306 and S312 is also transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. These hold commands include information as to which of the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 the winning is based on, and the production control device 82 issues the hold command. By receiving the command, the display control device 212 changes the display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 side, and controls the first special symbol display area GA and second special symbol display area GB on the display screen G. Make display settings.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the process of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S410 and S411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external output processing is executed in step S401. In the external output process of step S401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 77. Further, if a command for performance such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, or a hold command is set, it is transmitted to the production control device 82.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the subsequent step S403, a first game round control process is executed to control the game based on winnings to the first operating port 33. In this first game round control process, jackpot determination on the first special figure side, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first special symbol display section AS, etc. are performed.

After executing the first game round control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, and a second game round control process for controlling the game based on winnings in the second actuating port 34 is executed. In this second game round control process, jackpot determination on the second special figure side, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the second special symbol display section BS, etc. are performed.

After each gaming cycle control process is executed in steps S403 and S404, a gaming state transition process is executed in step S405. Through this gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode or the like.

In the following step S306, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operating port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role object 34a is set in an open state using the numerical information acquired from the electric role object release counter C4 stored in the electric role execution area RCE of the electric role holding area 235 of the RAM 204. An electric role opening lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role is open, and when the electric role open state is won, opening/closing processing of the electric role accessory 34a is executed.

In the subsequent step S307, a V distribution setting process regarding drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 in the second variable winning device 32B is executed. In this process, the shutter drive unit 359 is controlled based on the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (in this embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode based on various special deviation results) in which drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 is to be performed. Drive control is performed to switch between distributing the game balls that have reached the branch position to the V winning area 356 or to the discharging area 357.

The processing from step S403 to step S407 will be explained in detail later.

In step S408, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 27 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 78. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S409, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Furthermore, in step S411, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

<First game round control process>
Next, the first game round control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 18.

In the first game round control process, first in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process to be described later, and is cleared when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the same gaming state transition process.

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the main game is continued without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the process for starting the game round from step S503 to step S507 and the process for advancing the game round from step S508 to step S516. The control process ends. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the game round on the first special figure side will not be started regardless of whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the first special figure display section AS is in a variable display mode. This determination is made by determining whether or not the first variable display flag (first variable display information) is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first variable display flag is stored when a variable display is started for the first special figure display section AS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

If the first special figure display section AS is not in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to steps S503 to S507 for starting the game round. In the process for starting a game round, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the first start pending storage number RaN is "0". The case where the first start pending memory number RaN is "0" means that no winning has occurred at the first operating port 33. Therefore, the first game round control process is immediately ended. If the first start pending storage number RaN is not "0", it is determined in step S504 whether the second winning flag or the second special losing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

The second winning flag is a flag that is stored when a jackpot is won in the lottery on the second special drawing side, and is erased at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot. In addition, the second special winning flag is set at the start of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed based on any special winning result in the lottery on the second special drawing side (more specifically, in the special winning result). This is a flag that is stored at the end of a certain game round) and erased at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. If the second winning flag or the second special losing result flag is stored, the first game round control process is immediately ended.

That is, in this embodiment, although the lottery system on the first special map side and the lottery system on the second special map side can be executed in parallel, if one lottery system results in a jackpot, The configuration is such that the start of the other lottery-based game round is restricted. By doing this, even though you have achieved a jackpot result in one lottery system, you are too worried about the result of the other lottery system and cannot concentrate on the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result. It becomes possible to avoid the event.

Furthermore, the system is configured to restrict the start of the game round of the other lottery system based on not only the jackpot in the other lottery system but also the special winning result. In this way, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which a game round with a jackpot result is started in the other lottery system while a game round with a special winning result is being executed, and the opening/closing execution mode overlaps. becomes possible.

However, if the other lottery game result is a jackpot result, from the time of implementation of the lottery that results in the jackpot result, that is, from the start of the game round of the other lottery system that results in the jackpot result, the other game If the start of a round is restricted and the other lottery game result is a special winning result, after the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result (after the end of the game round with the special winning result), , the start of the other game round is restricted. By doing this, while ensuring that one jackpot result is not affected by the other lottery result, there is also a possibility that if one lottery result is a special outlier, the other lottery result will become a jackpot result. It is possible to leave it behind.

In this way, the present embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of lottery systems can be executed in parallel, while setting a result that can limit the other lottery system. In other words, these multiple lottery systems may be held in parallel, or they may be held independently.We want to increase the efficiency of drawings and improve gameplay through parallel drawings, while also attracting interest. This makes it possible to highlight the lottery system on the side.

If the second winning flag or the second special losing flag is not stored in step S504, a first data setting process is executed in step S505. In the first data setting process, the pending information stored in the first execution area RAE, that is, the jackpot random number counter CA1, the jackpot type counter CA2, and the fluctuation type counter CSA, is set as pending information for validity determination. In addition, in this embodiment, since the process equivalent to the first data setting process is performed at the time of winning the first operating port 33, this process can be omitted.

In step S506, a first fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display section AS and the symbol display device 41. Then, in step S507, after transmitting and setting the variable command and type command for starting these variable displays, the first game round control process is ended. The variation command and the type command are transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The production control device 82 controls the display control device 212 based on the received variation command and type command to display variations in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G and display variations in the first special symbol display area GA. Perform processing to start.

Here, the first fluctuation start process in step S506 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17.

In the process for starting the first variation, first, in step S601, a validity table (FIG. 9(a)) for the first special symbol is obtained, and a validity determination is performed in step S602. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1 stored in the first execution area RAE is the value set as a jackpot win in the first special symbol winning/failure table, and is set as an advantageous special winning result. It is determined whether or not it matches either the value or the value set as the unfavorable special out-result winning result.

After the process in step S602, in steps S603 to S617, a process for setting the game result of the current game round is executed, and a process is executed on the first special figure display section AS in the current game round. Executes processing to set the stop result when ending the variable display. In this case, when setting a stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as a stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

Specifically, first in step S603, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S602 is a jackpot win. In the case of a jackpot win, in steps S604 to S610, processing for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step S604, a process of storing the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. The first winning flag is a flag that is stored when a jackpot is won in the lottery on the first special drawing side, and is erased at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot. By storing the first winning flag, processing for restricting the start of the game round on the second special figure side and canceling the variable display is performed.

In the following step S605, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 10(a)) for the first special symbol display section. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter CA2 stored in the first execution area RAE is included in the numerical range of the 16R jackpot result or the numerical range of the 8R jackpot result.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 16R jackpot result based on the processing result of step S605. If it is a 16R jackpot result, the process advances to step S607, and the first special pattern display section AS displays the fluctuation display while the stop result that will result in a 16R jackpot result is displayed on the first special pattern display section AS. A stop result setting process for the 16R jackpot is executed to end the process. In addition, in step S608, the first side 16R flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is a 16R jackpot result of the lottery system on the first special drawing side, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. .

A negative determination in step S606 means that the current jackpot result is an 8R jackpot result. In this case, in step S609, the 8R to end the variable display of the first special pattern display section AS is displayed in the first special pattern display section AS with the stop result that will result in the occurrence of the 8R jackpot result. Execute the stop result setting process for jackpot. Further, in step S610, the first side 8R flag, which is information indicating that the current game result is an 8R jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

If it is determined in step S603 that it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S611, and it is determined whether the current losing result is any special winning result. If the result is any special failure, the process advances to step S612, and it is determined whether the result is an advantageous special failure. If the result is an advantageous special off result, in step S613, the first special figure display section AS is displayed with the stop result that will result in an advantageous special off result being displayed on the first special figure display section AS. In order to end the variable display, a stop result setting process for advantageous special failure is executed. In addition, in step S614, the first side advantageous opening flag, which is information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode based on the current game result is based on the advantageous special winning result of the lottery system on the first special symbol side, is set. The flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

A negative determination in step S612 means that the current game result is a special unfavorable result. In this case, in step S615, in order to end the variable display of the first special figure display section AS with the stop result that will result in an unfavorable special out result being displayed on the first special figure display section AS, Execute stop result setting processing for unfavorable special failure. In addition, in step S616, the first side unfavorable opening flag, which is information for indicating that the opening/closing execution mode based on the current game result is based on the unfavorable special winning result of the lottery system on the first special symbol side, is set. The flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

If it is determined in step S611 that the result is not a special failure, this means that the current failure result is a normal failure result. In this case, in step S617, a normal change is made to end the variable display of the first special figure display section AS with the stop result that would normally result in an out-of-order result being displayed on the first special figure display section AS. Executes stop result setting processing for failure.

After executing any one of steps S608, S610, S614, S616, and S617, the process advances to step S618. In step S618, the first game counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is updated.

The first game counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of times the first special symbol side game has been executed after a predetermined game result has been achieved. More specifically, it is a counter for keeping track of the number of times the game on the first special symbol side has been played after a jackpot result was obtained in the winning/failure lottery on the first special symbol side. In step S618, a process of adding 1 to the first game counter is executed.

In the following step S619, a first variable display time setting process is executed. The first variable display time setting process is a process for setting the variable display time of the first special figure side game round that starts this time. This setting process will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S620, variable display in the first special figure display section AS is started, and then the first variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the first game round control process (FIG. 16), if it is determined in step S502 that the variable display of the first special symbol display section AS is being performed, the process advances to step S508. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the game round on the first special figure side being executed has elapsed.

Here, in this embodiment, at the start of the game round on the first special figure side, numerical information corresponding to the length of the variable display time is input to the first elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Ru. The first elapsed counter is updated to be decremented at a predetermined period. Then, when it becomes the initial value (0), it is understood that the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side has ended. In step S508, if the first elapsed counter is not the initial value (0), it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed.

If it is determined in step S508 that the variable display time has not elapsed, then in step S509 it is determined whether the second winning flag or the second special losing flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S510, executes the variable display process, and then ends the first game round control process. The variable display process is a process that performs variable display (light emission control of the light emitting unit) in the first special figure display section AS.

If it is determined in step S509 that the second winning flag or the second special losing flag is stored, the forced termination process of step S511 and step S512 is performed.

In the forced termination process in step S511, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, in step S701, a process is executed to rewrite the game result of the game period in progress to a normal losing result. Here, if the game result of the game round being fluctuated is any special outlier result, a corresponding flag is stored as described above. Specifically, if the current forced termination process is the process of the first special figure side game round, the first side advantageous release flag or the first side disadvantageous release flag is stored. In the rewriting process of step S701, by erasing this open flag, a process is performed in which the game result of the current game round is made a normal losing result.

Then, in step S702, a process of clearing the variable display time of the changing game time, that is, a process of rewriting the first elapsed counter to the initial value (0), is executed, and this forced termination process is ended.

In step S512, a forced termination command is set to be sent to make the sub-side production control device 82 understand that an event has occurred that will forcefully terminate the first game round that is being executed. The forced termination command is sent to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The production control device 82 controls the display control device 212 based on the received forced termination command to execute processing for changing the contents of the variable display of symbols on the display screen G.

As already explained, if the game round of the second special figure side is being held at the start of the game round of the first special figure side, the lottery result of the game round of the second special figure side is the jackpot result. If there is, the game round on the first special figure side will not start. Furthermore, even if the game round on the second special figure side is not being executed at the start of the game round on the first special figure side, if the opening/closing execution mode based on the game result on the second special figure side is being carried out, The game round on the 1st special figure side does not start. As will be described later, this relationship is also applied at the start of the game round on the second special figure side, and if the game round on the first special figure side is being carried out at the start of the game round on the second special figure side. If it is a jackpot result, the game round on the second special figure side will not be started, and even if the opening/closing execution mode based on the game result on the first special figure side is carried out, the game round on the second special figure side will not be executed.

In other words, when the game round on the first special figure side starts, if neither the game round on the second special figure side nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game round on the second special figure side starts. Even if it is, it is either a special outlier result or a normal outlier result. Then, in the case where it is determined in step S509 that the second winning flag or the second special losing flag is stored and the forced termination process in steps S511 and S512 is performed, the first special symbol side In a lottery system, after the start of a game round that does not result in a jackpot, a game round on the second special figure side is started during the game round on the first special figure side, and the game round that started is a jackpot result. This is either the case where the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round which is the special winning result on the second special figure side ends during the game round on the first special figure side. In such a case, the game round on the first special figure side is forcibly ended, and the game round on the second special figure side and the opening/closing execution mode based on the game round are executed with priority.

In step S508, if the variable display time has elapsed and it is the end timing of the game round on the first special figure side, the process advances to step S513. In step S513, it is determined whether the first side advantageous release flag or the first side disadvantageous release flag is stored. The case where these flags are stored is the case where the game result of the game round on the first special figure side that ends this time is an advantageous special winning result or a disadvantageous special winning result. In this case, in step S514, processing is executed to store the first special outlier flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the start of the game round on the second special figure side is restricted, or the game round on the second special figure side that is being executed is forcibly ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S513, or after executing the process in step S514, a process for ending variation is executed in step S515. In this process, the first special figure display unit AS is controlled so that the stop result set in the first variation start process is displayed. Then, in step S516, a variation end command is set, and then the first game round control process is ended. The variation end command is sent to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the production control device 82, based on receiving the variation end command, the variation display by each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 being executed and the variation display in the first special symbol display area GA are changed to the stop result corresponding to the current game result. The display control device 212 is controlled so as to end the process as follows.

Here, if the game result of the game round on the first special symbol side is a special winning result, the current game round ends after the forced termination process in step S511, and the current game time ends after the fluctuation end process in step S515. There are cases where the game round ends. In this case, when going through the forced termination process of step S511, the game result is rewritten to the normal losing result as described above and the game ends, so the corresponding release flag (first side advantageous release flag or first side disadvantageous release flag) is erased, and the first special outlier flag is not stored. On the other hand, in the case of going through the variation end process of step S515, the game result ends without being rewritten, so the corresponding open flag is maintained and the first special lose flag is stored. In other words, in the case of a special winning result that causes the opening/closing execution mode to be executed after the game round ends, the game round ends with the type of the current special winning result being stored and retained, and the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the game round ends. If the mode is not implemented (the opening/closing execution mode of the other lottery system is implemented), the type of special winning result this time will be deleted (the type of special winning result of the other lottery system will be stored and retained) . By doing so, in a configuration in which the number of game rounds with special winning results overlaps, it becomes possible to clearly understand which lottery system is the opening/closing execution mode based on, without increasing the types of flags.

<Second game round control process>
Next, the second game round control process 404 in the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 and 20. In addition, since the second game round control process is basically the same process as the first game round control process, the differences will be mainly explained.

That is, in the second game round control process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, similarly to step S501. If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the second game round control process is immediately ended. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display section BS is undergoing variable display. If the variable display is not in progress, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the second special symbol side pending information is stored with reference to the second start pending storage number RbN. If the reservation information on the second special symbol side is stored, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the first winning flag or the first special losing flag is stored. If neither is stored, the second data setting process is executed in step S805, the second variation start process is executed in step S806, and then, the variation command and the type command are used for effect control in step S807. After setting it as a transmission target to the device 82, the second game round control process ends.

The process for starting the second variation in step S806 corresponds to the process for starting the first variation. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, in steps S901 to S903, a process for determining the game result in the current game round on the second special symbol side is executed. In this case, in step S901, unlike step S601, a second special symbol validity table (FIG. 9(b)) is obtained. As already explained, in the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side, the probability of a jackpot result is the same, but the probability of an advantageous special winning result and the probability of an unfavorable special winning result are different. The lottery system is different. More specifically, the second special pattern side has a higher probability of an advantageous special winning result than the first special pattern side, and the first special pattern side has a higher probability of an unfavorable special winning result than the second special pattern side. There is a high probability that this will occur.

After performing the win/fail determination process in step S902, it is determined in step S903 whether or not the game result of the current game round on the second special figure side is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process advances to step S904 and a process of storing a second winning flag in the RAM 204 is executed. Through this processing, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S504 and restrict the start of the game round on the first special figure side, or to forcefully terminate the game round on the first special figure side by making an affirmative determination in step S509. It becomes possible.

In step S905, distribution determination processing is executed. In this process, unlike step S605, the distribution table for the second special symbol (FIG. 10(b)) is obtained and the type of the current jackpot result is determined. As already explained, in the distribution table for the second special drawing, it is set so that it can be distributed to the 16R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result. The probability of a 16R jackpot result is higher on the second special figure side than on the first special figure side.

In step S906, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result. If it is a 16R jackpot result, processing for the 16R jackpot result is performed in steps S907 and S908. The processing in step S907 and step S908 is generally similar to the processing in step S607 and step S608. However, in step S908, the second side 16R flag is stored in the RAM 204 instead of the first side 16R flag so that the MPU 202 can distinguish between the 16R jackpot result on the first special drawing side and the 16R jackpot result on the second special drawing side. Execute the process to store in .

If it is determined in step S906 that it is not a 16R jackpot result, it means that the current jackpot result is an 8R jackpot result. In this case, processing for the 8R jackpot result is performed in steps S909 and S910. Step S909 and step S910 are generally similar to the processing in step S609 and step S610. However, in step S610, the second side 8R flag is stored in the RAM 204 instead of the first side 8R flag so that the MPU 202 can distinguish between the 8R jackpot result on the first special figure side and the 8R jackpot result on the second special figure side. Execute the process to store in .

If the determination in step S903 is negative, processing for failure is performed in steps S911 to S917. These processes are generally similar to the processes in steps S611 to S617 described above. However, in step S914, the second side advantageous release flag is stored instead of the first side advantageous release flag, and in step S916, the second side disadvantageous release flag is stored instead of the first side disadvantageous release flag. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between the advantageous special winning result on the first special drawing side and the advantageous special winning result on the second special drawing side, and the disadvantageous special winning result on the first special drawing side and the disadvantageous special winning result on the second special drawing side. It becomes possible to distinguish between a disadvantageous result on the side and a special failure result.

After executing any one of steps S908, S910, S914, S916, and S917, the process advances to step S918. In step S918, the second game counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is updated.

The second game counter corresponds to the first game counter, and is a counter for keeping track of the number of times the second special symbol side game is played after a predetermined game result is achieved. More specifically, it is a counter for keeping track of the number of times the second special map side game is played after a jackpot result is achieved in the win/fail lottery on the second special map side. In step S918, a process of adding 1 to the second game counter is executed.

In the following step S919, a second variable display time setting process is executed. The setting process of the second variable display time is a process for setting the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side that starts this time. This setting process will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S920, a process for starting a variable display is executed, and then the second variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the second game round control process (FIG. 19), if it is determined in step S802 that the second special figure display section BS is in the process of variable display, the second special figure being executed in step S808 It is determined whether the variable display time in the game round on the side has elapsed.

Here, in this embodiment, at the start of the game round on the second special figure side, numerical information corresponding to the length of the variable display time is input to the second elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Ru. The second elapsed counter is updated to be decremented at a predetermined period. Then, when it becomes the initial value (0), it is understood that the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side has ended. In step S808, if the second elapsed counter is not the initial value (0), it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed.

If it is determined in step S808 that the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined in step S809 whether the first winning flag or the first special losing flag is stored in the RAM 204. This processing corresponds to the processing in step S509 above, and a jackpot occurs in the lottery on the first special drawing side during the execution of a game round in which the second special drawing side has a special winning result or a normal winning result. This is a process for determining whether or not the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result on the first special figure side has been started.

If it is determined in step S809 that neither the first winning flag nor the first special losing flag is stored, in step S810 the second special symbol display section BS is used for variable display. After executing the process, the second game round control process is ended. If it is determined in step S809 that the first winning flag or the first special losing flag is stored, forced termination processing is executed in step S811. This process is generally similar to the process in FIG. 18, and includes the process of rewriting the game result of the game round being executed (in this case, the game round on the second special symbol side) to a normal winning result in step S701. The variable display time is cleared in step S702. However, in this case, in step S701, when the lottery result in the game round on the second special symbol side being executed is a special winning result, a process is performed to rewrite the game result to a normal winning result. More specifically, by erasing the second-side advantageous release flag or the second-side disadvantageous release flag, a process of rewriting the result to a normal failure result is executed. Then, in step S812, a forced termination command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 82, and the second game round control process is ended.

If the variable display time has elapsed in step S808 and it is the end timing of the game round on the second special figure side, the process advances to step S813. In step S813, it is determined whether the second side advantageous release flag or the second side disadvantageous release flag is stored. The case where these flags are stored is the case where the game result of the game round on the second special figure side that ends this time is an advantageous special winning result or a disadvantageous special winning result. In this case, in step S814, a process of storing a second special outlier flag is executed. As a result, the start of the game round on the first special figure side is restricted, or the game round on the first special figure side that is being executed is forcibly ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, or after executing the process in step S814, a process for ending variation is executed in step S815. In this process, the second special figure display section BS is controlled so that the stop result set in the second variation start process is displayed. Then, in step S816, a variation end command is set, and then the second game round control process is ended. The variation end command is sent to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the production control device 82, based on receiving the variation end command, the variation display by each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 being executed and the variation display in the first special symbol display area GA are changed to the stop result corresponding to the current game result. The display control device 212 is controlled so as to end the process as follows.

As in the case of the first game round control process, in the second game round control process, if the game result of the game round on the second special symbol side is a special winning result, the current There are cases in which the game round ends, and cases in which the current game round ends after the fluctuation end processing in step S815. In this case, when going through the forced termination process of step S811, the corresponding release flag (second side advantageous release flag or second side disadvantageous release flag) is erased, and the second special failure flag is not stored. On the other hand, when going through the variation end process of step S815, the corresponding open flag is maintained and the second special out flag is stored.

As described above, in this embodiment, by the first game round control process and the second game round control process, two lottery game rounds can be executed independently, and one lottery type game round can be executed independently. When a jackpot occurs, the system is configured to restrict the start of the other lottery-based game round or forcibly end the game round in progress. In this way, even if multiple lottery games are held in parallel, it is possible to suppress a decrease in attention to the jackpot results.

In addition, if a special winning result occurs in one lottery system, the start of the other game round will not be restricted while the game round that is the special winning result is being executed, but the game round that is the special winning result will not be restricted. Based on the termination (the opening/closing execution mode is started), the start of the other game round is restricted, and the other game round that is currently being executed is forcibly ended.

Therefore, in both lottery systems, game rounds with special winning results may be held in parallel. In this case, the opening/closing execution mode of the side whose game round ended first will be implemented, and the other special winning result will be rewritten to the normal winning result. For example, while running a game game in which the lottery system on the first special drawing side has a special winning result of either an advantageous special winning result or a disadvantageous special winning result, the lottery system on the second special drawing side has an advantageous special winning result. This is a configuration in which a game round with a special winning result of either a special winning result or a disadvantageous special winning result can be executed. In this case, if the game round on the first special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result on the first special figure side will be implemented, and if the game round on the second special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode will be implemented. The opening/closing execution mode will be implemented based on the special out result on the 2nd special figure side. In this way, in a configuration where special winning results overlap in the game rounds of both lottery systems, the opening/closing execution mode to be implemented differs depending on which game round ends first, so It is possible to draw a high level of interest not only to the game results but also to the progress of the game.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S405 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 23.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S1002, and stores in the RAM 204 one of the first winning flag and the second winning flag, one of the first special losing flag and the second special losing flag, Or it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored. The V winning flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the fact that the winning game ball of the second variable winning device 32B passes through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. Based on the storage of the V winning flag, a new opening/closing execution mode is executed after the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result.

If none of the flags are stored in step S1002, the game state transition process is ended. If any flag is stored, the process advances to step S1003, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the corresponding game round or the end timing of the corresponding opening/closing execution mode. More specifically, if any winning flag or any special losing flag is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the corresponding game round, and the V winning flag is stored. If so, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the corresponding opening/closing execution mode. If it is not any of the end timings, the game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is any of the end timings, the process advances to step S1004 to execute opening/closing execution mode start processing. In the start processing, an opening standby time (start standby period) is set for waiting without starting opening of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, opening standby time information previously stored in the ROM 203 is set in a standby time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 . In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode, and the waiting time information is different for the opening/closing execution mode that corresponds to a jackpot result than for the opening/closing execution mode that corresponds to a special winning result. The standby time is set to be longer than the mode. For example, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to any jackpot result, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 second, and in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a special winning result, the waiting time is 0. The count value of the waiting time information is set to be .5 seconds. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, special winning results are frequently obtained as a result of the winning/failure lottery, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning results is executed almost every time the game is played. Therefore, by setting the opening waiting time short in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result as described above, it is possible to realize smooth progress of the game.

Note that the waiting time for the opening may be changed depending on the type of the special result. For example, the opening waiting time may be longer for an advantageous special failure result than for an unfavorable special failure result. In this way, it becomes possible to notify the opening/closing execution mode, which is more advantageous to the player, before the opening/closing execution mode starts. In addition, during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the key to the game is whether or not it can pass through the V winning area 356, so it is also important to ensure time to prepare for the firing operation etc. It is preferable to have a long waiting time for the opening of advantageous special outlier results. However, when increasing the waiting time for the opening of advantageous special losing results, the waiting time should not overlap with the period in which the shutter 358 is distributing to the V winning area 356, or if it overlaps. It is preferable to create a time period that does not overlap even if there is one, and to allow the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32B during the non-overlapping time period.

In subsequent step S1005, in order to set the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode, the presence or absence of a special failure flag is checked. That is, it is determined whether any one of the first special failure flag and the second special failure flag is stored. If none of the special losing flags are stored, it is determined in step S1006 whether any of the first side 16R flag, second side 16R flag, and V winning flag is stored. If any of these flags are stored, the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the 16R jackpot result, or the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. This means that the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the inflow of game balls) occurs. In this case, in step S1007, the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is set to "16". The first round counter RC1 is for counting the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1006, the current opening/closing execution mode is an opening/closing execution mode based on the 8R jackpot result, and in this case, the first round counter RC1 is set to "8" in step S1008. If it is determined in step S1005 that any special failure flag is stored, "1" is set in the first round counter RC1 in step S1009.

After executing the processing in step S1007, step S1008, or step S1009, an opening command is set in step S1010. This set opening command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in external output processing in normal processing. This opening command includes information on the type of game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and this determined display mode is outputted from the performance control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the production control device 82 so that a display (for example, video display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed. For example, if it is the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, this is notified and the symbol display device 41 is display-controlled to notify the number of rounds (16 or 8) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, even if it is in the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds, it does not notify that fact from the beginning, but instead makes a notification as if it is in the opening/closing execution mode of 8 rounds, and then announces that it is the 16th round in the middle. It may also be configured to perform a so-called promotion effect. Also, for example, if the opening/closing execution mode is based on any special winning result, it will notify that fact, and it will also notify that the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds will occur after a V win occurs. The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled. Then, if the opening/closing execution mode is newly started based on the V winning (opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning flag), the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled to congratulate it. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode based on unfavorable special losing results, V winnings basically do not occur, and since the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special winning results frequently occurs, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which notification for the opening/closing execution mode is not performed based on the unfavorable special result. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by frequent notifications of opening/closing execution modes in which winnings are not possible.

In the following step S1011, after executing the external signal setting process, the main gaming state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether any of the various 16R flags and the various 8R flags are stored in the RAM 204, and if any of the flags is stored, the The signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal is set as the jackpot signal output state. As a result, if the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and a jackpot occurs at the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what I did.

In addition, in the external signal setting process, if any special disconnection flag is stored in the RAM 204, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special disconnection signal provided on the external terminal board 79 is output as a special disconnection signal. state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special loss signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the special loss signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device outputs the special loss signal to the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to know that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred based on the disconnection result.

Note that whether or not the special failure signal is output may be changed depending on the type of special failure result. For example, based on the favorable special failure result out of the favorable special failure result and the unfavorable special failure result, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special failure signal provided on the external terminal board 79 is set to the special failure signal output state, and the unfavorable special failure result is set to the special failure signal output state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the special failure signal output state is not made based on the special failure result. In this way, the management control device on the gaming hall side can grasp the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode based on an advantageous special winning result, while also controlling the opening/closing execution mode based on a disadvantageous special winning result that frequently occurs. There is no need to keep track of the data, and it is possible to avoid the complexity of data management and the increase in processing load due to frequent signal output.

In addition, in the external signal setting process, when the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 204, the signal output state of the output terminal for the V winning signal provided on the external terminal board 79 is set to the V winning signal output state. . As a result, if the output terminal for the V winning signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the V winning signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device outputs the V win signal to the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to know that the opening/closing execution mode based on winning has occurred.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process advances to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S1013. Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether the grand prize opening 321 or the distribution entrance 351 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving states of the drive unit 323 of the first variable winning device 32A and the driving unit 353 of the second variable winning device 32B. If the grand prize opening 321 and the distribution entrance 351 are not open, it is determined in step S1102 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S1103, the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 are It is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 provided in the first timer counter TC1 is "0". The first timer counter TC1 is a counter for the MPU 202 to specify various control timings during the opening/closing execution mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 every time a timer interrupt process is executed.

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" or if the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process advances to step S1104, and any special outlier flag is stored in the RAM 204. Determine whether or not there is. If any special losing flag is not stored, it means that the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning.In this case, in step S1105 Execute first release processing. In the first opening process, the drive unit 323 of the first variable winning device 32A is drive-controlled to open the big winning opening 321. As a result, winning to the first variable winning device 32A is permitted.

After that, in step S1106, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30.0 seconds), which is a long time mode, in order to set the period during which the first variable prize winning device 32A is maintained in the open state. Execute processing. As a result, a round game is started in which the first variable winning device 32A is kept open for a long time.

On the other hand, if any special failure flag is stored in step S1104, it means that the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the special failure result, and in this case, in step S1107, the second Execute release processing. In the second opening process, the drive unit 353 of the second variable prize winning device 32B is drive-controlled to open the distribution entrance 351. This allows winning to the second variable winning device 32B.

Thereafter, in step S1108, it is determined whether or not the current special losing result is an advantageous special losing result. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first side advantageous release flag or the second side advantageous release flag is stored. If the result is an advantageous special failure, the process proceeds to step S1106, and as described above, the process of setting the first timer counter TC1 to "15000", which is a long time mode, is executed. As a result, a round game is started in which the second variable winning device 32B is kept open for a long time.

If it is determined in step S1108 that the result is an unfavorable special failure result instead of an advantageous special failure result, a process of setting the first timer counter TC1 to "150" (equivalent to 0.3 sec), which is a short time mode, in step S1109. Execute. As a result, a round game is started in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened for a short time.

After executing the processing in step S1106 or step S1109, "10" is set in the prize winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S1110. The winning counter PC is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B.

After that, in step S1111, the opening command is set as an output target to the production control device 82, and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The release command includes information as to which variable prize winning device 32A, 32B is to be set in the release state. Based on the received opening command, the performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the variable prize winning devices 32A, 32B to be opened, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. do.

If the big prize opening 321 or the distribution entrance 351 is open in step S1101, the process advances to step S1112, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S1113 whether or not a winning has occurred in either of the variable winning devices 32A, 32B. Specifically, it is determined whether or not passage of a game ball is detected based on the detection state of the detection sensor 325 for the big prize opening or the detection sensor 361 for counting. If no winning has occurred, the big winning opening opening/closing process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is subtracted by 1 in step S1114.

In the subsequent step S1115, it is determined whether the game ball has flowed into the V winning area 356 based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 362. When an inflow into the V winning area 356 occurs, processing for storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed in step S1116. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that a V winning (inflow of a game ball into the V winning area 356) has occurred in the current opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S1115 that no V winning has occurred, or after executing the process in step S1116, it is determined in step S1117 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If not, the main prize opening opening/closing process is immediately terminated.

If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0" in step S1112, or if the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1117, it means that the big winning opening closing condition has been satisfied. In such a case, in step S1118, the corresponding drive units 323 and 353 are brought into a non-drive state in order to close the big prize opening 321 or the distribution entrance 351.

In the following step S1119, the value of the first round counter RC1 is subtracted by 1, and in step S1120, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0", in step S1121, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (ie, 2 seconds). After that, a closing command is set in step S1122, and the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set closing command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the closing of the variable winning devices 32A, 32B based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

If it is determined in step S1120 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", ending start processing is executed in step S1123. In the start processing, an ending standby time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 203, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S1124, after setting an ending command, the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set ending command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and this determined display mode is outputted from the performance control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the production control device 82 so that a display (for example, video display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

Note that the ending waiting time set in step S1123 may vary in length depending on the timing of transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ends this time. For example, the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result may be set to be longer than the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. Furthermore, the length of the waiting time for the ending may be varied depending on the type of special failure result. For example, the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special failure result may be set to be longer than the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special failure result.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 21), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S1013, it is determined in step S1014 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". Furthermore, in step S1015, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1016, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and in step S1017 After executing the opening/closing execution mode termination process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the process of ending the opening/closing execution mode, the effect control device 82 and the like are controlled to perform an effect for ending the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether any one of the first winning flag, second winning flag, and V winning flag is stored. That is, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, or the opening/closing execution mode to which passing occurred after passing the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. do. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, a process of resetting the first game counter and the second game counter to the initial value (0) is executed in step S1202. In the following step S1203, a process of erasing the various winning flags grasped in step S1201 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, or after executing the process in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not a V winning flag is stored. That is, the opening/closing execution mode to be ended this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, and it is determined whether or not passing through the V winning area 356 has occurred during the opening/closing execution mode. If the V winning flag is stored, in step S1205, processing is executed to store the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. This makes it possible to make an affirmative determination in step S1002 of the gaming state transition process, and following the end of the current opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is newly started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, or after executing the process in step S1205, in step S1206, a process for erasing various special failure flags (first special failure flag, second special failure flag) is executed. Incidentally, if the special failure flag is not stored, that state is maintained. In the subsequent step S1207, a process of erasing various release flags (first side advantageous release flag, first side disadvantageous release flag, second side advantageous release flag, and second side disadvantageous release flag) is executed. Note that if the release flag is not stored, that state is maintained. Then, in step S1208, a process of erasing the jackpot game result flags (first side 16R flag, first side 8R flag, second side 16R flag, second side 8R flag) is executed. Note that if the game result flag for jackpot is not stored, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the transition processing at the time of main termination is terminated.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the power support process in step S406 in the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 and 25.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and is erased when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state.

If the support flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1302, and it is determined whether the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is "0". If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", the present electronic support process is immediately terminated.

If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0", it is determined in step S1304 whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 38. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, the out-of-line display is set, and then the main power support process is ended. By setting the out-of-line display, the fluctuating display of the picture in the normal figure display section 38 is ended with the out-of-line display stopped and displayed.

If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, in step S1306, the value of the number of accessories held memory SN stored in the electric role holding area 235 is set to "0". ”. If the value of the number SN of accessory items being stored is "0", the present electronic role support processing is ended as is. If the value of the number SN of stored accessories is larger than "0", an open lottery is performed in step S1307. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role execution area RCE is between 0 and 249, the player wins the opening lottery. Also, at the same time as the opening lottery, the second timer counter TC2 is set to "150" (ie, 0.3 sec). Note that the second timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In the following step S1308, it is determined whether the result of the open lottery in step S1307 is a support win. If the support is not won, the process for electronic role support ends without executing the process of step S1309. If it is a support win, a support win flag is stored in step S1309, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the RAM 204, after which the electronic win support process ends.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the support winning flag is stored, the process advances to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", since the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the ordinary figure display section 38, the main electronic winning support process is immediately terminated. If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1311. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols on the normal pattern display section 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. In the following step S1312, the support flag is stored, and the support winning flag is erased, and then the present electronic role support process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the supporting flag is stored, the process advances to step S1313, and after executing the electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a, the main electric role support process is executed. finish. The electrical opening/closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is opened, the process advances to step S1402, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power opening/closing process is ended as is. If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0", the process advances to step S1403, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state.

Thereafter, in step S1404, the value of the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is subtracted by 1, and then in step S1405 it is determined whether the value of the second round counter RC2 is "0". . The second round counter RC2 is a counter for specifying the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened in the support state. If the value of the second round counter RC2 is not "0", the main electronic role opening/closing process is immediately terminated, and if the value of the second round counter RC2 is "0", the supporting flag is sent to step S1406. After erasing , the main electronic role opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, if the electric accessory 34a is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the process advances to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether the second timer counter TC2 is "0". If the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power opening/closing process is ended. When the second timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1408, an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. Then, in step S1409, the second timer counter TC2 is set to "750" (ie, 1.5 sec), and then the main power opening/closing process is ended.

<V distribution setting process>
Next, the V distribution setting process in step S407 of the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening/closing execution mode. If it is the start timing, in step S1502, a process is executed in which the third timer counter TC3 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is set to "500" (that is, 1.0 sec). In the following step S1503, a process is executed in which a distribution counter HC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is set to "1". The third timer counter TC3 is a counter that is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated. Further, the distribution counter HC is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the number of times the shutter 358 is operated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after executing the process in step S1503, the process advances to step S1504. In step S1504, by grasping the driving state of the shutter drive unit 359, it is determined whether the shutter 358 is arranged at a position to distribute game balls to the V winning area 356. If the game balls are placed in the position where the game balls are distributed to the ejection area 357 instead of the V winning area 356, the process advances to step S1505, and it is determined whether or not the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If it is "0", it is determined in step S1506 whether the distribution counter HC is "0". If the third timer counter TC3 is not "0" in step S1505, or if the distribution counter HC is "0" in step S1506, it is determined that it is not the timing for drive control of the shutter drive unit 359. , and ends the V distribution setting process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505 and a negative determination is made in step S1506, in step S1507, drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 is started and the shutter 358 is moved to a position where game balls are distributed to the V winning area 356. Perform processing to switch to . Then, in step S1508, the third timer counter TC3 is set to "1500" (ie, 3.0 sec), and then the V distribution setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1504 that the shutter 358 is placed in a position to distribute game balls to the V winning area 356, the process advances to step S1509. In step S1509, it is determined whether the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If it is not "0", the V distribution setting process is immediately terminated. If it is "0", in step S1510, the drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 is ended and the shutter 358 is switched to a position for distributing game balls to the discharge area 357. Then, in step S1511, the distribution counter HC is decremented by 1, and then the V distribution setting process is ended.

As described above, in the V distribution setting process, control is performed to switch the position of the shutter 358 at uniform timing, regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the switch is made to the V winning area 356 side 1.0 sec after the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, and after that state is maintained for 3.0 sec, it is switched to the ejection area 357 side. In other words, if a game ball wins in the second variable winning device 32B between 1.0 seconds and 4.0 seconds after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will be distributed to the V winning area 356 side. .

In this case, as already explained, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result and the disadvantageous special winning result, the waiting time for opening from the start of the opening/closing execution mode until the second variable winning device 32B is released is 0. 5 seconds is set. After the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the second variable winning device 32B is set to an open state with an upper limit opening time of 30.0 seconds if the result is an advantageous special loss, and 0.3 seconds if the result is an unfavorable special loss. The second variable prize winning device 32B is kept open until the time elapses. In other words, if the result is an advantageous special loss, the period from 0.5 seconds after the start of the opening/closing execution mode to 30.5 seconds is set as the period during which the second variable prize winning device 32B is in the open state; For example, the period from 0.5 sec to 0.8 sec after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is set as the period during which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state.

In other words, the game ball that enters the second variable winning device 32B during the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result reaches the shutter 358 at the timing when the shutter 358 is placed in the position to distribute to the V winning area 356 side. As a result, the game balls are distributed to the V winning area 356 side. In addition, the game ball that enters the second variable winning device 32B during the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result reaches the shutter 358 at the timing when the shutter 358 is placed in the position to distribute it to the discharge area 357 side. Therefore, the game balls are distributed to the ejection area 357 side. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode based on disadvantageous special winning results, the period during which the open state is maintained is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec), so in the first place, the second variable winning device is not activated during the opening/closing execution mode. 32B winnings are becoming less likely to occur.

Then, the V winning flag is stored based on passing through the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode of one round based on the special winning result, and after that, by performing the process of rewriting it to the V winning flag, the opening/closing execution mode is After the execution mode, a new opening/closing execution mode is started. In the new opening/closing execution mode, "16" is input to the first round counter RC1 in step S1006, and 16 round games will be played on the first variable winning device 32A side, and a large number of game balls will be played. It becomes possible to win a prize using the first variable winning device 32A. On the other hand, if it is not possible to pass through the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the opening/closing execution mode ends as it is, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started thereafter.

As described above, there is a large difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result. Therefore, it is considered that the player would like to implement the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result.

As already explained, in the validity judgment process on the first special drawing side, the probability of an unfavorable special result is set higher than the probability of an advantageous special result, and the probability of an unfavorable special result is higher in almost every recognition. A win/fail table is set so that a special result is established. In addition, in the win/fail judgment process on the second special drawing side, the probability of a favorable special win result is set higher than the probability of an unfavorable special win result, and almost every win/fail judgment results in an advantageous special win result. The validity table is set so that the following holds true. Therefore, it can be said that the validity determination on the second special figure side is set to be more advantageous to the player than the validity determination on the first special figure side.

However, in order to carry out the judgment on the second special drawing side, it is necessary to make the game ball enter the second operating port 34, and the second operating port 34 causes the winning to occur in the first operating port 33. The configuration is such that winnings are allowed based on winnings in different through gates 35. In other words, in order to win a prize in the second operating port 34, it is necessary to make a winning in the first operating port 33, and if a winning does not occur in the first operating port 33, a winning in the second operating port 34 will occur. I can't.

In addition, in the electric accessory support process, the electric accessory 34a is set to be in an open state 0.3 seconds after a winning in the through gate 35 occurs. Then, the open state is set to be maintained for 1.5 seconds. In other words, from 0.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the occurrence of a specific event that causes a winning to the through gate 35, that is, a winning to the first operating port 33, a winning to the second operating port 34 occurs. is set as a possible period. Then, as will be described later, the game round on the first special figure side based on winning in the first operating port 33 is set so that the variable display time is longer than this 1.8 sec.

In other words, the timing at which a winning can occur at the second operating port 34 is the timing when the game round on the first special figure side is being executed, and the timing when the game round on the first special figure side is being executed is No winnings are made to the second operating port 34. As mentioned above, in the validity judgment process on the first special drawing side, an unfavorable special winning result is established almost every time, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result is implemented in the game round. During execution, a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, and a win/fail determination process on the second special drawing side is performed. And, as mentioned above, in the validity determination process on the second special symbol side, an advantageous special failure result is established almost every time.

Here, in the first game round control process and the second game round control process, if a special winning result is established in both lottery systems, the special winning result on the side whose variable display time has elapsed first is given priority and executed. The structure is as follows. Therefore, if the game round on the first special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result, which is established almost every time, will be implemented, and the game round on the second special figure side will end first. If it ends, the opening/closing execution mode will be implemented based on the advantageous special deviation result that is established almost every time. In other words, depending on the relationship between the variable display time set in the game round on the first special figure side and the variable display time set in the game round on the second special figure side, opening and closing based on the result of which lottery system It changes how the execution mode is implemented.

<Variable display time setting process>
The variable display time setting process carried out in the first game round control process and the second game round control process will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 and 28. Note that the first variable display time setting process (FIG. 27) carried out in the first game round control process and the second variable display time setting process (FIG. 28) carried out in the second game round control process Since they basically have the same processing configuration, they will be explained together. Furthermore, when explaining the process for setting each variable display time, the explanation will be made with reference to the variable table time table shown in FIG. 29 as well.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in step S1601 (step S1701), a process of determining the corresponding game counter is executed. That is, the first special figure side grasps the first game counter, and the second special figure side executes a process of grasping the second game counter. As already explained, the first game round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the first special symbol side game round is executed (step S618), and the opening/closing execution mode (16R or 8R) is set based on the winning flag. This is a counter that is reset at the end of the opening/closing execution mode). In addition, the second game counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the second special symbol side game is executed (step S918), and is a counter that is reset at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning flag. It is.

After executing step S1601 (step S1701), a process of acquiring a corresponding variable display time table is executed in step S1602 (step S1702). That is, the first special figure side acquires the first variable display time table, and the second special figure side acquires the second variable display time table. The first variable display time table and the second variable display time table are stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203.

As shown in FIG. 29, the first variable display time table and the second variable display time table include the values of the corresponding game round counters, the value of the variable type counter CS of the pending information for the game round to be started this time, The variable display time is determined based on.

In the first variable display time table on the first special figure side, as the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side, the first short variation display time is 10.0 seconds, and the first short variation is 30.0 seconds. The fluctuation display time of the long fluctuation is set. In other words, when the first long variation variation display time is selected, the game round on the first special symbol side will end later than when the first short variation variation display time is selected, and the second special symbol will end later. Depending on the relationship with the game round on the figure side, it becomes easier for the game round on the second special figure side to end first.

If the value of the 1st game counter is in the range of 1 to 100, that is, after the 1st game counter is reset, in the 1st to 100th game on the 1st special symbol side, the first short fluctuation is The value of the variation type counter CSA is assigned so that the first length variation is more likely to be selected than the first length variation. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CSA is 0 to 99 or 101 to 199, the first short variation is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CSA is 100, the first long variation is selected. That is, the first short variation is selected with a probability of 199/200, and the first long variation is selected with a probability of 1/200.

If the value of the first game counter is in the range of 101 to 110, that is, after resetting the first game counter, in the 101st to 110th game on the first special drawing side, the values 1 to 100 above are The value of the variation type counter CSA is assigned so that the first length variation is more likely to be selected compared to the case where the first length variation is selected. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CSA is 0 to 90 or 101 to 199, the first short variation is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CSA is 91 to 100, the first long variation is selected. Ru. That is, the first short variation is selected with a probability of 190/200, and the first long variation is selected with a probability of 10/200.

After that, if the value of the first game counter is in the range of 111 to 200, 211 to 300, 311 to 400, or 411 to 500, that is, the 111th game after the first game counter is reset. In the 200th game, 211th to 300th, 311th to 400th, and 411th to 500th game on the first special symbol side, the first short fluctuation and the first It is set so that long fluctuation is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first game counter is in the range of 201 to 210, 301 to 310, or 401 to 410, that is, after the first game counter is reset, the 201st to 210th, 301st, etc. In the 310th and 401st to 410th game on the first special symbol side, the first short fluctuation and the first long fluctuation are set to be selected with the same probability as in the 101st to 110th times. There is.

Then, when the value of the first game counter is 501 or later, that is, after the first game counter is reset, in the game times on the first special symbol side after the 501st time, the first length fluctuation is displayed with a 100% probability. The time is set to be selected.

That is, in the first variation display time table on the first special drawing side, the first short variation is almost selected, and the first long variation is difficult to select in the first zone of the number of drawings (from the 1st to the 100th, from the 111th to 200th time, 211th time to 300th time, 311th time to 400th time, 411th time to 500th time), and a second zone (from 101st time to 110th time, 201st to 210th, 301st to 310th, 401st to 410th), a third zone in which the first length variation is more likely to be selected than the second zone is set. In other words, in the game round on the first special figure side, if the number of drawings in the first zone is the same, the fluctuation display time of the first short fluctuation is likely to be set, and in relation to the game round on the second special figure side, the first It is easier to finish the game round on the special figure side first. In addition, in the game round on the first special figure side, if the number of drawings in the second zone is the number of drawings, the variable display time of the first length variation is more likely to be selected than in the first zone, so the game on the second special figure side In relation to the number of rounds, it is easier for the game round on the second special figure side to end earlier than on the first zone. Then, in the game round on the first special figure side, if it is the number of drawings in the third zone, the variable display time of approximately the first length variation is selected, so in relation to the game round on the second special figure side, The game round on the second special figure side is easier to finish first.

In the second variable display time table on the second special figure side, the variable display time of the second short variation is 5.0 seconds, and the second variable display time is 20.0 seconds as the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side. The fluctuation display time of the long fluctuation is set. In other words, if the variable display time of the second short variation is selected, the game round on the second special symbol side will end earlier than if the variable display time of the second long variation is selected, and the first feature will end earlier. Depending on the relationship with the game round on the figure side, the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first.

If the value of the second game counter is in the range of 1 to 100, that is, after resetting the second game counter, in the 1st to 100th game on the second special symbol side, the second length fluctuation is The value of the variation type counter CSB is assigned so that the second short variation is more likely to be selected than the second short variation. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CSB is 0 to 198, the second long variation is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CSB is 199, the second short variation is selected. That is, the second long variation is selected with a probability of 199/200, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 1/200.

If the value of the second game counter is in the range of 101 to 110, that is, after resetting the second game counter, in the 101st to 110th game on the second special drawing side, the values 1 to 100 above are The value of the variation type counter CSB is allocated so that the second short variation is more likely to be selected compared to the case where the second short variation is selected. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CSB is 0 to 190, the second long variation is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CSB is 191 to 199, the second short variation is selected. That is, the second long variation is selected with a probability of 190/200, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 10/200.

After that, if the value of the second game counter is in the range of 111 to 200, 211 to 300, 311 to 400, or 411 to 500, that is, the 111th game after the second game counter is reset. In the 200th game, 211th to 300th, 311th to 400th, and 411th to 500th game on the second special symbol side, the second length fluctuation and the second Short fluctuations are set to be selected. On the other hand, if the value of the second game counter is in the range of 201 to 210, 301 to 310, or 401 to 410, that is, after the second game counter is reset, the 201st to 210th, 301st, etc. In the 310th and 401st to 410th game on the second special symbol side, the second long fluctuation and second short fluctuation are set to be selected with the same probability as the 101st to 110th times. There is.

Then, when the value of the second game counter is 501 or later, that is, after the second game counter is reset, the second short fluctuation is displayed with a 100% probability in the game times on the second special drawing side after the 501st time. The time is set to be selected.

That is, in the second variation display time table on the second special drawing side, the second long variation is almost selected, and the second short variation is hardly selected in the first zone of the number of drawings (from the 1st to the 100th, from the 111th to 200th, 211th to 300th, 311th to 400th, 411th to 500th) and a second zone (101st to 110th, 201st to 210th, 301st to 310th, and 401st to 410th) a third zone is set in which the second short fluctuation is more likely to be selected than the second zone. In other words, in the game round on the second special figure side, if the number of drawings in the first zone is the same, the variable display time of the second length variation is likely to be set, and the first It is easier to finish the game round on the special figure side first. In addition, in the game round on the second special figure side, if the number of drawings in the second zone is the number of drawings, the variable display time of the second short fluctuation is more likely to be selected than in the first zone, so the game on the first special figure side In relation to the number of rounds, it is easier for the game round on the second special figure side to end earlier than on the first zone. Then, in the game round on the second special figure side, if it is the number of drawings in the third zone, the variable display time of almost the second short fluctuation is selected, so in relation to the game round on the first special figure side, The game round on the second special figure side is easier to finish first.

In this embodiment, the first to third zones on the first special figure side and the first to third zones on the second special figure side are set to overlap, and more specifically, The value of the first game counter set in the first to third zones on the first special figure side and the second game counter set in the first to third zones on the second special figure side The value of and are set to be the same. Therefore, in the first zone, the game round of the first special figure tends to end first due to the variable display time of both special figures, and in the second zone, the game round of the first special figure tends to end first due to the variable display time of both special figures. The game round on the 2nd special figure side tends to end earlier than the first zone, and in the 3rd zone, the game round on the 2nd special figure side tends to end earlier due to the variable display time of both special figures. Become. By doing so, in the first zone, the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result on the first special figure side is more likely to be implemented, and in the second zone, the second special The opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result on the drawing side becomes easier to implement, and in the third zone, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result on the second special drawing side becomes easier to implement.

Here, the first game counter is a counter for grasping the number of drawings on the first special drawing side, and the second gaming counter is a counter for grasping the number of drawings on the second special drawing side. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of drawings on the first special drawing side and the number of drawings on the second special drawing side are grasped separately. By doing this, the independence of multiple lottery systems is ensured, and both lottery systems are Even if there is a discrepancy in the number of drawings, this can be tolerated.

However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, in order to receive the lottery on the second special symbol side, it is a condition that the lottery on the first special symbol side is held, so the second game counter does not increase. This is a case where the first game counter has been incremented a little earlier. Therefore, basically the second game counter and the first game counter have the same value.

On the other hand, in order to receive the lottery on the first special map side, it is not necessary to receive the lottery on the second special map side, and a game may be played in which only the lottery on the first special map side is performed. However, as shown in the distribution table of FIG. 10, the distribution table on the second special figure side is more advantageous for the player than the distribution table on the first special figure side. Furthermore, by opening the electric accessory 34a, it becomes possible to easily enter the second operating port 34 to win a prize, and five prize balls are paid out based on the winning. Incidentally, when a game ball is fired aiming at the second operating port 34 in a situation where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game ball will enter the second operating port 34 with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is more advantageous for the player to fire the game ball aiming at the second operation port 34 (approximately 3 more balls) without taking into account the lottery. Become. Therefore, normally, it is thought that the player would have the lottery on the second special map side carried out following the lottery on the first special map side in order to receive the above-mentioned advantageous distribution. Because of this configuration, even if the same value is assigned to the first to third zones in the variable display time table for both lottery systems, it is unlikely that any inconvenience will occur, and special outlier results will occur as designed by the designer. becomes possible.

<Game progress>
Next, the progress of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 30 to 32. Note that FIG. 30 shows an overview of games mainly played in the first zone, and FIGS. 31 and 32 show games played exceptionally in the first zone and games played in the second and third zones. It shows an outline of games that are easier to play.

If a prize is won in the through gate 35 at the timing of ta1, a support lottery is carried out, and a variable display (normal figure variation) on the common figure display section 38 is started from the timing of ta1. As already explained, this variable display ends in a relatively short time of 0.3 seconds, and the electric accessory 34a is brought into the open state at the timing of ta3. The open state is maintained for 1.5 seconds, and the electric accessory 34a is brought into the closed state at timing ta5.

At the timing ta2, which is immediately after the winning to the through gate 35 at the timing ta1, the game ball that entered the through gate 35 enters the first operating port 33. Then, at the timing of ta2, the validity determination process on the first special figure side is carried out, and the game round on the first special figure side is started. In the figure, a case is shown in which the first short variation variation display time is selected as the variation display time for this game round.

It is assumed that during the execution of the game round on the first special figure side, a winning occurs in the second actuation port 34 at timing ta4 when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. In this case, at the timing of ta4, the validity determination process on the second special figure side is carried out, and the game round on the second special figure side is started. The figure shows a case where the variable display time of the second length variation is selected as the variable display time of this game round.

In the situation where the game rounds of both special symbols are played in parallel as described above, the first special symbol side is the variable display time of the short variation, and the second special symbol is the variable display time of the long variation. has been done. The game time on the first special figure side is set to a variable display time that becomes 0 at the timing of ta6, and the game time on the second special figure side is set to a variable display time that becomes 0 at the timing of ta10, which is later than ta6. has been done. In this case, the variable display time on the first special figure side becomes 0 first, and at the timing of ta6, the game round on the first special figure side ends, and the game round on the second special figure side becomes 0. Based on the end of the game round on the illustrated side (based on the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result), it is forcibly ended at the same timing of ta6.

If the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result on the first special figure side is started at the timing of ta6, the second variable winning device 32B is brought into the open state from the timing of ta6 to the timing of ta7. In reality, the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened after the opening waiting time has elapsed from the timing ta6, but for convenience of illustration, the same timing is shown.

The shutter 358 as a distribution member in the second variable winning device 32B moves to the V winning area 356 at timing ta8, which is after a predetermined period T (1.0 sec) has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. This is a V-distribution mode for distributing game balls. This V distribution mode is maintained until the timing of ta9. However, since the period from ta6 to ta7 when the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the timing from ta8 to ta9 when the shutter 358 is in the V distribution mode do not overlap, during the opening/closing execution mode. Passing through the V winning area 356 is unlikely to occur.

As mentioned above, in the first zone, basically the short fluctuation is selected in the game round on the first special figure side, and the long fluctuation is selected in the game round on the second special figure side. The game round on the first special figure side ends first, and an opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the unfavorable special winning result that is established almost every time in the judgment of the first special figure side.

Here, also in the first zone, with a relatively low probability, the long fluctuation is selected in the game round on the first special figure side, and the short fluctuation is selected in the game round on the second special figure side.

In FIG. 31, in tb1 to tb4, a winning occurs in the through gate 35, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 at the same timing as ta1 to ta4 in FIG. 30. However, if the game round on the first special figure side that starts at the timing of tb3 is the first short fluctuation, and the game round on the second special figure side that starts at the timing of tb4 is the second short fluctuation. It shows. In this case, in the game round on the first special figure side, the variable display time is set to 0 at timing tb8, and in the game round on the second special figure side, the variable display time is set to 0 at timing tb6, which is earlier than tb8. Set.

Then, the variable display time on the second special figure side becomes 0 first, and at the timing of tb6, the game round on the second special figure side ends, and the game round on the first special figure side becomes 0. Based on the end of the game round on the side (based on the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result), it is forcibly ended at the same timing tb6.

If the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result on the second special figure side is started at the timing tb6, the second variable winning device 32B is opened from the timing tb6 to the timing tb10. In fact, the second variable prize winning device 32B is brought into the open state after the opening waiting time has elapsed from the timing tb6, as in the case of FIG. 30 above.

The shutter 358 as a distribution member in the second variable winning device 32B distributes game balls to the V winning area 356 at timing tb7, which is after a predetermined period T has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. This is the mode of distribution. This V distribution mode is maintained until timing tb9. Since the period from tb6 to tb10 when the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the timing from tb7 to tb9 when the shutter 358 is in the V distribution mode overlap, the V Passing through the winning area 356 is likely to occur. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode, 16 more rounds of opening/closing execution mode will be performed.

In FIG. 32, in tc1 to tc4, a winning occurs in the through gate 35, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 at the same timing as ta1 to ta4 in FIG. 30. However, if the game round on the first special figure side that starts at the timing of tc3 is the first length fluctuation, and the game round on the second special figure side that starts at the timing of tc4 is the second length fluctuation. It shows. In this case, in the game round on the first special figure side, the variable display time is set to 0 at timing tc9, and in the game round on the second special figure side, the variable display time is set to 0 at timing tc6, which is earlier than tc9. Set.

Then, the variable display time on the second special figure side becomes 0 first, and at the timing of tc6, the game round on the second special figure side ends, and the game round on the first special figure side becomes 0. Based on the end of the game round on the side (based on the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result), it is forcibly ended at the same timing of tc6.

If the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result on the second special figure side is started at timing tc6, the second variable winning device 32B is brought into the open state from timing tc6 to timing tc10. Note that, in reality, the second variable prize winning device 32B is brought into the open state after the waiting time for opening has elapsed from the timing tc6, as in the case of FIGS. 30 and 31.

The shutter 358 as a distribution member in the second variable winning device 32B distributes game balls to the V winning area 356 at timing tc7, which is after a predetermined period T has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. This is the mode of distribution. This V distribution mode is maintained until timing tc8. Since the period from tc6 to tc10 when the second variable prize winning device 32B is in the open state and the timing from tc7 to tc8 when the shutter 358 is in the V distribution mode overlap, the V Passing through the winning area 356 is likely to occur. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode, 16 more rounds of opening/closing execution mode will be performed.

As mentioned above, even in the first zone, if the first long fluctuation is selected in the game round on the first special figure side, or the second short fluctuation is selected in the game round on the second special figure side, , the game round on the second special figure side may end first. Therefore, an opening/closing execution mode based on advantageous special deviation results can be implemented. Therefore, even if the player is in the first zone, it is not impossible to expect an advantageous special result, and it is possible to draw attention to the variable display time set for each game in the first zone. Become.

Then, in the first zone, when you move to the second zone while waiting for the first long fluctuation and second short fluctuation game times that occur with a relatively low probability as described above, on the first special drawing side, The first long variation becomes easier to select, and the second short variation becomes easier to select on the second special figure side. In this case, if the first length variation is selected on the first special figure side (the second length variation is selected on the second special figure side), the situation shown in Fig. 32 will occur, and the opening/closing will be executed based on the advantageous special result. mode is implemented. In addition, when the second short variation is selected on the second special figure side (the first short variation is selected on the first special figure side), the situation shown in Figure 31 will occur, and in this case also, the advantageous special winning result will be The opening/closing execution mode based on this is implemented. In addition, even if the first long variation is selected on the first special figure side and the second short variation is selected on the second special figure side, the game round on the second special figure side will end first, An opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the advantageous special deviation result. This also applies to the third zone.

In particular, when it comes to the third zone, the first long variation is selected with a 100% probability on the first special pattern side, and the second short variation is selected with a 100% probability on the second special pattern side. Therefore, when the third zone is reached through both types of lottery, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result will be implemented, and the third zone can function as a so-called ceiling.

As described above, the possibility that an advantageous special outlier result will be implemented changes in the first zone, second zone, and third zone. In this case, the probability of obtaining an advantageous special failure result in the success/failure determination process does not change, but only the selected variable display time changes. In this way, it is possible to change the state in which it is easy to grant a benefit to the player and the state in which it is difficult to grant it to the player without changing the probability of the award/failure determination process, which improves the degree of freedom in the game and creates innovative gameplay. can be suitably realized.

Furthermore, in the validity determination process on the first special symbol side, basically, an unfavorable special winning result is established almost every time, but an advantageous special winning result is also established with a relatively low probability. In this case, even if the basic pattern is such that the game round on the first special figure side ends first as described above, the opening/closing execution mode will be implemented based on the favorable special winning result, not the unfavorable special winning result. . In addition, if a jackpot result is achieved in the first special drawing side's winning/failure judgment process or the second special drawing side's winning/failure judging process, the player will receive a benefit regardless of the result of the other winning/failure judging process or the length of the variable display time. becomes possible. In this way, the game can be diversified by not only changing the length of the variable display time but also by providing various bonus award patterns, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably maintained.

On the other hand, in the validity determination process on the second special symbol side, although an advantageous special winning result is basically established almost every time, an unfavorable special winning result is also established with a relatively low probability. In this case, even if the pattern is such that the game round on the second special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode will be implemented based on the unfavorable special winning result rather than the advantageous special winning result. Therefore, even if there is a pattern in which the game round on the second special figure side ends first, benefits are not uniformly awarded, which also contributes to securing the attention to the game.

In relation to both variable display times, combinations and probabilities of giving substantial benefits to players will be explained.

The probability that the combination of the first short variation and second long variation display time is selected in the first zone is the product of 199/200 and 199/200, which is 39,601/40,000 (approximately 99%). ) is the probability. On the other hand, the probability that the combination of the first short variation and second short variation display time and the combination of the first long variation and second long variation display time are selected in the first zone is 200%. It is the product of 199 and 1/200, and each has a probability of 199/40,000 (approximately 0.5%). Then, the probability that the combination of the first long variation and the second short variation display time is selected in the first zone is the product of 1/200 and 1/200, and the probability is 1/40000. It is. That is, in the first zone, about 99% of the time, the game round on the first special figure side ends first, and about 1%, the game round on the second special figure side ends first. As already explained, the judgment on the first special figure side almost always results in an unfavorable special error, and the judgment on the second special figure side almost always results in an advantageous special error, so in the first zone, most of the results are unfavorable specials. It can be said that the opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the result of the disconnection.

The probability that the combination of the first short fluctuation and second long fluctuation display time is selected in the second zone is the product of 190/200 and 190/200, which is 36,100/40,000 (approximately 90%). ) is the probability. On the other hand, the probability that the combination of the first short fluctuation and the second short fluctuation display time and the combination of the first long fluctuation and second long fluctuation display time are selected in the second zone are 200% each. It is the product of 190 and 10/200, and each has a probability of 1900/40000 (approximately 5%). Then, the probability that the combination of the first long variation and second short variation display time is selected in the second zone is the product of 10/200 and 10/200, which is a probability of 100/40000. It is. That is, in the second zone, about 90% of the game rounds on the first special figure side end first, and about 10% of the game times on the second special figure side end first. Then, compared to the first zone, the probability that the game round on the second special symbol side will end first will be about 10 times.

Here, in this embodiment, the pattern of the variable display time in which the game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the first special figure side is changed to the variable display time on the first special figure side. A pattern in which the first long variation is selected as the variation display time on the second special figure side and a pattern in which the second short variation is selected as the variation display time on the second special figure side are provided. Therefore, as described above, even if the game round on the second special figure side ends first, the combination patterns are diversified.

Furthermore, as a result of the judgment on the first special symbol side, although the result is almost always an unfavorable special winning result, there are cases where the winning result is an advantageous special winning result, cases where the result is a jackpot, and cases where the result is a normal winning result. Then, even if the game round on the first special drawing side ends first, as in the first zone, if the result of the judgment on the first special drawing side is an advantageous special winning result. An opening/closing execution mode is carried out based on the advantageous special winning result, and if it is a normal winning result, the gaming round on the second special drawing side is forcibly ended even if the playing round on the first special drawing side ends first. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special off result on the second special figure side is implemented. Further, if the game result on the first special figure side is a jackpot result, even if a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the game round on the second special figure side is not started.

On the other hand, as a result of the judgment on the second special symbol side, although the result is almost always an advantageous special miss result, there are cases where the result is an unfavorable special miss result, cases where the result is a jackpot, and cases where the result is a normal miss result. Then, even if the game round on the second special figure side ends before the game round on the first special figure side, the result of the judgment on the second special figure side will be unfavorable special. If it is a result, the opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the unfavorable special winning result, and if it is a normal winning result, the game round on the first special symbol side will not be forced to end, and as a result, the first special winning result will not be forced to end. An opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the unfavorable special result on the 1st special figure side.

In this way, in this embodiment, the game result of either game time is reflected by utilizing the relationship between the length of the variable display time between the game time on the first special figure side and the game time on the second special figure side. The system realizes gameplay such as whether or not the bonus is awarded by changing the length of the variable display time, without changing the probability of winning or losing the lottery for each game round as the probability of awarding the bonus. It realizes innovative gameplay such as changing using a counter. Not only that, but the results of the winning/failure lottery are varied, so that even if the game round ends first and the game results are reflected, there are patterns in which no benefits are given, or even if the game round ends first and the game results are reflected. Even if the game result is not reflected in the game, it is possible to generate a pattern in which a bonus is given, thereby greatly diversifying the game.

<Fluctuating display processing on the production control device 82 side>
Next, the outline of the variable display processing executed on the production control device 82 side will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. The process for variable display is a process for performing a variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. In addition, please refer to the description of other embodiments regarding the detailed configuration of the production control device 82 side.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the game round on the first special figure side and the game round on the second special figure side are carried out overlappingly. Each game round is played separately in the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS in the main display section 37, and also in the first special figure display area GA and the second special figure display area GA on the display screen G. This is performed separately in the diagram display area GB. That is, on the display screen G, the change display in the first special figure display area GA is linked (coinciding) with the change display in the first special figure display area AS in the main display section 37, and the change display in the second special figure display area GB The display is linked (coinciding) with the variable display of the second special figure display section BS. On the other hand, the fluctuating display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 has a timing that corresponds to the game times on the first special symbol side and a timing that is a fluctuating display corresponding to the game times on the second special symbol side. is set to. That is, the variable display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is a variable display corresponding to either the game round on the first special figure side or the game round on the second special figure side.

Then, when the start information (variation command) of the game round on the first special figure side or the game round on the second special figure side is received from the main control device 81 side, this process for displaying fluctuations is executed for each symbol column. If the variable display of Z1 to Z3 is started, and if the start information of a new game round is received while the variable display is being executed, the game round of the currently running variable display and the game round corresponding to the received start information It is determined whether to continue the variable display being executed or to switch to the variable display of the game round corresponding to the received start information. Finally, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is controlled to end in accordance with the end timing of the game round on the main display section 37 on the main controller 81 side. Incidentally, the variable display in the first special figure display area GA and the variable display in the second special figure display area GB are processes that are started separately from the main variable display process (the process for the first special figure display area GA and the process for the first special figure display area GA). In the process for the second special figure display area GB), the first special figure display part AS and the second special figure display part BS are controlled by the first game time control process and the second game time control process on the main control device 81 side. The same control is performed.

Specifically regarding the fluctuation display processing, in step S1801, it is determined whether a fluctuation command is received from the main controller 81 side. If the fluctuation command has not been received, it is assumed that it is not the start timing or switching timing of the fluctuation display, and the present fluctuation display processing is ended. On the other hand, if a variation command has been received, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is being executed. If it is not being executed, in step S1803 a process is executed to start the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then the process for variable display is ended. In step S1803, the received command for variation is analyzed, and the type command received at the same time is analyzed, and display control is performed so that a variable display corresponding to the game result and variable display time of the current game round is started. Control device 212.

In addition, the case where the fluctuation command is received in step S1801 and a negative determination is made in step S1802 means that it is the start timing of the game round on the first special symbol side, and the fluctuation starting in step S1803 The display corresponds to the fluctuating display of the game times on the first special figure side.

If the variable display of each symbol string Z1 to Z3 is being executed in step S1802, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the currently received variable command corresponds to a jackpot result. Note that the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1802 means that while the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is being executed as the game round on the first special figure side, the fluctuation command corresponding to the game round on the second special figure side is executed. This is the case when it is received. As already explained, if it is a jackpot result in the game round on the first special figure side, the game round on the second special figure side will not start, so the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1802 means that it is a special winning result or a normal winning result. This is a case where a game round on the second special figure side is started while a game round on the first special figure side is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804, that is, if the game times on the first special symbol side and the game times on the second special symbol side, which are out-of-order results, overlap, a process for grasping the variable display time is executed in step S1805. . In step S1805, processing is performed to grasp the remaining variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side that is being executed and the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side that has been received this time. Then, in step S1806, it is determined whether the game round in progress will end first. In other words, it is determined whether the remaining variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side is shorter than the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side that has been received this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, the variable display process is ended without switching the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 according to the currently received variable command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1804 that the result is a jackpot, or if it is determined in step S1806 that the game round on the second special symbol side ends first, the fluctuation rewriting process is executed in step S1807. From this point on, the process for displaying fluctuations ends. In the fluctuation rewriting process, a process is executed to rewrite each of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 being executed from the one on the first special symbol side to the one on the second special symbol side.

As already explained, in this embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is implemented as a result of the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, an odd numbered symbol is placed on any of the valid lines L1 to L5. The combination is stopped and the variable display is ended. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special out result is executed, the combination of even symbols is stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the variable display is ended. On the other hand, in the case of a normal winning result or a disadvantageous special winning result, the fluctuating display is ended so that the combination of the same symbols does not stop. That is, in step S1803 and step S1807, processing is performed to set a stop result corresponding to the result of the game round to be started or rewritten as the final stop result.

In steps S1803 and S1807, the effect pattern of the variable display is also determined together with the result of stopping the variable display to be started/rewritten.

Here, the mode of variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 will be explained in detail. That is, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the fluctuating display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display in which the player can recognize or easily recognize the displayed symbols. Then, when the fluctuating display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the fluctuating display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the active lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuating display of the middle symbol row Z2 switches from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display and the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are displayed. is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuating display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended.

In this embodiment, when a winning occurs in the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 34a becomes open, and in a situation where the open state is maintained, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 maintain a high-speed fluctuation display mode. The variable display pattern is set so that the That is, after a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 and the game round on the first special drawing side starts, the electric accessory 34a becomes open and a winning occurs in the second operating port 34. In this situation, the high-speed fluctuating display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is maintained. As a result, when a game round on the second special symbol side is started while a variable display on the first special symbol side is being executed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, if one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has already stopped. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to rewrite the game result on the second special figure side to a stop result corresponding to the game result.

More specifically, the period from when the fluctuating display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 starts to when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop is predetermined. The upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are configured to stop approximately 3.0 seconds after the start of the symbol rows Z1 and Z3. In other words, after the game round on the first special figure side is started, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 are moved at a later timing than the latest timing (after 1.8 seconds) at which the game round on the second special figure side can be started. The configuration is such that the system stops. By doing this, after receiving the variation command on the second special symbol side, when changing the production pattern of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, there are cases where reach display occurs and cases where reach display does not occur. Changes can be made easily.

Regarding the relationship between the game results of each game round and the processing for variable display, there is a table showing the relationship between each game round and the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 34, and a table showing the relationship between the effect pattern and the rewriting process in FIG. 35. This will be explained with reference to.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, for example, if the game result of the game round on the first special symbol side is a disadvantageous special result, if the fluctuation display time is the first short fluctuation, basically the first special symbol The game round on the side shown in the figure ends first, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result will be implemented. Therefore, as the performance pattern for the game round that starts in the variation start process of step S1803, a performance pattern corresponding to the non-reach occurrence in which no reach line is formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. In this case, if the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), and the game round on the second special figure side is not a jackpot result, and the variable display time is the second long variation, An affirmative determination is made in step S1806, and the game performance is ended as a result of a stop result in which the same symbols are aligned in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and do not stop. The performance continuation time of the game round carried out in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G is the same length as the variable display time on the first special symbol side, and is the variable display time of the first short variation.

On the other hand, in the case where the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a disadvantageous special error result and the variable display time is the first short fluctuation, the variable display time of the game cycle on the second special figure side If is the second short fluctuation, the game round on the second special figure side can end first, so the game result on the second special figure side can be reflected. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1806, and the fluctuation rewriting process in step S1807 is executed. If the game result on the second special symbol side is an advantageous special winning result, in the same fluctuation rewriting process, a reach line of even symbols is formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and the same symbol as the symbol forming the same reach line is formed. The production pattern is rewritten so that the symbols are stopped at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. On the other hand, if the game result on the second special symbol side is an unfavorable special winning result or a normal winning result, in the same fluctuation rewriting process, a reach line of even symbols is formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and the same reach line The performance pattern is rewritten so that a symbol different from the symbol forming the symbol is stopped at the ready-to-reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. That is, the production pattern is rewritten so that the reach display corresponding to the game result on the second special figure side is executed after receiving the command for variation on the second special figure side. However, if the game result on the second special figure side is a normal result, the game round on the second special figure side may end earlier, but the opening/closing execution mode based on the game round on the first special figure side is Since this will be implemented, the production pattern will be rewritten so that the out-of-reach display after receiving the fluctuation command on the second special figure side will end at the end of the game round on the first special figure side. be exposed. If the game round on the second special symbol side is a jackpot result, in the fluctuation rewriting process of step S1807, a reach line is formed by the odd numbered symbols, and the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is in the reach of the middle symbol row Z2. Rewrite the performance pattern so that it stops at the line. When the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side is implemented, the duration of the performance of the game round executed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G is longer than the variable display time on the first special figure side. The length is the sum of the time from the start timing of the game round on the first special figure side to the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side, and the fluctuation display time of the second short fluctuation on the second special figure side. It becomes Satoshi. In other words, the duration of the presentation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shorter than originally planned. If the game result on the second special figure side is a normal result, the duration of the performance of the game round carried out in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G is the same as the variable display time on the first special figure side. This is the length and is the variation display time of the first short variation.

The relationship between the variable display times of these first special symbols and second special symbols and the production duration times of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the same in the following, and if the production rewriting process is not performed, each symbol row Z1 ~Z3's effect duration is the same length as the variable display time on the first special figure side, and when the effect rewriting process is performed, the second special figure side is changed from the start timing of the game round on the first special figure side. This is the total length of the time up to the start timing of the game round and the variation display time of the second short variation on the second special figure side.

In the case where the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a disadvantageous special out result, and when the variable display time is the first long variation, regardless of the variable display time on the second special figure side, The game round on the second special figure side may end earlier. Therefore, as the production pattern for the game round that starts in the variation start process of step S1803, a production pattern corresponding to the occurrence of a ready-to-win in which a ready-to-win line is formed by even numbered symbols in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. Here, the symbols different from the symbols forming the reach line are set so as to stop at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), if the game round on the second special figure side does not result in a jackpot, both the second short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation A negative determination is made in S1806, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is executed. If the game result on the second special symbol side is an advantageous special out result, the production pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2, and the second special symbol side is If the game result is a disadvantageous special losing result or a normal losing result, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is not stopped on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are selected in accordance with the performance duration time.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an unfavorable special miss result, and when the fluctuation display time is the first long fluctuation, if the game round on the second special figure side is a jackpot result , an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, and the fluctuation rewriting process in step S1807 is executed. In this case, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the reach line is formed by odd-numbered symbols instead of even-numbered symbols, and the performance pattern is also rewritten so that the same odd-numbered symbols stop at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an advantageous special lose result, if the fluctuation display time is the first short fluctuation, basically the game round on the first special figure side will end first, and the relevant An opening/closing execution mode will be implemented based on the advantageous special deviation result. Therefore, as the production pattern for the game round that starts in the variation start process of step S1803, a production pattern corresponding to the occurrence of a ready-to-win in which a ready-to-win line is formed by even numbered symbols in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. Here, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are set so as to stop at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), and even if the game round on the second special figure side is not a jackpot result, a miss result, or a second length fluctuation, For example, since the fluctuation rewriting process is not carried out, the above-mentioned ready-to-win display using the even numbered symbols is carried out as is. On the other hand, if the game round on the second special symbol side is a jackpot result, the symbols forming the reach line are rewritten from even symbols to odd symbols in the fluctuation rewriting process. Further, if the game time on the second special figure side is a winning result and the second short fluctuation, the performance pattern is rewritten according to the game result on the second special figure side by the fluctuation rewriting process. That is, if the second special figure side has an advantageous special winning result, the end timing of the game round on the second special figure side is adjusted so that the middle symbol row Z2 stops in accordance with the end timing of the game round on the second special figure side. By using even numbered symbols that stop in the middle symbol row Z2, a reach line is formed in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and the production pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol that forms the same reach line stops in the middle symbol row Z2. . In addition, if the second special symbol side is a disadvantageous special miss result, the effect pattern is changed so that the stop symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 are different from the symbols forming the reach line, so that they stop on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. Rewrite. Then, if the second special symbol side is a normal result, the production pattern is rewritten, but the production duration and stop result for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are not changed, so that the predetermined character appears. Rewrite the performance pattern. That is, in this case, although the game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the first special figure side, the game result on the first special figure side is reflected, and This is a case where the stop result set at the start of the game round on the first special figure side is used as is.

In the case where the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an advantageous special lose result, and when the variable display time is the first long variation, regardless of the variable display time on the second special figure side, The game round on the second special figure side may end earlier. Therefore, as the production pattern for the game round that starts in the variation start process of step S1803, a production pattern corresponding to the occurrence of a ready-to-win in which a ready-to-win line is formed by even numbered symbols in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. Here, the symbols different from the symbols forming the reach line are set so as to stop at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), if the game round on the second special figure side does not result in a jackpot, both the second short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation A negative determination is made in S1806, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is executed. If the game result on the second special symbol side is an advantageous special out result, the production pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2, and the second special symbol side is If the game result is a special unfavorable result, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is not stopped on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are selected in accordance with the performance duration time. Then, if the game result on the second special symbol side is a normal winning result, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2.

In the case where the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an advantageous special miss result, and when the variable display time is the first long variation, when the game result on the second special figure side is a jackpot result , an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, and the fluctuation rewriting process in step S1807 is executed. In this case, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the reach line is formed by odd-numbered symbols instead of even-numbered symbols, and the performance pattern is also rewritten so that the same odd-numbered symbols stop at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a normal result, no matter what the variable display time is, once the game round on the second special figure side starts, basically the second special figure An opening/closing execution mode is implemented depending on the game times on the side. Therefore, as the performance pattern for the game round that starts in the variation start process of step S1803, a performance pattern corresponding to no reach line is formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 and no reach is set is set. Here, although no reach line is formed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a predetermined symbol combination (3, 4, 1) is set to stop at a predetermined active line. If the second special symbol side is a jackpot result, it is rewritten to a production pattern of reach display using odd numbered symbols in a variable rewriting process. If the second special figure side is not a jackpot result, and the variable display time is the second short variation, the fluctuation rewriting process will be carried out regardless of the variable display time on the first special figure side, and the game result on the second special figure side. It can be rewritten to suit the content. That is, if the second special symbol side is an unfavorable special out result or a normal out result, a reach display is performed using an even number of symbols, and the stop symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are different from the symbols forming the reach line. Rewrite the performance pattern as follows. Moreover, if it is an advantageous special out-of-win result, a ready-to-win display with even numbered symbols is performed, and the performance pattern is rewritten so that the stopping symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are the same as the symbols forming the ready-to-reach line. If the variable display time on the second special figure side is the second length variation and the first special figure side is the first length variation, the content is rewritten according to the game result on the second special figure side in the same way as above. It will be done. On the other hand, if the second special figure side is the second long variation and the first special figure side is the first short variation, the effect rewriting process is not carried out. Therefore, in this case, the effect in which the predetermined symbol combination (3, 4, 1) stops on the predetermined active line is performed as is. In other words, when a predetermined symbol combination stops on a predetermined active line, the opening/closing execution mode with a high distribution mode based on the advantageous special winning result on the second special pattern side may be implemented, or the second special pattern side may There are cases where an opening/closing execution mode with a low distribution mode is implemented based on the unfavorable special result of , and there are cases where the opening/closing execution mode is not implemented.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a jackpot result, the performance pattern is not rewritten regardless of the variable display time. In this case, in step S1803, an effect pattern is set such that a reach line is formed by the odd numbered symbols and the odd numbered symbols stop at the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

Which game round ends first depends on the length of the variable display time set in the game round on the first special figure side and the game round on the second special figure side. When the game round on the first special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the unfavorable special winning result, and when the game round on the second special drawing side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode is based on the advantageous special winning result. will be implemented. In the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result, it becomes possible to pass through the V winning area 356, and then a new opening/closing execution mode can be executed. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special failure result, it is not possible to pass through the V winning area 356, and a new opening/closing execution mode cannot be executed thereafter. In other words, if the game round on the first special figure side ends first, the player will not be able to obtain a benefit, and if the game round on the second special figure side ends first, the player will be able to obtain a benefit. . In this way, by creating a game where it is possible to obtain benefits depending on factors such as the timing of the judgment and the length of the variable display time, it is possible to create a game where the ease of obtaining benefits changes depending on the probability of the conventional judgment. It is possible to realize an innovative game experience that is completely different from the original game.

In particular, the above-mentioned gameplay, such as determining which game round is more likely to be completed first, is realized by changing the length of the variable display time of each game round. Therefore, the ease of obtaining benefits can be changed simply by changing the length of the variable display time without changing the probability of success/failure judgment, and the degree of freedom in game design is greatly improved.

The relationship between the length of the variable display time is realized by a predetermined variable display time table, and the selected variation is determined based on the number of times each game is executed (first game counter, second game counter). This is a variable display time table in which the length of the display time changes. By doing this, the ease of obtaining benefits can be increased, such as the number of times playing games where it is easy to obtain benefits (second zone, third zone) and the number of times playing games where it is difficult to obtain benefits (first zone). It becomes possible to set in advance the number of times different games are played. Therefore, it is possible to manage the gaming quality to some extent on the gaming machine side, and it is possible to use the above-mentioned gaming performance as a selection factor when selecting the gaming machine where the player is seated. .

Among both game rounds held in parallel, if the game round on the first special figure side is likely to end first (first zone), then the game round on the second special figure side will end earlier than in that case. The relationship between the cases where it becomes easier to play (second zone, third zone) is configured to be related to the length of the variable display time of both game times. Therefore, for example, the pattern of change is more diverse than changing the ease of ending the game round on the second special figure side only by changing the length of the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side. Therefore, the pattern in which the game round on the second special figure side ends first can be varied.

The first zone, second zone, and third zone are set in a common variable display time table. This makes it possible to reduce storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a plurality of variable display time tables are stored.

The first game counter and the second game counter are used to change the setting mode of the variable display time in the common variable display time table. This makes it possible to change the setting manner of the variable display time to the first to third zones while using the common variable display time table.

The first game counter and the second game counter are reset after 8 rounds or 16 rounds of opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to link the first to third zones with the number of times the game has been played since the actual benefit was granted. In the external signal setting process (step S1011), information indicating that an 8-round or 16-round opening/closing execution mode is to be implemented is configured to be output. Therefore, in a configuration in which the outputted information is displayed on a data display device or the like installed in a game hall, it can be used as a selection material when a player selects a game machine to be seated.

If the results of the opening/closing execution mode overlap between the validity judgment process on the first special figure side and the validity judgment process on the second special figure side, when implementing the opening/closing execution mode on the first special figure side, and when implementing the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side, There are cases where the opening/closing execution mode on the special figure side is implemented. Therefore, in a configuration where multiple lottery systems are executed in parallel, the game can be played while predicting which opening/closing execution mode will be executed, making it possible to realize new gameplay. .

In this case, since the configuration is such that priority is given to the opening/closing execution mode of the side whose game round was completed first, the fairness of the game is ensured compared to a configuration in which, for example, the side to be prioritized is determined based on the degree of advantage. In other words, if, for example, the side that is advantageous to the player becomes the non-priority side, the player will suffer a great disadvantage, and if the configuration is such that the priority/non-priority is determined by lottery etc. on the gaming machine side, This may create a sense of distrust that the party with the advantage is being intentionally given non-priority. Therefore, if the configuration is such that priority is given to the side that finished first as described above, it will be very easy for players to understand and feel a sense of fairness.

However, when the opening/closing execution mode overlaps as described above, it is assumed that so-called small wins, such as advantageous special winning results and unfavorable special winning results, are overlapped in one round game, and multiple In the case where a jackpot in a round game overlaps with a small jackpot, the jackpot is given priority. By doing so, it is possible to avoid causing a great disadvantage to the player.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variable display time table is switched after the predetermined opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 36(a) is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process in this embodiment. The variable display time table switching process is activated when the opening/closing execution mode ends, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode termination process (step S1017) in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 21). In addition, in this variable display time table switching process, since the trigger for switching to the current opening/closing execution mode is specified, the transition at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, where various flags indicating the game results that triggered the transition are cleared. Before the process (step S1016), a configuration for executing the termination process of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation display time table switching process itself are executed before the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S1016. It is preferable that the opening/closing execution mode termination process (step S1017) is performed after the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This also applies to other embodiments.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode to be ended this time is the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds. That is, if it is the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the 16R jackpot result or the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning, an affirmative determination is made in step S1901. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and the current opening/closing execution mode is an opening/closing execution mode based on the 8R jackpot result or special loss result, a normal table is set as the variable display time in step S1902, and the main switching process is performed. end. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, a special table is set as the variable display time table in step S1903, and the main switching process is ended.

In the normal table, as shown in FIG. 36(b), regardless of the first game counter and the second game counter, the first short fluctuation, the first long fluctuation, the second long fluctuation, and the second short fluctuation are It is determined only by the variation type counter CS (CSA, CSB). In other words, the probability that each variable display time is selected is constant regardless of the number of drawings (the number of times the game is executed). Therefore, the game round that ends first between the first special figure side and the second special figure side is constant regardless of the number of drawings (the number of times the game round is executed), and the result is an advantageous special winning result. The possibility that the opening/closing execution mode based on this will be implemented is also constant.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(c), in the special table, if the first game counter and the second game counter are in the range of 1 to 100, that is, if it is the 1st to 100th lottery, The fluctuation and the second short fluctuation are relatively easy to select (pattern corresponding to the second zone in the first embodiment), and from the 101st time onwards, the fluctuation type counter CS (CSA, CSB) (same as normal table). Therefore, after the 16th round of opening/closing execution mode, in the 1st to 100th lottery, the game time on the 1st special map side and the game time on the 2nd special map side, the game time on the 2nd special map side is first. It is easier to complete, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special deviation result is more likely to be implemented.

As described above, if the variable display time table is switched based on a predetermined game result, the opening/closing execution mode based on advantageous and special losing results can be set to a mode in which it is easy to play consecutive games, a mode in which it is difficult to create consecutive games, etc. It becomes possible to create it intentionally without changing the probability. Therefore, it can greatly contribute to the realization of new gameplay.

In this embodiment, after the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result is likely to be executed until a predetermined number of (100) lottery rounds (gaming rounds) are carried out. It becomes possible to improve the superiority of implementing the opening/closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to increase the intonation of the game. Therefore, the gameplay can be improved.

In particular, when a jackpot is achieved in the winning/failure drawing on the first special drawing side based on winnings in the first operating port 33, and in the winning/losing drawing on the second special drawing side based on winnings in the second operating port 34. The configuration is such that the 16-round opening/closing execution mode is more likely to be carried out in the case where the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning in the second operating port 34, compared to the case where the jackpot result is obtained. Therefore, it can be said that it is easier to enter the so-called consecutive win mode in which the above-mentioned special table is set when the player enters the second operating port 34 to win. Even with such a configuration, a game that is different from a design in which a prize is won in the first operating port 33 and then a prize is not entered in the second operating port 34, and only the game round on the first special drawing side is executed. It is possible to make it less likely to be selected.

If a configuration is used in which the variable display time table is switched based on the game results as in this embodiment, it is possible to not only switch between the mode in which it is easy to play consecutive games and the mode in which it is difficult to play in consecutive games as in this embodiment, but also to This can be realized by a variable display time table that reproduces various game features such as the transition to the third zone (ceiling) shown in the embodiment. Specifically, for example, a variable display time table corresponding to the third zone is set, and the variable display time table corresponding to the third zone is set as a predetermined game result after the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds. do. In this way, after the 16th round of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special failure result will be implemented immediately, and then the 16th round of the opening/closing execution mode will be implemented. As a result, it is possible to substantially win one consecutive game without changing the probability of winning or losing the lottery. Alternatively, the variable display time table shown in the first embodiment may be used as the normal table, and after the opening/closing execution mode of 8 rounds, the variable display time table shown in the first embodiment may be used as the normal table. The configuration may be set. In this way, it is possible to realize different gaming characteristics depending on the variable display time table, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the relationship between the game times on the first special pattern side and the game period on the second special pattern side is determined by the variable display time on the regular pattern side based on winnings in the through gate 35.

FIG. 37 shows a variable display time table in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 37(a), in this embodiment, the variable display time of the game round on the first special drawing side is fixed at a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CSA. ing. Further, the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side is also fixed at a predetermined time (5 sec) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CSB. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time is set longer on the first special figure side than on the second special figure side.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), in this embodiment, a variable display time table for ordinary figures is also determined. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning results are set as a result of the winning lottery (support lottery) for common figures, and a first winning result and a second winning result are set. The first winning result is distributed with a probability of 248/250 depending on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. The second winning result is distributed with a probability of 1/250 depending on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. In addition, a non-winning result is provided as a result of the lottery on the common map side, and the non-winning result is distributed with a probability of 1/250 depending on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. That is, the probability that either the first winning result or the second winning result will be a winning result in the winning/failure lottery for common figures is 249/250, which is the same as in each of the above embodiments.

In both the first winning result and the second winning result, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening duration time (support duration time) is 1.5 seconds. In other words, the first winning result and the second winning result have the same opening mode of the electric accessory 34a, and the game ball can enter the second operating port 34 in either winning result. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the first winning result and the second winning result are different in the variable display time in the support lottery. Specifically, for the first winning result, 6 seconds is set as the long fluctuation, and for the second winning result, 2 seconds is set as the short fluctuation, which is shorter than the first winning result. In other words, in the case of the first winning result, the prize can be entered into the second operating port 34 from 6 seconds to 7.5 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, and in the case of the second winning result In this case, a prize can be entered into the second operating port 34 from 2 seconds to 3.5 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35.

If the result of the lottery on the common figure side is a non-winning result, the variable display time is set to a short 2 seconds as in the second winning result. However, in the case of the non-winning result, the electric accessory 34a is not opened, so no prize is won through the second operating port 34.

Next, the electric role support processing of this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S2001 whether or not support is being provided, similar to step S1301 above. If the support is not in progress, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not a support winning flag is stored, similar to step S1302. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the first winning result and the second winning result are set as the winning result of the support winning, and the support winning flag is the first winning result and the second winning result. It is stored based on that.

If the support winning flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the second timer counter TC2 is "0", and if it is not "0", the process for electric support is immediately terminated. do. If it is "0", it is determined in step S2004 whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38, and if it is the end timing, the off-color display is stopped in step S2005. After completing the settings, end the electronic support support process. The processing in steps S2003 to S2005 is similar to the processing in steps S1303 to S1305.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process advances to step S2006. In step S2006, similarly to step S1306 above, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of stored accessory items SN is greater than "0". If the value of the number SN of accessory items being stored is "0", the present electronic role support processing is immediately terminated.

If the value of the number SN of stored accessories is larger than "0", an open lottery is performed in step S2007. Then, in step S2008, it is determined whether or not the current result is the first winning result, based on the processing result of step S2007. If it is the first winning result, in step S2009, the second timer counter TC2 is set to "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) as the current variable display time on the common map side. On the other hand, if it is not the first winning result, that is, if it is the second winning result or non-winning result, in step S2010, "1000" is set in the second timer counter TC2 as the current variable display time on the general map side. (i.e. 2 seconds).

After the processing in step S2009 or step S2010, it is determined in step S2011 whether the result of the open lottery in step S2007 is a support win (first win result or second win result). If it is a support win, a support win flag is set in step S2012, and the second round counter RC2 is set to "1", and then the electric role support process is ended. If it is determined in step S2011 that the result is a non-winning result, the electronic role support process is immediately terminated.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the support winning flag is set, the same processing as that in steps S1310 to S1312 is performed in steps S2013 to S2015. If it is determined in step S2001 that support is being provided, then in step S2016, the same process as the power opening/closing process in step S1313 is executed.

The flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained using the timing charts of FIGS. 39 and 40.

FIG. 39 shows a case where the result of the open lottery on the common map side is the first winning result. In other words, if a prize is won at the through gate 35 at timing t1, and a prize is won at the first operating port 33 at timing t2, which is immediately after that, the winning/failure lottery on the side of the coin this time is the first winning result. The variable display time on the side is set to 6 seconds as a long variation, and this variable display time elapses at timing t3. Furthermore, as described above, the variable display time on the first special figure side is uniformly set to 10 seconds, and this variable display time passes at the timing t5.

In this case, the electric accessory 34a is kept in an open state for 1.5 seconds from the timing t3 when the currently set variable display time on the ordinary figure side has elapsed, and is kept in the closed state at the timing t4. In other words, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34 to win from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Incidentally, at the timing of t3 to t4, the variable display time of the game time on the first special figure side has not elapsed and is still changing.

For example, if a game ball enters the second actuation port 34 at the timing when the electric accessory 34a is opened at timing t3, the variable display time on the second special drawing side is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and such variation The display time is set to elapse at timing t6. In this case, the timing t6 is later than the timing t5 at which the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side has elapsed. In this case, among the two game rounds that fluctuate in parallel, the game round on the first special figure side will end first, so the opening/closing execution mode of the first special figure side (mostly opening/closing based on unfavorable special winning results) execution mode) will be implemented. Then, when the game round on the first special figure side ends at timing t5, the game round on the second special figure side is forcibly ended at the timing t5, and the opening/closing execution mode of the second special figure side (mostly The opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special result will not be implemented.

Also, when the electric accessory 34a is set to the open state at the timing t3 and the game ball enters the second actuation port 34 at the timing t4, which is the latest timing at which the open state is maintained, the second special figure The variable display time on the side is set to 5 seconds, and this variable display time is set to elapse at timing t7. Even in this case, the timing of t7 is later than the timing of t5 when the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side has elapsed, and the opening/closing of the first special figure side of both special figures is executed. mode is implemented, and the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side is not implemented.

In other words, when the variable display time on the regular symbol side is set to 6 seconds, which is a long variation, regardless of the start timing of the game round on the second special symbol side, that is, the winning timing to the second operating port 34, the The game round on the first special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the second special figure side. As a result, when the fluctuation display time on the regular symbol side is a long variation, it is possible to give priority to the opening/closing execution mode on the first special symbol side among both special symbols.

FIG. 40 shows a case where the result of the open lottery on the common map side is the second winning result. In other words, if a prize is entered into the through gate 35 at timing t1, and a prize is entered into the first actuating port 33 at timing t2, which is immediately after that, the winning/failure drawing on the general drawing side this time is the second winning result. The side variation display time is set to 2 seconds as a short variation, and this variation display time elapses at timing t3. Further, as described above, the variable display time on the first special figure side is uniformly set to 10 seconds, and this variable display time is set to elapse at the timing t7.

As in the case of the first winning result, the electric accessory 34a is kept open for 1.5 seconds from the timing t3 when the variable display time on the normal map side set this time has elapsed, and is closed at the timing t4. state. In other words, in this case as well, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34 to win a prize between the timing t3 and the timing t4. In addition, also in the case of the second winning result, at the timing of t3 to t4, the fluctuation display time of the game round on the first special symbol side has not elapsed and is still fluctuating.

For example, if a game ball enters the second actuation port 34 at the timing when the electric accessory 34a is opened at timing t3, the variable display time on the second special drawing side is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and such variation The display time is set to elapse at timing t5. In this case, the timing t5 is earlier than the timing t7 at which the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side has elapsed. In this case, among the two game rounds that fluctuate in parallel, the game round on the second special figure side will end first, so the opening/closing execution mode of the second special figure side (mostly opening/closing based on the advantageous special winning result) execution mode) will be implemented. Then, when the game round on the second special figure side ends at the timing t5, the game round on the first special figure side is forcibly ended at the same timing t5, and the opening/closing execution mode of the first special figure side (mostly (opening/closing execution mode based on unfavorable exceptional results) will no longer be implemented.

In addition, even if the electric accessory 34a is brought into the open state at the timing t3 and the game ball enters the second operating port 34 at the timing t4, which is the latest timing at which the open state is maintained, the second special figure The variable display time on the side is set to 5 seconds, and this variable display time is set to elapse at timing t6. Even in this case, the timing of t6 is earlier than the timing of t7 when the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side has elapsed, and the opening/closing of the second special figure side of both special figures is executed. mode is implemented, and the opening/closing execution mode on the first special figure side is not implemented.

In other words, when the variable display time on the regular symbol side is set to 2 seconds, which is a short variation, regardless of the start timing of the game round on the second special symbol side, that is, the winning timing to the second operating port 34, the The game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the first special figure side. As a result, when the fluctuation display time on the regular symbol side is a short fluctuation, it is possible to give priority to the opening/closing execution mode on the second special symbol side among both special symbols.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the situation where the opening/closing execution mode on the first special symbol side and the opening/closing execution mode on the second special symbol side conflict can be detected by information on the ordinary symbol side (electric accessory release counter C4, fluctuation Display time) can be used to set which opening/closing execution mode should be prioritized. By doing this, compared to a configuration in which superiority is set using information on both special drawings (jackpot random number counter C1, fluctuation type counters CSA, CSB, etc.), since judgment information of a different lottery system is used, It becomes possible to easily set which one to prioritize without requiring adjustment on the special drawing side. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the superiority and inferiority of the opening/closing execution modes of both special symbols are set in advance, the superiority and inferiority can be set randomly.

In particular, since the information on the variable display time is used as information on the general map side, it is possible to set the superiority or inferiority of both special symbols without changing the winning probability of the support lottery. Furthermore, whether the opening/closing execution mode on the first special figure side is given priority or the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side is given priority, the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a is the same. It is possible to set the superiority or inferiority only by the length of the variable display time. For example, if you want to change the probability that the opening/closing execution mode on the second special map side takes priority from that of the above embodiment, the probability of the first winning result and the probability of the second winning result, that is, the long fluctuation It is only necessary to change the probability of (6 sec) and the probability of short fluctuation (2 sec), and there is no need to change the support winning (the sum of the first winning result and the second winning result) itself. There is no need to change the opening mode. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to set the superiority or inferiority of the opening/closing execution mode of both special symbols by a simple design change.

In terms of the relationship between the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side, the game time on the first special figure side starts, and then the game time on the second special figure side starts. It can be said that the shorter the period, the earlier the game round on the second special symbol side ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result is more likely to be implemented. In other words, the configuration is such that a prize is easily awarded by causing a win to occur in the second operation port 34 early after a win in the first operation port 33. In this way, the game round on the first special figure side based on winnings in the first operating port 33 and the game round on the second special figure side based on winnings in the second operating port 34 are performed in parallel. In the implemented configuration, an element that can be adjusted by the player, such as the timing of starting both game rounds, is involved in granting benefits, and the degree of attention to the game is suitably increased by encouraging active participation in the game.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, in a configuration in which which opening/closing execution mode of both special symbols is likely to be executed is changed by switching the variable display time table as in the second embodiment, switching of the variable display time table is Measure the number of times an event occurs.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process of this embodiment. As already explained, the variable display time table switching process is a process started in the opening/closing execution mode ending process (step S1017) in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 21).

In step S2101, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode to be ended this time is a 16-round opening/closing execution mode, an 8-round opening/closing execution mode, or an opening/closing execution mode based on an advantageous special losing result. That is, in the second embodiment, the special table is set only after 16 rounds of opening/closing execution mode, and it is determined in step S1901 whether or not it is after 16 rounds of opening/closing execution mode. In the embodiment, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result.

Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of unfavorable special failure results are set among the special failure results. More specifically, as disadvantageous special deviation results in the validity determination table on the first special figure side, disadvantageous special deviation result A, disadvantageous special deviation result B, disadvantageous special deviation result C, disadvantageous special deviation result D, disadvantageous special deviation result. E is set. These unfavorable special losing results A to E are all game results that shift to an opening/closing execution mode with a low distribution mode in which V winnings are unlikely to occur, and the opening/closing manner is common in all opening/closing execution modes. The unfavorable special out results A to E have different distribution rates, with unfavorable special out result A being the most likely to be sorted, unfavorable special out result B, unfavorable special out result C, unfavorable special out result D, unfavorable special out result E It is set so that it becomes difficult to sort in the order of .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the opening/closing execution mode to be ended this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result, the process advances to step S2102. In step S2102, a process is executed to determine the value to be added to the switching counters provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204, depending on the type of unfavorable special failure result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode to be ended this time. The switching counter is a counter used to switch the variable display time table, and unlike the first game counter and the second game counter, it is a counter that is counted independently of the number of times the game is executed. In this embodiment, in the process of switching the variable display time table after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display time table to be switched to is changed based on the value of the switching counter.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the value to be added to the switching counter is set depending on the type of unfavorable special result. Specifically, for disadvantageous special outlier result A, which is most likely to be selected, "1" is set as the additional value, B is set as "2", C is "5", D is "10", and E is "50". '', a larger value is set for an unfavorable special outlier result that is less likely to be selected.

In step S2102, the current addition value is determined with reference to the table in FIG. Then, in step S2103, addition processing for the switching counter is executed based on the grasped addition value.

In step S2104, it is determined whether the value of the switching counter has exceeded a predetermined value ("1000" in this embodiment). If it is less than "1000", in step S2105, a process of setting a normal table as a variable display time table is executed. Unlike the normal table shown in the second embodiment (FIG. 36(b)), as shown in FIG. 43(a), the values of the first game counter and the second game counter are Until a predetermined value ("500" in this embodiment) is reached, the combination of the first short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation is likely to be selected as the fluctuation display time for each game, and the second special symbol side Although the game round on the first special drawing side tends to end first, after the values of the first game round counter and the second game round counter reach the predetermined values, the variable display time of each game round is , the first long variation, and the second short variation are more likely to be selected, making it easier for the game round on the second special figure side to end earlier than on the first special figure side. In other words, the normal table is a table in which a variable display time is set so that a so-called ceiling function is achieved when the value of the game counter reaches a predetermined value (in the following explanation, the variable display time is set based on the number of times the game is executed). The ceiling function is also called the "first ceiling function").

If it is determined in step S2104 that the value of the switching counter is "1000" or more, then in step S2106 a process of setting a ceiling table as a variable display time table is executed. As shown in FIG. 43(c), the ceiling table displays the first long variation and second short variation as the variation display time of each game, regardless of the values of the first game counter and the second game counter. This table is set so that combinations are more likely to be selected and the game round on the second special figure side is more likely to be completed earlier than on the first special figure side. In other words, the ceiling table is a table that is switched when the value of the switching counter reaches a predetermined value, and this is also a table whose variable display time is set so that the so-called ceiling function is exhibited (see below for explanation). (The ceiling function based on the value of the switching counter is also referred to as the "second ceiling function.")

In this manner, in this embodiment, when switching the variable display time table after the opening/closing execution mode, the switching destination of the variable display time table is changed depending on whether the value of the switching counter is "1000" or more. In this case, even if the value of the switching counter is less than "1000", the variable display time table is originally switched, and when the value of the switching counter becomes "1000" or more, a new variable display time table is changed. It does not cause switching.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the opening/closing execution mode is not based on the unfavorable special deviation result, a switching counter reset process is executed in step S2107. Specifically, in step S2107, processing is performed to set the value of the switching counter to "0". Then, in step S2108, a process of setting a special table as a variable display time table is executed. The special table is similar to that of the second embodiment (FIG. 36(c)), and as shown in FIG. 43(b), it is a variable display time table in which a so-called consecutive play zone is set. .

In addition, even if this special table is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result, if a V win occurs during the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result, the next regular In the process, a 16-round opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the V winning flag. In other words, a new jackpot will not occur between the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result and the 16-round opening/closing execution mode triggered by a V win in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result. do not have. On the other hand, even in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result, it is conceivable that a V win may not occur for some reason. However, in this embodiment, even after this opening/closing execution mode as described above, a special table with consecutive winning zones is set, so an early jackpot (opening/closing execution mode based on advantageous special winning results) can be expected. It is possible to provide relief to players who were unable to generate a V-win.

After executing any of the processes in step S2105, step S2106, and step S2108, in step S2109, the information on the variable display time table set in these processes, the current additional value grasped in step S2102, and the information in step S2103 After setting the command including the information of the total value of the switching counter that has been added in step 1 as an output target to the production control device 82, this variable display time table switching process is ended. The command set here is output to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The presentation control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and the like to execute presentations based on such commands.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of ceiling functions are set, such as a first ceiling function based on the number of times the game is played on the normal table, and a second ceiling function based on the variable display time table being switched by a switching counter. has been done. The first ceiling function is set as a ceiling that is reached at the same number of times as the number of times the game is played, and the second ceiling function is set as a ceiling that is reached at a number different from the number of times that the game is played. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game while expecting both the first ceiling function and the second ceiling function, thereby realizing unprecedented gameplay.

Incidentally, the first ceiling function is activated when the game is played 500 times. On the other hand, the second ceiling function is not necessarily activated even if the game is played 500 times. However, in the second ceiling function, the average value of the added value of the switching counter based on each unfavorable special result per game is 2.4, and the switching counter reaches 1000 in less than 500 games. It is expected that this will happen. In other words, normally, the second ceiling function is activated before the first ceiling function, and on the condition that the second ceiling function is not activated even after 500 games are played, the first ceiling function is activated before the first ceiling function. is activated.

The content of the effect of the double ceiling function will be explained with reference to FIG. 44.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), in one corner (upper left corner) of the display screen G, there is a game counter display area GG in which a display corresponding to the value of the first game counter (second game counter) is displayed. It is provided. The game counter display area GG displays the current value of the first game counter, that is, the number of times the game has been executed since the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds was executed. In addition, along with the number of times the game has been played, the number of times the game has reached the ceiling (as described above, in this embodiment, "500", see FIG. 43(a)) is also displayed, and how many more games must be played to reach the ceiling. It is now possible to clearly understand what is going on. Further, the game counter display area GG is set so as not to overlap with the variable display area of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, or if it overlaps, to serve as the background of the variable display area. In particular, in the game counter display area GG, the display of the number of times the game is executed and the number of ceilings are set so as not to overlap with the variable display area of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

Note that the value of both the first game counter and the second game counter may be displayed in the game counter display area GG. In addition, as mentioned above, although the configuration is such that only one side (only the first game counter) is displayed, if the values of the first game counter and the second game counter are different, A configuration may be adopted in which both counters are displayed.

On the display screen G, a chance counter display area GH is provided in a corner (upper right corner) different from the corner where the game counter display area GG is provided, in which a display corresponding to the value of the switching counter is displayed. The chance counter display area GH displays the current value of the switching counter and a predetermined value (1000) that triggers switching of the variable display time table based on the switching counter. This makes it possible to know how long it will take for the variable display time table to change before reaching the ceiling. However, as described above, the switching counter is not the same as the number of times the game has been executed, and can be said to be more similar than the display in the game counter display area GG. The chance counter display area GH is set so as not to overlap with the variable display area of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, or if it overlaps, to be the background of the variable display area. In particular, in the chance counter display area GH, the display of the value of the switching counter and the predetermined value that becomes a switching trigger is set so as not to overlap with the variable display area of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), when the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finished, a game addition display GP, which is a display indicating that the number of times the game is executed in the game counter display area GG is added, is displayed, for example. "+1" is displayed. Further, based on the game results of the current game round, the added value of the switching counter is grasped (step S2102), and the chance addition display HP, which indicates that the value in the chance counter display area GH is added, is displayed for the current game. For example, "+10" is displayed in correspondence with the added value.

Here, as described above, the addition value of the switching counter is determined depending on the type of unfavorable special deviation result on the first special figure side that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the stop results of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined for the unfavorable special out-of-order results B to E with an additional value other than 1. Specifically, the unfavorable special out result B where the additional value is 2 is a stop result in which the same even numbered symbols stop at two symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. The unfavorable special out result C with an additional value of 5 is a stop where the same odd numbered symbols stop at two symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. is set as a result. In addition, the disadvantageous special out-of-win result D where the additional value is 10 is set as a stop result in which the same even numbered symbols stop at all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. The unfavorable special out-result E with an additional value of 50 is set as a stop result in which the same odd numbered symbols stop at all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. has been done. Therefore, it is possible to predict which additional value will be added based on the contents of the fluctuating display of the game, and even if it is possible to predict in advance that the fluctuating display will result in a loss without being notified of a jackpot. , it is possible to enjoy games such as deciding which additional value will be obtained.

It should be noted that the stop result is randomly set for the unfavorable special out result A whose addition value is 1 to be different from the stop results of any of the above disadvantageous special out results B to E.

As shown in FIG. 45(c), the value of the game counter display area GG and the value of the chance counter display area GH are updated based on these game addition display GP and chance addition display HP. The highlighted display (for example, blinking of the value) is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the update).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, a ceiling function based on the value of the switching counter is provided separately from the ceiling function based on the number of game runs as in the first embodiment, so a new ceiling function using both ceiling functions is provided. This makes it possible to realize excellent gameplay. The first game counter and the second game counter are counters that are incremented by 1 each time a game is played, and can be said to be completely linked to the number of times the game is played. On the other hand, the switching counter is a counter that is incremented every time the variable display time table is switched in the variable display time table switching process, and is not necessarily linked to the number of times the game is played. do not have. For example, in a game game with a normal result, the first game time counter and the second game time counter are incremented, but the switching counter is not incremented, and the added value of the switching counter is determined by the switching counter addition table (FIG. 42). A value other than 1 may be added. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention not only to the game in which the ceiling is reached by playing the game repeatedly, but also to the content of the repeated game rounds (types of unfavorable special outlier results, additional values), and the process of reaching the ceiling. This makes it possible to satisfactorily increase the attention to the game.

Here, as mentioned above, by making it possible to switch the variable display time table using a counter that is not directly linked to the number of game runs, the winning probability of the winning lottery and the benefits given after winning (opening/closing execution mode) etc. can be changed. In diversifying games without having to do anything, the possibility of diversification increases dramatically. On the other hand, if the variable display time table can be changed without limit, it becomes difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. Therefore, by using a counter that is updated for each event that causes a change in the variable display time table to change the destination of the change display time table in the event that causes the change, a new event that causes a change is created. Therefore, certain restrictions can be placed on switching the variable display time table. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games while ensuring the fairness of games.

The current value of the switching counter is displayed in the chance counter display area GH, and the added value to the switching counter is further displayed as the chance addition display HP, so players can play the game while expecting the ceiling function on the switching counter side. It is possible to suitably realize gaming properties such as .

<First modification of the fourth embodiment>
The fourth embodiment may be modified as follows. FIG. 45(a) is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process of this modification.

In the fourth embodiment, the second ceiling function is activated by switching the variable display time table based on the value of the switching counter reaching a predetermined value (1000). In this modification, the value of the switching counter (predetermined value, ceiling value) at which the second ceiling function is activated is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, similarly to step S2101, the type of opening/closing execution mode is determined in step S2201, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2207. Step S2207 is similar to the process in step S2107, and performs a process to reset the switching counter. In the following step S2208, a switching counter setting process is executed.

In the switching counter setting process, a value corresponding to the type of opening/closing execution mode to be ended this time is set in the switching counter with reference to the table shown in FIG. 45(b). For example, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds on the first special map side, "2000" or "1000" is set as the ceiling value of the switching counter. Which one to set is preferably determined by lottery or the like; for example, "2000" is set with a probability of 30%, and "1000" is set with a probability of 70%. If it is the end of the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds on the second special figure side, "2000", "1000" or "500" is set as the ceiling value of the switching counter. This may also be determined by lottery or the like; for example, "2000" is set with a probability of 10%, "1000" is set with a probability of 80%, and "500" is set with a probability of 10%. At the end of the opening/closing execution mode of 8 rounds, set "1000" if the opening/closing execution mode is on the first special figure side, and "500" if it is the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side. ”. The lower the ceiling value of the switching counter that is set, the earlier the second ceiling function will be activated, so the ceiling value and distribution probability illustrated above are more advantageous for the second special drawing side than for the first special drawing side. It can be said that it is set as .

In addition, regarding the switching counter set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special out result, a predetermined value (for example, 10) is set regardless of whether it is based on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side. Set. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special result, the opening/closing execution mode of 16R will basically be started in the next normal process, so the setting of the ceiling value of the switching counter is omitted. Good too. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result, V winning does not always occur, so it is preferable to set a predetermined value as the ceiling value as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, processing similar to steps S2102 to S2106 is executed in steps S2202 to S2206. However, in the determination process of step S2204, it is determined whether the value of the switching counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value set in step S2208. The processing in step S2210 is similar to the processing in step S2110.

Incidentally, the command set in step S2210 includes information on the ceiling value of the switching counter set in step S2208. Based on this command, the production control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to display the chance counter display area GH.

In this way, by setting the value at which the second ceiling function is activated after each opening/closing execution mode from a plurality of values, the game can be modulated. In other words, the smaller the value is set as the ceiling value of the switching counter, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the larger the value is set, the more disadvantageous it is to the player. In this way, it becomes possible to use the information as a basis for deciding whether or not to continue playing, for example, and it also becomes possible to use it as a basis for selection when the player selects a gaming machine on which to play a game.

In particular, since it is easier to set a smaller value on the second special figure side than on the first special figure side, it is more advantageous for the player after the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win a prize in the second operating port 34 after winning in the first operating port 33, and only on the first special drawing side without causing a winning in the second operating port 34. It is also possible to make it difficult for the player to play a game that is different from what was expected, such as having the player play a game that is different from what was expected.

<Second modification of fourth embodiment>
In this modification, the ceiling value of the switching counter is set not after the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds, but after the opening/closing execution mode based on a predetermined unfavorable special failure result. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process in this modification.

In step S2301, similarly to step S2101, the type of opening/closing execution mode is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process advances to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result E. If it is based on the unfavorable special out result E, a switching counter setting process is executed in step S2303. In step S2303, one value is selected by lottery or the like from among "1000", "500", and "100" as the ceiling value of the switching counter, and processing is executed to set the selected value as the ceiling value.

It should be noted that which ceiling value is selected is arbitrary, but it is possible to select one that is advantageous for the player, such as selecting "1000" with a probability of 80%, "500" with a probability of 15%, and "100" with a probability of 5%. A configuration may be adopted in which a ceiling value (a ceiling value with a smaller value) is less likely to be selected, or the opposite relationship may be adopted. Furthermore, a plurality of types of triggers for setting the ceiling price may be provided in addition to the unfavorable special failure result E, and the game result and the ceiling price to be set may be associated with each other, as in the first modification.

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, or after executing the process in step S2303, the process advances to step S2304. In step S2304, the process of determining the addition value of the switching counter is executed in the same way as the process of step S2102, and in the subsequent step S2305, the addition process of the switching counter is executed in the same way as the process of step S2103. Then, in step S2306, it is determined whether the ceiling value of the switching counter has been set, and if the ceiling value has been set, it is determined in step S2307 whether the value of the switching counter is greater than or equal to the ceiling value. conduct. If the ceiling value has not been set in step S2306, or if the ceiling value has been set in step S2307 but is still below the ceiling value, a normal table is set as the variable display time table in step S2308. Execute the processing to be performed. If it is determined in step S2307 that the ceiling value of the switching counter has been set and that the value of the switching counter is greater than or equal to the ceiling value, processing for switching the variable display time table to the ceiling table is performed in step S2309. Execute.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, then in steps S2310 and S2311, the same process for consecutive game zones as in steps S2107 and S2108 is executed. After executing any of the processes in step S2308, step S2309, and step S2311, in step S2312, a command including table and counter information and information as to whether or not a ceiling value has been set is sent to the production control device 82. Set as the output target. Thereafter, this variable display time table switching process ends.

In other words, in this modification, regardless of whether or not the ceiling value of the switching counter has been set, the addition of the switching counter will continue as each game progresses (switching of the variable display time table at the end of the opening/closing execution mode). The ceiling price is set upon completion of the opening/closing execution mode of the unfavorable special outlier result E, which is relatively difficult to select. The outline of such a game will be explained together with the example display effect shown in FIG. 47.

In a situation where the ceiling value of the switching counter is not set, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the current switching counter value ("353" in the figure) is displayed in the chance counter display area GH. , a display ("???" in the figure) indicating that the ceiling value of the switching counter has not been set is displayed. On the other hand, in the game counter display area GG, the current number of times the game is played and the number of times the first ceiling function is activated (500) are displayed.

In this case, the player can recognize from the display in the game counter display area GG how much time remains until the first ceiling function is activated, and for example, if the number of games is close to the ceiling, the player can actively play the main game. If the number of games played is far from the ceiling, it is considered that the player refrains from playing the game with this gaming machine (selects another gaming machine). On the other hand, from the display contents of the chance counter display area GH, it is not possible to recognize how much time remains before the second ceiling function is activated.

In a situation where the opening/closing execution mode on the first special figure side is implemented (first short variation/second long variation), if the game result on the first special figure side is a disadvantageous special out result E, the first special figure side concerned The opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special deviation result E on the drawing side is implemented. In that case, the variable display time table switching process is activated, and in this process, the ceiling value of the switching counter is set. For example, when the current ceiling value is set to "500", a command that includes the fact that the ceiling value has been set and information about the ceiling value is output to the production control device 82. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b), a counter image CP is displayed ("counter 500" in the figure) for notifying that the ceiling value has been set and information on the ceiling value. This allows the player to know that the ceiling value of the second ceiling function has been set and to know information about the current ceiling value. Further, an addition process of an additional value (50) corresponding to the unfavorable special out result E is executed on the switching counter, and information on the added value is also output to the production control device 82. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the chance addition display HP is displayed as "+50".

Thereafter, in the chance counter display area GH, a highlighted display (blinking display) is performed to indicate that the switching counter has been added and updated (from "353" to "403"). In addition, in response to the setting of the ceiling value of the switching counter, the display of "???" is changed to "500" and the numerical value of "500" is highlighted (blinking display). In this case, the player can recognize that the second ceiling function will be activated in 97 minutes.

As already explained, the switching counter increases by 2.4 on average for each game. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 47, the second ceiling function can be expected to be activated in 41 games remaining. In other words, it can be expected that the first ceiling function will be activated earlier than the first ceiling function, which will be activated in 379 games. In the above example, if "1000" is set as the current ceiling value, the second ceiling function will be activated in 597 seconds. In this case, there are approximately 250 games left until the second ceiling function is activated, and even in this case, it can be expected that the second ceiling function will be activated earlier than the first ceiling function. On the other hand, if "2000" is set as the current ceiling value, the second ceiling function will be activated in 1597 seconds. In this case, it may take more than 600 games until the second ceiling function is activated, and the first ceiling function is activated first. In this way, depending on the ceiling value that is set, the fun of seeing which ceiling function is activated first is added, and the balance between that ceiling function, the current switching counter value, the number of game runs, etc. It can be used as a selection material for deciding whether to continue playing or selecting a gaming machine.

Incidentally, in the above configuration, it is conceivable that the switching counter is 500 or more or 1000 or more (2000 or more) before the ceiling value is set. For example, if the ceiling value is set to 500 in a situation where the value of the switching counter is 600, which is 500 or more, the table will be switched to the ceiling table at that point. In this way, the activation timing of the ceiling function can vary not only depending on the set ceiling value but also the current value of the switching counter, making it possible to make the game more interesting.

<Third modification of fourth embodiment>
In this modification, the ceiling value of the switching counter is set using the opening/closing execution mode of the unfavorable special out result E as a trigger, as in the second modification, and when the ceiling value is reached, the value of the switching counter at that time is set. The difference from the ceiling price can be carried over to the next time.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the variable display time table switching process of this modification is almost the same as that of the second modification. The difference is that in step S2407, similarly to step S2307, it is determined whether the switching counter is greater than or equal to the ceiling value, and if the determination is affirmative, a ceiling table setting process (step S2410, step (Similar to S2309), the process in step S2409 is performed, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, a special table is set in step S2411 without performing the switching counter reset process in step S2310. It is.

In step S2409, processing is performed to subtract the ceiling value from the current value of the switching counter, and processing is performed to update the subtracted value as the value of the switching counter. Since the configuration is such that the switching counter is not reset after the opening/closing execution mode, this process ensures that the difference between the switching counter and the ceiling value, which exceeds the ceiling value, is carried over to the next switching counter for the ceiling. Become.

For example, assume that the ceiling value is set when the switching counter is 800, and the ceiling value is 500. Then, the difference between the switching counter and the ceiling value is 300, and after the opening/closing execution mode by the ceiling function, the value of the switching counter will start from 300, and it can be expected that the ceiling will be reached early (waiting for the ceiling value to be set).

By doing the above, if the ceiling value is set in a situation where the value of the switching counter is greater than or equal to the ceiling value, the difference will be carried over without being reset, so the addition of the switching counter that is greater than or equal to the ceiling value will be performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has lost money by letting the player lose money.

Further, in the above configuration, when a privilege is given by the first ceiling function that is activated depending on the number of times the game is played, the switching counter is not reset. Therefore, even if the first ceiling function is activated close to the second ceiling function, it is possible to activate the second ceiling function at an early stage thereafter. By doing so, it becomes possible to significantly improve the gameplay using both ceiling functions.

<Fourth modification of the fourth embodiment>
In this modification, in the configuration in which the difference between the switching counter and the ceiling value of the third modification is carried over, whether or not to carry over the difference is determined by lottery.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, if an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S2507 (same as step S2407), a carryover lottery process is executed in step S2508. The probability of winning in the carryover lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured to have a 50% probability of winning the carryover lottery, or it may be configured to have a different probability of winning depending on the set ceiling value (for example, if it is ``500'') The probability of winning may be 50%, 80% for "1000," 100% for "2000," etc.).

In step S2510, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2509 was a winning result. If it is determined that the difference is not carried over, rather than the winning result, a switching counter reset process is executed in step S2511. This process is similar to the process in step S2310 and the like. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2510 that the result is a winning result, then in step S2512, a process of updating the difference value as the value of the switching counter is executed. This process is similar to the process in step S2409.

After executing the process of step S2511 or step S2512, a process of setting a ceiling table is executed in step S2513. Other than that, the processing from step S2501 to step S2508 and step S2514 to step S2515 is the same as the processing from step S2401 to step S2412.

By doing the above, when the second ceiling function is activated, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to whether the difference is carried over or reset. As already explained, if the difference is carried over, the second ceiling function can be activated even earlier, which is advantageous for the player, and if the difference is reset, the second ceiling function is less likely to be activated earlier. This will be disadvantageous compared to the case where it is carried over. Therefore, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to which setting is used for the difference at the ceiling time.

Further, by adjusting the winning probability of the carryover lottery, it becomes possible to change the advantage level of the player and the gameplay in relation to the ceiling value in the second ceiling function. Specifically, if the configuration is such that the difference is more likely to be carried over in situations where a deep ceiling (larger ceiling value) is set, then the deep ceiling has been reached (the winner did not reach the deep ceiling). It is possible to have a ceiling function from the perspective of providing relief to players, and conversely, if the ceiling is deeper, the difference is more difficult to carry over, and the shallower the ceiling is, the more the difference is carried over, the more likely it is to carry over the ball. The range of increase/decrease becomes larger, making it possible to improve the gameplay.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, after the opening/closing execution mode based on a predetermined game result, the opening/closing execution mode based on an advantageous special winning result is difficult to be executed until a predetermined number of games are played (the game round on the first special symbol side ends first). Easy) Switch to variable display time table. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process in this embodiment.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the currently set variable display time table is a specific period table.

Here, the variable display time table in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 51. In this embodiment, in addition to the normal table shown in FIG. 51(a) and the ceiling table shown in FIG. 51(c), a specific period table shown in FIG. 51(b) is set as the variable display time table.

The normal table is the same as the normal table (FIG. 36(b)) in the second embodiment, and regardless of the values of the first game counter and the second game counter, the It is easy to set a set of fluctuations, and it is difficult to set a set of first long fluctuations and second short fluctuations. In other words, it is a variable display time table in which the game round on the first special figure side is more likely to end earlier than the game round on the second special figure side, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result is more likely to be implemented.

The ceiling table is similar to the ceiling table (FIG. 43(c)) in the fourth embodiment, and the first long fluctuation and second short fluctuation are independent of the values of the first game counter and the second game counter. It is easy to set a set of fluctuations, and it is difficult to set a set of first short fluctuations and second long fluctuations. In other words, it is a variable display time table in which the game round on the second special figure side is more likely to end earlier than the game round on the first special figure side, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result is more likely to be implemented.

In the specific period table, a set of the first short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation is set based on the values of the first game counter and the second game counter until the number of games reaches a predetermined number (50 times). , the set of the first long variation and the second short variation is not set, and after reaching a predetermined number of times, the set of the first long variation and the second short variation is more likely to be set. In other words, until the number of games reaches a predetermined number, the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special winning result is basically implemented, and after the predetermined number of games is reached, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result becomes more likely to be implemented. . Note that in the following explanation, the period in which the specific period table is set will also be referred to as a specific period.

The specific period table is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special deviation results B to D. On the other hand, the ceiling table is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when switching the variable display time table after the opening/closing execution mode, and is also set when a specific period ends. The normal table is set when changing the variable display time table other than when the specific period table and ceiling table are set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that a variable display time table different from the specific period table is set, then in step S2602 it is determined whether the current variable display time table is a ceiling table. A negative determination in step S2602 means that the current variable display time table is a normal table. In this case, in step S2603, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the game result that triggered the setting of the specific period table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it was a predetermined result among disadvantageous special outlier results.

Also in this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of disadvantageous special deviation results are set as disadvantageous special deviation results on the first special figure side. However, since the distribution rate is different from that of the fourth embodiment, the distribution table in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 52.

In this embodiment, as disadvantageous special deviation results on the first special figure side, disadvantageous special deviation results A, disadvantageous special deviation results B, disadvantageous special deviation results C, and disadvantageous special deviation results D are provided. . Which unfavorable special outlier result will be determined is determined by the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. For example, unfavorable special outlier result A will be allocated with a probability of 94%, B with 3%, C with 2%, and D with 1. %, the unfavorable special out result A is most likely to be distributed, and the distribution rate is set to be lower in the order of unfavorable special out result B, unfavorable special out result C, and unfavorable special out result D. In particular, in this embodiment, in the case of an unfavorable special outlier result, it is set so that most of the unfavorable outlier results are allocated to the unfavorable outlier result A, and the unfavorable outlier results B to D are set so as to be allocated at a relatively low frequency. has been done. Note that these distribution rates are merely examples, and the distribution rates of each of the unfavorable special failure results A to D may be different from those described above.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time table switching process, in step S2603, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the setting of the specific period table was one of the unfavorable special losing results B to D. If the result is one of disadvantageous special failure results B to D, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, a process is executed to set a specific period table as a switching destination for the current variable display time.

In the subsequent step S2605, processing is executed to start counting the first game counter and the second game counter. That is, in this embodiment, the measurement of the first game time counter and the second game time counter in each game time (update processing in step S618 and step S918) is carried out on the condition that the specific period table is set. Ru. In a situation where a specific period table is not set (a situation where a normal table or a ceiling table is set), the first game counter and the second game counter are not measured.

After executing the start process in step S2605, the values of the loop counters provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 are set in steps S2606 to S2610. The loop counter corresponds to the switching counter in the fourth embodiment, and is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the number of times the variable display time table is switched under predetermined conditions.

That is, in step S2606, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result B. If it is based on the unfavorable special failure result B, in step S2607, a process of inputting "0" into the loop counter is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2606, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result C. If it is based on the unfavorable special failure result C, in step S2609, a process of inputting "1" into the loop counter is executed. A negative determination in step S2608 means that the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result D. In this case, in step S2710, a process of inputting "3" into the loop counter is executed.

After executing any of the processes in step S2607, step S2609, and step S2610, the specific period command is set as an output target to the production control device 82 in step S2611, and then this switching process is ended. The specific period command includes information about being set in the specific period table and information about the value of the loop counter. The processing of the production control device 82 that has received the specific period command will be described in detail later.

By being set in the specific period table, each variable display time is basically the same as the first one until the values of the first game counter and the second game counter reach a predetermined value ("50" in this embodiment). A set of 1 short variation and 2nd long variation will be set, and the game round on the first special symbol side will end first. Therefore, except in the case of a low-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode is basically implemented based on the unfavorable special winning results A to D (mostly the unfavorable special winning result A). On the other hand, when the values of the first game counter and the second game counter become "50" or more, the fluctuation display time of the first long fluctuation and second short fluctuation will be set, and the game on the second special drawing side will be set. The round will end first. In other words, by being set in the specific period table, it can be said that by playing the game a predetermined number of times (50 times) after that, the state shifts to a state in which the bonus is more likely to be awarded.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the current variable display time table is a specific period table, that is, if the processes from step S2604 onward have been executed before the current opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S2612.

In step S2612, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is an opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special failure result. As already explained, in a situation where the variable display time table of the specific period table is set, the variable display time of the first short variation and second long variation is set until the number of games reaches the predetermined number of times, and From then on, the variable display time of the first long variation and second short variation is set, so the opening/closing execution mode on the first special symbol side will be implemented until the number of games reaches a predetermined number, and after the predetermined number of times, the opening/closing execution mode on the second special symbol side will be executed. The opening/closing execution mode on the side shown is implemented. Therefore, in a situation where a specific period table is set, if the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result is implemented, the relatively low Either the probability has turned out to be an advantageous special winning result, or the second special drawing side has won a winning lottery after reaching a predetermined number of times, resulting in an advantageous special winning result. In this embodiment, the specific period ends in any of these cases, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, the ceiling table is set as the switching destination of the current variable display time table in step S2613. Execute the processing to be performed. Then, in step S2614, the process of terminating the measurement of the first game counter and the second game counter is executed, and then the main switching process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2612 that the current opening/closing execution mode is not based on an advantageous special failure result, the process advances to step S2615 and sets a specific period table as the switching destination of the current variable display time table. Execute. Then, in step S2616, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was based on any of the unfavorable special failure results B to D. If the result is none of the unfavorable special failure results B to D (in most cases, the unfavorable special failure result is A), the main switching process is directly terminated. In this case, the variable display time table is simply reset to the specific period table.

When it is determined in step S2516 that the result is one of unfavorable special failure results B to D, loop counter addition processing is executed in steps S2517 to S2622. Specifically, in step S2617, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result B. If it is based on the unfavorable special failure result B, in step S2618, a process of adding "2" to the loop counter is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2617, it is determined in step S2619 whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result C. If it is based on the unfavorable special failure result C, in step S2620, a process of adding "4" to the loop counter is executed. A negative determination in step S2619 means that the current opening/closing execution mode was based on the unfavorable special failure result D. In this case, in step S2621, a process of adding "6" to the loop counter is executed.

After executing any of the processes in step S2618, step S2620, and step S2621, the addition information command is set as an output target to the production control device 82 in step S2622. The addition information command is a command output to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process, and includes information on the numerical value added to the loop counter. The processing on the production control device 82 side based on receiving the addition information command will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the current variable display time table is a ceiling table, that is, if the process of step S2613 has been executed before the current opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S2623.

In step S2623, it is determined whether the loop counter is "0". If the loop counter is not "0", a process of decrementing the loop counter by 1 is executed in step S2624. Then, in step S2625, the ceiling table is set as the switching destination of the current variable display time table, and then the main switching process ends. If it is determined in step S2623 that the loop counter is "0", in step S2626 the normal table is set as the switching destination of the current variable display time table, and then the main switching process ends.

As described above, by implementing the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special failure results B to D, the variable display time table is set to the specific period table and becomes the specific period. Further, a value corresponding to the game result is input to the loop counter. The specific period ends with an opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special outcome. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special failure results B to D is executed during the specific period, the addition process of the loop counter is performed. When the specific period ends, the ceiling table is set until the loop counter reaches "0", and when the loop counter reaches "0", the normal table is set.

In other words, during the specific period, up to 50 games, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning in the opening/closing execution mode are difficult to implement, but after 50 games, the opening/closing execution mode is based on the advantageous special winning result. This is a state in which the opening/closing execution mode based on , and the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning are executed, and depending on the value of the loop counter, the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning after a specific period is executed multiple times.

As mentioned above, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result that triggers the end of the specific period, it is expected that a V win will occur, and this V winning will lead to the opening/closing execution mode (16 rounds) based on the V winning. (opening/closing execution mode) is implemented. In this case, although the ceiling table is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed regardless of the variable display time table. On the other hand, if the ceiling table is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result will be implemented due to the first long variation and the second short variation, and after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning. If the ceiling table is not set (the normal table is set), the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special off result will be difficult to implement.

In other words, the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning, which is carried out after a specific period, is carried out via the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result, and until the value of the loop counter becomes 0, The opening/closing execution mode based on the result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning will be repeated. Since multiple opening/closing execution modes loop as a set in this way, the loop counter is not the same number as the number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning, and the values of multiple loop counters are set for each number of executions. are being distributed. Specifically, when the value of the loop counter is "0" or "1", the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning after a specific period is executed once, and when the value of the loop counter is "2" or "3". In this case, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning after the specific period is executed twice, and when the value of the loop counter is "4" or "5", the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning after the specific period is executed 3 times. It will be carried out twice, and so on.

<Specific period performance processing on the performance control device 82 side>
Next, an outline of the production process for a specific period executed on the production control device 82 side will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. The specific period production process is a process that is executed when the variable display time table is set to the specific period table in the process on the main control device 81 side. Note that the following description will be made in conjunction with the display effect examples shown in FIGS. 54 and 55.

In step S2701, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode. If it is not the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode and the variable display time table switching process is not being executed on the main control device 81 side, the main performance process is ended as is. If it is the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S2702.

In step S2702, the current variable display time table is a specific period table, and it is determined whether it is in the specific period. If it is not the specific period, it is determined in step S2703 whether a specific period command has been received. As already explained, the specific period command is a command output when setting a specific period in the variable display time table switching process.

If a specific period command has been received, in step S2704, processing is executed to set the production mode to the production mode for the specific period. Further, in step S2705, processing is executed to set a specific period occurrence effect to notify that the specific period has been set. Then, in step S2706, a production loop counter setting process is executed, and the present production process ends. The performance loop counter corresponds to the loop counter on the main control device 81 side, and the performance loop counter is set based on the loop counter information included in the specific period command. In step S2706, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed after the specific period is determined from the value of the loop counter (one of "0", "1", or "3") included in the specific period command. , executes a process of inputting a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value corresponding to the number of times into the production loop counter. Specifically, if the value of the loop counter included in the specific period command is "0", the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning will be executed once, so "0" is input to the loop counter for production, and the loop counter is If the value of is "1", the opening/closing execution mode based on V winning will be executed twice, so enter "1" in the production loop counter, and if the value of the loop counter is "3", it will be based on V winning. Since the opening/closing execution mode is executed three times, "2" is input into the production loop counter. Further, if it is determined in step S2703 that no command has been received for a specific period, the main effect processing is immediately terminated.

As the specific period occurrence effect, as shown in FIG. 54(a), for example, "Chance Time!!" is displayed on the display screen G to clearly indicate that the specific period occurs. In addition, when the specific period table is set, the opening/closing execution mode is being implemented based on disadvantageous and special failure results B to D, and the specific period occurrence effect is replaced by the ending effect etc. at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to implement it by In other words, in a situation where the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not performed, it is possible to perform such a specific period occurrence effect, and it is possible to perform the effect using the entire display screen G.

Note that the main controller 81 side has a configuration in which the variable display time table switching process is performed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the opening/closing execution mode), and a specific period command is output when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, not only the ending performance but also the period during which other performances (opening performance, round performance, etc.) are performed during the opening/closing execution mode based on disadvantageous and special failure results B to D are used to execute the specific period occurrence performance. It can be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to secure a long execution time for the specific period occurrence effect.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the production mode for a specific period includes a specific display mode set in an area (for example, the area at the top of the display screen G) arranged in parallel with the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In the period display area GS, "During chance time" is displayed as a notification that the specified period is in progress, and the number of remaining game times until the change of the variable display time set in the specified period is displayed as "Remaining". 50 times". Further, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed after the end of the specific period is displayed by the number of stock images SP. In this embodiment, at the start of a specific period, one stock image SP is displayed regardless of the value of the presentation loop counter (see FIG. 54(b)). That is, at the start of the specific period, the player can understand that the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning can be executed once as the specific period passes.

Returning to the explanation of the specific period production process, if it is determined in step S2702 that the specific period is in progress, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not an addition information command has been received. As already explained, the addition information command is a command that is output when the opening/closing execution mode based on unfavorable special outlier results B to D is executed during a specific period, and includes information on the value to be added to the loop counter. ing. If it is determined in step S2707 that an addition information command has been received, then in step S2708 a process of adding addition information to a production loop counter is executed. Specifically, when the addition value of the loop counter is "2" as addition information, "1" is added to the loop counter for production, and when the addition value of the loop counter is "4", "1" is added to the loop counter for production. If the added value of the loop counter is "6", "3" is added to the performance loop counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, or after the process in step S2708 is completed, the process advances to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether the value of the production loop counter is "0". If it is "0", the main effect processing is immediately ended.

If the value of the performance loop counter is not "0", a stock performance generation lottery is executed in step S2710. The stock performance generation lottery will notify you before the specific period has passed that the value of the production loop counter is not "0" and that there is an unreported portion of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning that will be implemented after the specific period has elapsed. This is a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the stock performance for the event. The probability of winning the lottery is, for example, if the value of the production loop counter is "1", there is a 5% probability of winning, if it is "2", there is a 10% probability of winning, and if it is "3", there is a probability of winning. It may be set such that the larger the value of the production loop counter, the higher the winning probability, such as a 20% probability of winning. Furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to vary depending on the number of times the game is played during a specific period and the number of times remaining. For example, from the 1st to 10th time after a specific period is set, there is a 5% chance of winning, from the 11th to 30th time there is a 10% chance of winning, and from the 31st to 49th time there is a 20% chance of winning. It is also possible to set the probability of winning at 100% on the 50th time. Furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery may be varied depending on the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an unfavorable special losing result A has a 1% probability of winning, and a disadvantageous special losing result B to D has a 100% probability of winning. Alternatively, the probability of winning may be a combination of these. Furthermore, in the case where there are multiple open/close execution modes for unannounced portions, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to determine how many times the notification will be performed based on one winning.

In step S2711, it is determined whether or not the stock effect has been won based on the processing result of step S2710. In the case of non-winning, the main performance process is immediately ended. In the case of winning, a process of setting a stock effect is executed in step S2712, and a process of subtracting the number of times of opening/closing execution mode notified by the stock effect is executed in step S2713 from the effect loop counter. After that, the main performance processing is ended.

As a stock effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(c), after the variable display of the symbols in each game round is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is performed, opening/closing execution based on the V winning that can be performed after a specific period. A stock increase image SC (“+1” in the figure) with a number corresponding to the increase in the number of modes is displayed. For example, if the configuration is such that a plurality of opening/closing execution modes are notified in one stock effect, the number displayed in the stock increase image SC may be a numerical value corresponding to the plurality of times. The stock increase image SC moves to the area where the stock image SP is displayed while swinging, and by moving to the area where the stock image SP is displayed, it is converted to the number of stock images SP attached and displayed. (See FIG. 55(a)).

For example, if the winning probability of the stock effect is different depending on the game result, the stop result of the symbol corresponding to the game result may be used as the stop result that suggests the occurrence of the stock effect, or the stop result of the symbol may be used as the stop result of the stock effect together with the stop result of the symbol. It may also be configured to perform a suggestive effect that suggests the occurrence of. In the case of a configuration that suggests the occurrence of a stock effect based on the stopping result of a symbol, for example, by associating the winning probability with the stopping result, the higher the winning probability is, the easier it is for the main symbol with a specific number (for example, 3) to stop. It may be configured such that the larger the number of opening/closing execution modes notified when winning, the more likely the main symbol to which a specific numerical value (for example, 7) is attached is likely to stop. In addition, as a suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 54(c), "Cha" is displayed by placing it alongside the stop symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, and "Cha" is displayed by placing it in parallel with the stop symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. Each time each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stops, a part of the suggestion effect is carried out, such as displaying "S" and displaying "S" in parallel with the stopped symbols of the lower symbol row Z3. However, a structure may be adopted in which the suggestive performance is completed as a series of performances by stopping all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. According to these configurations, it is thought that a player who expects the occurrence of a stock performance during a specific period will become very interested in the stoppage of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In a configuration that suggests the occurrence of a stock effect based on the stop results of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, in the variable display process (FIG. 33) that sets the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are It is preferable to set a stop result, etc. based on the probability of occurrence of the stock effect in the process at the start of the Z3 variation (step S1803). In addition, in the variable display process, the display of the specific period display area GS is updated according to the number of times the game is played during the specific period (specifically, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is It is preferable to have a configuration in which the display of the remaining number of games in a specific period is updated by subtracting 1 each time the game is started.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the specific period has passed and the number of remaining games becomes "0", the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result is implemented and the variable display time table is switched to the ceiling table. , the display "During chance time" in the display area GS for a specific period is a display (for example, "V release mode in progress") to notify that the opening/closing execution mode in which the table is switched to the ceiling table and the V winning is executed is implemented. display). By switching the variable display time table to the ceiling table, the opening/closing execution mode is based on the advantageous special winning result of the second special drawing side, and the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds is based on the V winning (V winning) in the opening/closing execution mode. and are repeated a number of times according to the production side loop counter.

In the present embodiment, the performance control device 82 is capable of specifying the number of loops of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning by using the performance loop counter, and the number of loops of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning. The configuration is such that the number of times the program has been performed can be stored so that it can be specified at the time of completion. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(c), at the end (at the end) of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning that was carried out in a situation where the production loop counter became "0", the current specific period A number-of-times notification effect is executed to notify the number of times of opening/closing execution mode based on the later V-winning. Further, for example, if the number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (three times), a display that appears to congratulate the number of times ("I did it!!" in the figure) is displayed. By doing this, the player can clearly understand that the specific period has ended, and can also track the number of times the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds was carried out during the specific period. , players can be immersed in the afterglow of consecutive games.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, until a predetermined number of game times are played, the game time on the first special figure side ends before the second special figure side, and the display time is variable, and after the game is played a predetermined number of times, By using a specific period table with a variable display time in which the game time on the second special drawing side ends before the first special drawing side, the player can play a predetermined number of times by setting in the specific period table. If you play the game twice, it becomes possible to know in advance a predetermined number of times that you will receive a benefit in the opening/closing execution mode on the second special figure side, that is, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result. In this way, it becomes possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game. Moreover, unlike the so-called pre-read notification regarding the awarding of benefits for the game round related to the acquired validity judgment information (jackpot random number counter C1, etc.), the notification is made before the acquisition of the validity judgment information regarding the game round after a predetermined number of times. In addition, it is possible to know that benefits will be awarded based on the game play after the predetermined number of times (opening/closing execution mode based on V winning will be implemented), so it will be possible to realize novel gameplay that is different from conventional ones. It becomes possible to do this.

And, such a specific period table has a configuration in which it is set not by an opening/closing execution mode in which benefits are essentially given, such as favorable special losing results, but by a part of unfavorable special losing results in which no benefits are actually given. did. By doing so, it is possible to attract interest even in the game result in each game round in which no bonus is actually awarded, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

As the game results set in the specific period table, disadvantageous special losing results B to D are provided, and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing execution mode of the disadvantageous special losing results B to D is also changed to the disadvantageous special losing result A which is not set in the specific period table. It has been made common. By doing this, the player cannot recognize that the table is set for a specific period from the opening/closing manner during the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the performance. becomes.

After the specific period, a ceiling table is set, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning are configured to be looped multiple times. This makes it possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage after the specific period has passed, making the game more exciting during the specific period.

In this case, the number of times the loop is repeated is changed depending on the type of unfavorable special failure result. By doing this, the game results are associated with the number of bonuses granted (how many bonuses are awarded), making it easier to adjust the ball launch rate, and preventing the event that the ball launch rate is significantly different from the designed value. The occurrence can be suppressed.

The system is configured to increase the number of loops in the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning when the game results of the game rounds carried out during the specific period become unfavorable special losing results B to D. By doing this, the impression that the specific period is a waiting time until the opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the advantageous special deviation results is weakened, and conversely, it is possible to reduce the impression that the specific period is a waiting time until the opening/closing execution mode is implemented based on the favorable special deviation results. It is possible to make the game such as winning the game result or not, and it is possible to significantly improve the game quality during a specific period. From this point of view, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning, which is added by the unfavorable special losing results B to D during the specific period, may be greater than the number of times outside the specific period. On the other hand, if the number of times added during the specific period is smaller than the number of times other than during the specific period, it is possible to provide a game experience in which a rise in the ball hitting rate is suppressed.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the switching conditions for switching the variable display time table from the normal table to the special table are different from those in the first embodiment. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 74. Note that the same configurations as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when the second condition is satisfied under a situation where the first condition is satisfied, the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure is switched from the normal table to the special table. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56, a condition random number counter CC is provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 as a counter for determining whether each of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. .

The conditional random number counter CC is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 39). The conditional random number counter CC is updated periodically (for example, updated at the same timing as the jackpot random number counter C1), and at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, the conditional random number counter CC is updated in the reserved ball storage area 232 (first execution area RAE) of the RAM 204. ). Note that the conditional random number counter CC is a special random number for the first operating port 33, and even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it will not be stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 (second execution area RBE) of the RAM 204. .

A determination as to whether the first condition is satisfied is made using the condition random number counter CC and the first condition table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203. As shown in FIG. 57(a), the first condition table is such that the first condition is satisfied when the value of the conditional random number counter CC is 7, and the first condition is not satisfied when the value is other than 7. It is set as follows. That is, the first condition is set as a condition that is satisfied with a probability of 1/40.

The determination that the first condition is satisfied is made based on the winning of the game ball in the first operating port 33, and specifically, the result of the determination of whether the game ball is winning in the first operating port 33 is special. This is done based on the fact that the result is a miss. In other words, the determination that the first condition is satisfied is made only when a win to the first operating port 33 occurs and the result of the win/fail determination is a special winning result, and when it is a jackpot result or a normal winning result. will not be carried out.

A determination as to whether the second condition is satisfied is made using the condition random number counter CC and the second condition table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203. As shown in FIG. 57(b), the second condition table holds that the second condition is satisfied when the value of the conditional random number counter CC is 7, 17, and that the second The condition is set so that it does not hold. That is, the second condition is set as a condition that is satisfied with a probability of 1/20.

The above second condition is determined to be satisfied when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 under a situation where the first condition is satisfied. This is done when the result of the judgment of winning or not winning is a special losing result. That is, the determination of whether the second condition is satisfied is not performed in a situation where the first condition is not satisfied or if the result of the determination is a jackpot result or a normal loss result.

Next, the normal table and special table of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58(a) shows a normal table, and FIG. 58(b) shows a special table.

As shown in FIG. 58, the normal table and the special table show the relationship between the variation type counter CSA and the variation display time of the first special symbol game time, and the relationship between the variation type counter CSB and the variation display time of the second special symbol game time. It stipulates the relationship with time. These normal tables and special tables are stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Note that in both of these tables, unlike the variable display time table of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29), the relationship with the game counter (the number of times a game is executed) is not defined.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), the normal table is provided corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the normal table for the first special symbol, the first short variation (10.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 199/200, and the first long variation (30.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 1/200, according to the value of the variation type counter CSA. .0sec) is selected. On the other hand, in the normal table for the second special symbol, the second long variation (20.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 199/200, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 1/200, according to the value of the variation type counter CSB. (5.0 sec) is selected.

That is, in a situation where a normal table is used as the variable display time table, the first short variation is selected as the variable display time for the first special figure game time, and the first short change is selected as the variable display time for the second special figure game time. In most cases, the second length variation is selected. In this case, as explained in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the game round of the second special figure starts 1.0 sec after the start of the game round of the first special figure, the second special figure It becomes easier for the variable display time for the first special symbol to elapse from the start of the game session for the first special symbol earlier than the variable display time for the second special symbol from the start of the game session.

Therefore, if the winning/failure lottery results of the first special drawing and the second special drawing are both special losing results (see FIG. 9), the winning/failure drawing result of the first special drawing is likely to be validated. Since most of the special winning results of the first special figure are disadvantageous special winning results, the second variable winning device 32B is likely to be driven in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 356 (Fig. 30 reference). In other words, the state in which the normal table is used is a gaming state in which it is extremely difficult to achieve a V win, which is a condition for awarding a V jackpot. In addition, as already explained, when a V winning is achieved, a V jackpot is given as a benefit.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), special tables are provided corresponding to the first special figure and the second special figure. In the special table for the first special symbol, the first short variation is selected with a probability of 190/200, and the first long variation is selected with a probability of 10/200 (1/20), according to the value of the variation type counter CSA. is configured to be On the other hand, in the special table for the second special symbol, the second long variation is selected with a probability of 190/200, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 10/200 (1/20) according to the value of the variation type counter CSB. is configured to be selected.

That is, in a situation where a special table is used as a variable display time table, the first length variation is more likely to be selected as the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure than in the case of a normal table, and The second short variation is more likely to be selected as the variation display time of the game round. In this case, compared to the case of a normal table, the variable display time for the first special pattern passes from the start of the game period of the first special pattern, and the second special pattern starts from the start of the game period of the second special pattern. A specific state in which the graphical variable display time elapses is likely to occur. If a specific condition occurs, the winning or losing lottery results on the second special drawing side will be validated, and most of the special winning results of the second special drawing are considered to be favorable special winning results, so it is almost certain that the second special drawing will be the winning result. The variable winning device 32B is driven in a manner that makes it easy to win V (see FIG. 31). In other words, when the special table is used as the variable display time table, it is easier to win a V prize than when using the normal table, and the game is advantageous to the player.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the internal state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the normal state 601, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the result of the judgment corresponding to the winning becomes a jackpot result (the winning/fail lottery result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot result), the opening/closing operation is performed. The gaming state after the end of the execution mode is set to an advantageous state 603. The advantageous state 603 is a state in which the special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this embodiment, the advantageous state 603 corresponds to the "second gaming state".

Further, in the normal state 601, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the win/fail determination result corresponding to the win becomes a special lose result, it is determined that the first condition is met. When the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the state shifts to the precursor state 602.

In the precursor state 602, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, upon transition from the normal state 601 to the precursor state 602, there is no switching of the variable display time table, and the selected state of the normal table is maintained as it is. In the precursor state 602, if the lottery result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot result, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the advantageous state 603, as in the case of the normal state 601. be done. In this embodiment, the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602 correspond to the "first gaming state".

In the precursor state 602, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the result of the win/fail determination corresponding to the win becomes a special lose result, it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied in the precursor state 602, the state shifts to the advantageous state 603. That is, if the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, it is also possible to shift to the advantageous state 603 via the precursor state 602.

In other words, in a state where the first condition is not satisfied, the transition route to the advantageous state 603 is limited to the case where the lottery result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing becomes a jackpot, but if the first condition is not satisfied, After the winning/failure lottery result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing becomes a jackpot, there are two cases: a case where the second condition is satisfied after the first condition is satisfied.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the first condition is met, the number of transition routes increases, and the transition to the advantageous state 603 becomes easier than when the first condition is not met. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game in the hope that the first condition will be met, while aiming for the winning/failure lottery result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing to be a jackpot result.

Here, the precursor state 602 is configured to end when the number of times the game of the first special symbol has been executed since its start reaches 20 times (upper limit number). Therefore, if the second condition is satisfied after the transition to the precursor state 602 and before the number of executions of the first special symbol game reaches the 21st time, the gaming state will transition to the advantageous state 603, but the second condition If the 20th game round of the first special symbol ends without being satisfied, the state where the first condition is satisfied is canceled and the state returns to the normal state 601. Therefore, after the first condition is satisfied, the player plays the game aiming for the second condition to be satisfied before the number of times the first special symbol is played is 20 times.

The advantageous state 603 is configured to end when the number of times the game of the second special symbol is executed from the start reaches 10 times (upper limit number). In the advantageous state 603, the second variable winning device 32B is likely to be driven in a manner that makes it easy to win a V prize, but when the game ball passes through the V winning area 356, it becomes a V jackpot, and the opening/closing execution mode for the V jackpot is executed. Ru. If the 10th game of the second special symbol ends without a V winning being achieved, the gaming state shifts to the normal state 601 and the advantageous state 603 ends. Further, even when a V jackpot is achieved, the gaming state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal state 601.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the following description, parts that are different from the first embodiment will be mainly explained.

<First game round control process>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first game round control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 60, the processing of steps S3001 and S3002 is different from the first game round control processing of FIG. 16 according to the first embodiment.

In the first game time control process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, after executing the process of step S505 in the same manner as the first game time control process of the first embodiment, A variation start process (first variation start process) for 1 special symbol is executed.

In the first variation start process, as shown in FIG. 61, in steps S601 to S603, the first special symbol validation process is executed. If the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the jackpot type sorting process (16R jackpot, 8R jackpot) is performed in steps S604 and S605, and then the stop result is set according to the sorting result in steps S606 to S610. Process and set flags.

If the result of the success/failure determination is not a jackpot in step S603, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is a special loss result. If the result is a special failure, in step S3101, a condition satisfaction determination process is executed to determine whether the first and second conditions are satisfied.

<Condition establishment determination process>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the condition satisfaction determination processing in step S3101.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the condition fulfillment determination process, the status of the first condition and the second condition at that point in time is checked in steps S3201 and S3202, and if the first condition is not satisfied, steps S3203 and S3204 In step S3205 and S3206, it is determined whether the first condition is satisfied, and if the first condition has already been satisfied, it is determined whether the second condition is satisfied.

Specifically, first in step S3201, it is determined whether the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The second fulfillment flag indicates that the second condition has been satisfied, in other words, the gaming state has shifted to the advantageous state 603. This second establishment flag is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result) executed after the end of the game round of the first special symbol.

If the second establishment flag is not stored, that is, if the gaming state is the normal state 601 or the precursor state 602, in step S3202, check whether the first establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. Determine whether or not. The first fulfillment flag indicates that the first condition has been satisfied, in other words, that the state has shifted to the precursor state 602. This first establishment flag is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result) which is executed after the end of the game round of the first special symbol in which the first condition is satisfied.

If the first establishment flag is not stored, that is, if the gaming state is the normal state 601, in step S3203, the first condition table (FIG. 57(a)) of the ROM 203 is acquired, and the first condition A determination process (first condition satisfaction determination process) is executed to determine whether or not the following is true. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the condition random number counter CC stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set as the first condition being met.

If the first condition is satisfied, a first flag indicating that the first condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S3204. After executing step S3204 or when a negative determination is made in step S3203 (if the first condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag is stored in step S3202, that is, if the gaming state is the precursor state 602, the second condition table (FIG. 57(b)) in the ROM 203 is stored in step S3205. and executes a process for determining whether the second condition is met (second condition satisfaction determination process). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the conditional random number counter CC stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set as the fulfillment of the second condition.

If the second condition is satisfied, a second flag indicating that the second condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S3206. After executing step S3206 or when a negative determination is made in step S3205 (when the second condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 204, the condition establishment determination process is ended without executing the processes after step S3202. . That is, when the gaming state is the advantageous state 603, the configuration is such that the process for determining whether the first and second conditions are met is not executed. As a result, the first condition is met during the transition to the advantageous state 603 and the transition to the precursor state 602 occurs, or the second condition is satisfied during the advantageous state 603 and the prescribed number of times is reset to 10. Inconveniences are avoided.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 61, after executing the condition satisfaction determination process in step S3101, it is determined in step S612 whether or not the special losing result is an advantageous special losing result, and then in steps S613 to S616. Performs stop result setting processing and flag setting according to the distribution results. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S611, a stop result setting process for normal failure is executed in step S617. After executing steps S608, S610, S614, S616, and S617, in step S3102, a process for setting a variable display time (first variable display time) for the game time of the first special symbol is executed.

<First variable display time setting process>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process in step S3102.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the first variable display time setting process, first in step S3301, it is determined whether the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the second establishment flag is not stored, in step S3302, the normal table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 (FIG. 58(a) ). In the following step S3303, with reference to the normal table, the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is obtained, and set as the variable display time of the game time of the first special symbol. do.

On the other hand, if the second establishment flag is stored in step S3301, a special table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is stored as the variable display time table for the first special symbol in step S3304. (FIG. 58(b)). Then, in step S3303, with reference to the special table, the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is obtained, and the variable display time of the game round of the first special symbol is obtained. Set as .

After executing the process of step S3303, the process of starting the fluctuation display of step S620 in FIG. 61 is executed, and the process for starting the first fluctuation is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 60, after executing the forced termination command setting process in step S512 or the variation termination command setting process in step S516, in step S3002, the process for transitioning from the precursor state 602 to the normal state 601 is performed. Execute the condition cancellation process.

<Process for canceling conditions>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the condition cancellation process in step S3002.

The condition cancellation process is a process for returning to the normal state 601 when the termination condition is satisfied in the precursor state 602. As shown in FIG. 64, in the condition cancellation process, first in step S3401, it is determined whether the first establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the first fulfillment flag is not stored, that is, if the first condition is not satisfied and the precursor state 602 is not present, the condition cancellation process ends.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag is stored in step S3401, the game counter area CG1 is decremented by one in step S3402. The game time counter area CG1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the first special symbol game time is executed after the precursor state 602 is started. In this embodiment, when storing the first establishment flag, 20 is set in the game round counter area CG1, and this is decremented by 1 in response to the end of the game round of the first special symbol. The process of setting 20 in the game counter area CG1 will be described later.

After executing the process in step S3402, in step S3403, it is determined whether the value of the game counter area CG1 is 0, that is, whether the number of times the first special symbol has been executed has reached 20. Determine whether If the value of the game counter area CG1 is 0, the first establishment flag stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S3404.

If the first fulfillment flag is cleared in this way, when the next first fluctuation start process is executed, a negative determination is made in step S3202 of the condition fulfillment determination process (FIG. 62), and the second condition is determined to be satisfied. will no longer be performed. In other words, by erasing the first fulfillment flag, the state in which the first condition is satisfied is canceled, and the precursor state 602 ends.

In the following step S3405, a first condition termination command is set. In this processing, processing is performed to output information that the precursor state 602 has ended to the production control device 82. The first condition end command set in step S3405 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15). After executing step S3405 or when a negative determination is made in step S3403, the condition cancellation process is ended.

<Second game round control process>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the second game round control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 65, the processing of steps S3501 and S3502 is different from the second game round control processing of FIG. 19 according to the first embodiment.

In the second game time control process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, after executing the process of step S805 in the same manner as the second game time control process of the first embodiment, the 2 Execute the fluctuation start process.

In the process for starting the second variation, as shown in FIG. time). The second variable display time setting process is, as shown in FIG. 67, the same as the first variable display time setting process in FIG. 63. That is, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, and if it is not stored, the second establishment flag is determined with reference to the normal table (FIG. 58(a)). Set the variable display time of the game times of the 2nd special figure (steps S3702, S3703), and if stored, refer to the special table (FIG. 58(b)) and set the variable display time of the game times of the 2nd special figure. is set (steps S3704, S3703).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 65, after executing the forced termination command setting process in step S812 or the variation termination command setting process in step S816, in step S3502, a table for transitioning from the advantageous state 603 to the normal state 601 is created. Execute recovery processing.

<Processing for table restoration>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the table restoration process in step S3502.

The table return process is a process for returning from the advantageous state 603 to the normal state 601 when the termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603. As shown in FIG. 68, in the table restoration process, first in step S3801, it is determined whether the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the second fulfillment flag is not stored, that is, if the second condition is not satisfied and the transition to the advantageous state 603 has not been made, the table restoration process ends.

On the other hand, if the second establishment flag is stored in step S3801, the game counter area CG2 is decremented by one in step S3802. The game counter area CG2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after the advantageous state 603 is started. In this embodiment, when storing the second establishment flag, 10 is set in the game round counter area CG2, and this is decremented by 1 in response to the end of the game round of the second special symbol. Note that the process of setting 10 in the game counter area CG2 will be described later.

After executing step S3802, in step S3803, it is determined whether the value of the game times counter area CG2 is 0, that is, whether the number of times the second special symbol is played has reached 10 times. do. If the value of the game counter area CG2 is 0, the second establishment flag stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S3804. As a result, the state in which the second condition is met is canceled, and the advantageous state 603 ends.

In the following step S3805, a table return command is set. In this processing, processing is performed to output information that the advantageous state 603 has ended to the production control device 82. The table return command set in step S3805 is sent to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15). After executing step S3805 or if a negative determination is made in step S3803, the table restoration process is ended.

<Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends, which is executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment. This transition process is performed in step S1016 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, that is, when the validity determination results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are a jackpot result or a special loss result. This is executed at the end of the corresponding opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, table switching processing is executed in step S3901. The table switching process is a process for switching the reference table when setting the variable display time of each game of the first special figure and the second special figure.

<Table switching process>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the table switching process in step S3901.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the table switching process, first in step S4101, it is determined whether the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first winning flag is stored when the judgment result of the first special drawing is a jackpot result (see step S604 in FIG. 17), and the second winning flag is stored when the judgment result of the second special drawing is a jackpot result. This is stored when is a jackpot result (see step S904 in FIG. 20).

If neither the first winning flag nor the second winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The V winning flag is stored when the winning game ball in the second variable winning device 32B passes through the V winning area 356 (see step S1205 in FIG. 23).

If the V winning flag is stored, the table switching process ends; if the V winning flag is not stored, in step S4103, the first side advantageous release flag or the first side advantageous opening flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is determined whether the 1st side disadvantageous release flag is stored. The first side advantageous release flag and the first side disadvantageous release flag are stored when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a special failure result (see steps S614 and S616 in FIG. 17). That is, step S4103 is for determining whether the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special winning result of the first special symbol.

In addition, if the game round of the second special figure is enabled (the game round of the first special figure is invalidated) and the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special winning result of the second special figure, the first special figure In the forced termination process (step S511) of the first game round control process (FIG. 16) that controls the game round of the special figure, the release flag of the first special figure is erased. Therefore, even if the first side advantageous release flag or the first side disadvantageous release flag is stored in the storage area 234 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol, at the time of determination in step S4103, those release flags are is not stored in the storage area 234. In other words, the affirmative determination in step S4103 is made only when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a special failure result and the game round of the first special symbol corresponding to the judgment of the symbol is validated.

If the first side advantageous release flag or the first side disadvantageous release flag is stored, it is determined in step S4104 whether the first flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first flag is stored based on the first condition being satisfied (see steps S3203 and S3204 in FIG. 62). That is, step S4104 is to determine whether the first condition is satisfied in the validity determination (gaming round) of the first special symbol that triggered the opening/closing execution mode.

If the first flag is stored, it means that the first condition is satisfied, and in this case, in step S4105, the first established flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. Further, in step S4105, processing for erasing the first flag stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In this way, by performing table switching setting processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the normal state 601 is maintained in the game round where the first condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the precursor state 602 from the next game round.

Next, in step S4106, the value of the game counter area CG1 for the first special symbol is set to 20. As already explained, the game time counter area CG1 is for counting the number of times the first special figure game time has been executed after transition to the precursor state 602.

In the following step S4107, a first established command is set. In this processing, processing is performed to output information that the precursor state 602 is started to the production control device 82. The first established command set in step S4107 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15).

On the other hand, if the first flag is not stored in step S4104, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the second flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The second flag is stored based on the second condition being satisfied (see steps S3205 and S3206 in FIG. 62). That is, step S4108 is to determine whether or not the second condition is satisfied in the validity determination (gaming round) of the first special symbol that triggered the opening/closing execution mode.

If the second flag is stored, it means that the second condition is satisfied, and in this case, the first establishment flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased in step S4109, and the RAM 204 is cleared in the subsequent step S4110. A second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234. Furthermore, in step S4110, if the second flag is stored in the RAM 204, processing for erasing it is also performed. In this way, by performing table switching setting processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the precursor state 602 is maintained in the game round where the second condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the advantageous state 603 from the next game round.

Next, in step S4111, the value of the game counter area CG2 for the second special symbol is set to 10. As already explained, the game times counter area CG2 is for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after shifting to the advantageous state 603.

In the following step S4112, a second established command is set. In this processing, processing is performed to output information that the advantageous state 603 is started to the production control device 82. The second established command set in step S4112 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15). After executing step S4112 or when a negative determination is made in step S4108, the table switching process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4103, that is, if the first side advantageous release flag or the first side disadvantageous release flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, the process from step S4104 onward is executed. The table switching process ends without any change. As already explained, if the game round of the first special figure is invalidated by the game round of the second special figure, a negative determination is made in step S4103, so the first condition is set at the start of fluctuation of the first special figure. Even if the second condition is satisfied, the transition to the precursor state 602 or the transition to the advantageous state 603 (table switching process) is not executed, and the establishment of each condition is canceled. Therefore, the presence or absence of transition to the precursor state 602 or the advantageous state 603 can be determined not only by selecting the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure or the second special figure, but also by determining whether the game ball enters the second operating port 34 or not. It can also be associated with the presence or absence of prizes, timing of prize winnings, etc. In other words, even if the lottery result based on the winning at the first operating port 33 corresponds to a state transition or table switching, the lottery result based on the winning at the second operating port 34 or the process performed based on the winning It can also be said that there are cases in which state transitions are permitted and cases in which they are restricted, making the transition conditions and switching conditions more complicated than a configuration in which state transitions are performed based only on lottery results. This will increase interest.

Further, in step S4101, if the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the RAM 204, it means that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot result. In this case, the process advances to step S4110, and the second establishment flag is stored in the RAM 204. As a result, the state shifts to the advantageous state 603 without passing through the precursor state 602.

<About the electrical configuration of the production control device 82>
Next, the configuration for performing various effects will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the production control device 82 will be explained below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 71.

An MPU 242 is mounted on the performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82. The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. It has a built-in RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and each may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . The main control device 81 sends commands related to the game times of the first special figure and the second special figure, such as a variable command, a type command, a forced termination command, a variable end command, etc. for the first special figure and the second special figure. Receive. Further, as commands related to the opening/closing execution mode, an opening command, an opening command, a closing command, an ending command, etc. are received. Furthermore, as commands related to the first condition and the second condition, the first establishment command (establishment information for the first condition), the second establishment command (establishment information for the second condition), and the first condition end command (cancellation for the first condition) information), table restoration command (cancellation information for second condition), etc.

A various table storage area 245 is set in the ROM 243 in which various tables used in executing various control processes received from the main control device 81 are stored. The RAM 244 also includes various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, a command storage area 248 for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 81, and a command storage area 248 for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 81. Various counter areas 249 are set for use in the process. Note that the command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands.

As shown in FIG. 71, the display control device 212 is connected to the output side of the MPU 242, as described above, the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 65 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected. ing.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device 212>
The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are respectively mounted. There is.

The MPU 252 receives commands for displaying various effects from the effect control device 82. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 255).

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 252, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 252 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

The VDP 255 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 256 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 257, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

<Special production processing>
Next, the special performance processing executed on the performance control device 82 side will be explained. In the special effect processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that a special effect display is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when each of the first and second conditions is satisfied. Here, before explaining the special effect processing, the contents of the special effect display will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

The special effect display includes a special effect display A shown in FIG. 72(b) and a special effect display B shown in FIG. 72(c). Note that FIG. 72(a) shows a normal effect display, and the normal effect display is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 6.

The special performance display A indicates to the player that the first condition has been satisfied and the state has shifted to the precursor state 602, that is, the state is likely to shift to the advantageous state 603. As the special effect display A, for example, at the upper and lower parts of the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a character display 611 such as a caption displaying the words "Chance Mode in progress" may be performed, or the background color of the display screen G may be changed to the normal color. A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color different from the effect display (FIG. 72(a)) can be considered. Furthermore, in the special display effect A, since the precursor state 602 is in a state where the number of times has been cut off, a remaining number of times display 612 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the precursor state 602 ends is also displayed at the corner of the display screen G.

The special display performance B indicates to the player that the second condition has been satisfied, that is, that the precursor state 602 has shifted to the advantageous state 603. As the special effect display B, for example, in place of the character display 611 of the special effect display A, a character display 613 such as a caption displaying the words "in extreme heat mode" may be performed, or the background color on the display screen G may be changed to a normal effect. A configuration may be considered in which the color is changed to a dedicated color different from both the display and the special display effect A. Furthermore, in the special display performance B, since the advantageous state 603 is in a state where the number of times has been cut off, a remaining number of times display 614 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the advantageous state 603 ends is also displayed at the upper left of the display screen G.

<Special performance start process>
Next, the special performance processing executed by the MPU 242 of the performance control device 82 will be explained. First, the special effect start process for starting the special effect display will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 73. Note that the special performance start process is activated at predetermined intervals (2 msec).

In the special effect start process, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a command for variation of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the command for variation of the first special figure has not been received, the process for starting the special effect is ended.

On the other hand, if the command for variation of the first special figure has been received, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the first establishment command from the main controller 81 has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the first established command is stored in the command storage area 248 of the RAM 244.

Note that the command for variation of the first special figure is sent when the variation of the first special figure starts, while the first establishment command is sent when the opening/closing execution mode ends (see Figures 60, 70, and 15). , the first established command to be determined in step S4202 is the one transmitted in the opening/closing execution mode that was executed immediately before the game round in which the variation command in step S1101 was transmitted.

If the first establishment command has been received in step S4202, it means that the state will move to the precursor state 602. In this case, in step S4203, a first special performance start process is executed to display special performance display A (FIG. 72(b)) on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and then the special performance starts. end the process.

In the first special effect start process in step S4203, a command including information on the content of the special effect display A is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special effect display A from the character ROM 256 and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

As a result, the special effect display A is displayed in synchronization with the start of the variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G (see FIG. 6). Note that the special effect display A does not necessarily need to be displayed at the fluctuation start timing, and may be displayed at a timing before the fluctuation start or after the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, if the first established command has not been received in step S4202, it is determined in step S4204 whether or not the second established command has been received from the main controller 81. If the second establishment command is received in step S4204, it means that the state shifts to the advantageous state 603. In this case, in step S4205, a second special effect start process is executed to display special effect display B (FIG. 72(c)) on the display screen G, and then the special effect start process is ended. .

In the second special effect start process of step S4205, a command including information on the content of the special effect display B is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special effect display B from the character ROM 256 and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

As a result, the special effect display B is displayed in synchronization with the start of the variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Note that the special effect display B does not necessarily need to be displayed at the timing of the start of the fluctuation, and may be displayed at a timing before the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed after the start of the fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the second establishment command is not received in step S4204, that is, if neither the first nor the second establishment command is received, special effect display A is displayed on the display screen G in step S4206. Execute display lottery processing for display. This display lottery process is performed using a display lottery determination table stored in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 and a display lottery random number counter stored in the various counter area 249 of the RAM 244. Note that the random number counter for the display lottery is updated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec), and the winning probability for the display lottery is set to, for example, 1/100.

In the following step S4207, it is determined whether or not the display lottery has been won based on the lottery result in step S4206. If the display lottery has been won, the process advances to step S4208, and a third special effect start process for displaying special effect display A on the display screen G is executed. The process in step S4208 is similar to step S4203, and as a result, the special display effect A is displayed on the display screen G even when the first condition is not satisfied.

As a result, it is no longer possible to uniquely determine whether the first condition is satisfied based on the execution of the special effect display A, and it is inferred whether the first condition is satisfied as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 when the special effect display A is displayed. It is possible to add fun and the thrill of playing the game without knowing whether the first condition is met.

In particular, in this embodiment, the determination of whether the first condition is satisfied is performed based on a conditional random number counter CC that is different from the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first special symbol display section AS of the main display section 37 stops displaying. It is not possible to grasp whether the first condition is met from the pattern (the stop result corresponding to the fact that the validity determination result of the first special symbol is a disadvantageous special failure result, which is set in step S616 in FIG. 61). In other words, it is impossible to specify whether the first condition is satisfied, and it is possible to effectively increase the fun of guessing whether the first condition is satisfied or the thrill of not being able to clearly see whether the first condition is satisfied. .

Note that it is also possible to determine whether the first condition is met based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In this configuration, the first special symbol display section AS of the main display section 37 is displayed depending on whether the jackpot random number counter C1 has a value that corresponds to the establishment of the first condition or a value that does not correspond to the establishment of the first condition. It is preferable that the pictures that are stopped and displayed are the same picture. As a result, it is no longer possible to determine whether the first condition is satisfied based on the type of picture that is stopped and displayed, and it becomes possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

After executing the process in step S4208, in step S4209, 20 is set in the game counter area SCG1 provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. The game counter area SCG1 is for counting the number of games of the first special symbol on the production control device 82 side. By executing the process of step S4209, the display period of the special effect display A is set to the period in which the game round of the first special symbol is played 20 times. The reason why the special effect display A is terminated in response to the number of executions of the first special figure game round reaching 20 is to correspond to the state in which the first condition is satisfied (transition period of the precursor state 602). . Note that the display period of the special effect display A does not necessarily have to be the same as the period in which the first condition is satisfied, and may be shorter or longer than the period in which the first condition is satisfied. After executing step S4208 or when a negative determination is made in step S4207, the special effect start process is ended.

<Special performance end process>
Next, the special performance termination process for terminating the special performance process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 74. Note that the special performance termination process is also activated at predetermined intervals (2 msec).

In the special effect start process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not a first special symbol variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the variation end command for the first special figure has not been received, the special effect end process is ended.

On the other hand, if the first special figure variation end command has been received, in step S4302, the first special effect is being executed, that is, the special effect display A based on the establishment of the first condition is being displayed. Determine whether or not. If the first special effect is being executed, it is determined in step S4303 whether a first condition end command from the main control device 81 has been received. The first end condition command is a command that indicates the end of the state in which the first condition is satisfied (the precursor state 602).

If the first end condition command has been received, that is, if the state in which the first condition is satisfied has ended, in step S4304, a first special effect end process is performed to end the display of the special effect display A. . After executing step S4304 or if the first end condition command is not received in step S4303, the special effect end process is ended. Note that the display period of the special effect display A does not necessarily have to be the same as the period in which the first condition is satisfied, and may be shorter or longer than the period in which the first condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the first special effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S4305 to determine whether the second special effect is being executed, that is, the special effect display B based on the establishment of the second condition is being displayed. Determine whether If the second special effect is being executed, it is determined in step S4306 whether a table return command from the main controller 81 has been received. The table return command is a command that indicates the end of the state in which the second condition is satisfied (advantageous state 603).

If the table return command has been received, that is, if the state where the second condition is satisfied ends, in step S4307, a second special effect end process is performed to end the display of the special effect display B. Note that the display period of the special effect display B does not necessarily have to be the same as the transition period of the advantageous state 603, and may be shorter or longer than the transition period. After executing step S4307 or if the second end condition command has not been received, the special performance end process is ended.

Further, if the second special effect is not being executed in step S4305, it is determined whether the third special effect is being executed, that is, whether the special effect display A is being displayed in a situation where the first condition is not satisfied. judge. If the third special performance is being executed, the value of the game counter area SCG1 is decremented by 1 in step S4309, and then it is determined whether the value of the game counter area SCG1 is 0 in step S4310. do. If the value of the game counter area SCG1 is 0, in step S4311, a first special performance end process is performed to end the display of the special performance display A. After executing step S4311, if a negative determination is made in steps S4308 and S4310, the special performance end process is ended.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

The configuration is such that when the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the number of transition routes is increased and the transition to the advantageous state 603 becomes easier.

For example, if the difficulty of transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is made uniform, if a state in which it is not possible to transition to the advantageous state 603 continues, it will gradually become difficult to have a sense of expectation corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state 603, and the game will become more difficult. This may lead to a decrease in motivation. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the difficulty of transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is eased when the first condition is met, so even if a situation occurs where the transition to the advantageous state 603 continues, the feeling of anticipation is reduced. This can stimulate the player's desire to play, making it possible to sustain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add an element of interest that makes it easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 depending on the gaming situation, thereby improving the level of interest.

After the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, when the second condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous state 603.

In conventional pachinko machines, it is determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high probability state where the result of a win/fail lottery is more likely to result in a winning result) based on a single win entered into the actuation port. It is assumed that the player can only enjoy the above-mentioned winnings in terms of whether or not to shift to an advantageous gaming state. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made by satisfying the first and second conditions in stages, so even if the first condition is satisfied for one winning, If the second condition is not satisfied in subsequent winnings, the second gaming state will not be entered. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy seeing whether or not the game will transition to the advantageous state 603 over a plurality of game rounds, thereby improving the level of interest.

After the first condition is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made based on the second condition being satisfied before the number of times the game of the first special symbol is played reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and further, If the number of times the game of the first special symbol is executed reaches a predetermined number while the second condition is not satisfied, the first condition is canceled.

If the configuration is such that the second condition is allowed to be satisfied indefinitely after the first condition is satisfied, the game will have to be continued after the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. For example, it becomes possible to suitably avoid this problem and improve playability. In addition, by configuring the configuration to cancel the fulfillment of the first condition, it becomes possible to play the game with a certain sense of tension after the first condition is satisfied, and the level of interest is improved.

The special display performance A is displayed when the first condition is satisfied, and the special display performance A is displayed by lottery even when the first condition is not satisfied.

Although it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a possibility that the first condition has been met, the configuration can be such that the fulfillment of the first condition cannot be uniquely determined from the special display effect A. This makes it possible to provide the fun of guessing whether the first condition is met or not, and the thrill of playing the game even though it is unclear whether the first condition is met.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the switching conditions for switching the variable display time table from the normal table to the special table are different from those in the sixth embodiment. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. Note that the same components as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the conditional random number counter CC of the sixth embodiment is not provided, and based on the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1, the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure is changed from the normal table to the special figure. The configuration is such that it can be switched to a table. Specifically, the variable display time table is switched based on the type of special outlier result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of unfavorable special winning results are set in the win/fail table for the first special symbol. Note that the entries in the "probability" column in FIG. 75 are added for convenience and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the win/fail table for the first special symbol, six types of disadvantageous special losing results consisting of disadvantageous special losing results A to F are set as the types of disadvantageous special losing results. These unfavorable special failure results A to F are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1. In the validity judgment for the first special symbol, the probability of an unfavorable special out result A and the probability of an unfavorable special out result B are both set to 1/40, and the probability of an unfavorable special out result C is set to 1/40. It is set to 30. Furthermore, the probability of getting an unfavorable special out result D is set to 1/10, the probability of getting an unfavorable special out result E is set to 475/600, and the probability of getting an unfavorable special out result F is 1/50. is set to . In other words, in the case of an unfavorable special failure result in the judgment for the first special symbol, most of the times the result is an unfavorable special failure result E, and occasionally other disadvantageous special failure results A to D, F are configured. There is. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the disadvantageous special losing results A to F described above are merely examples, and are not limited to the above.

By the way, if the result is an unfavorable special failure result in the judgment of the first special symbol, regardless of the type of unfavorable special failure result A to F, the driving mode of the second variable prize winning device 32B and the shutter 358 will be changed. are set to be the same. That is, the ease with which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B and the ease with which the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 are common to the unfavorable special winning results A to F. Specifically, in any of the unfavorable special losing results A to F, the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 are configured in such a manner that passing through the V winning area 356 in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment is unlikely to occur. Drive controlled.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. 76 and 77 are state transition diagrams showing the transition of the internal state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the normal state 601, the normal table (FIG. 58(a)) is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is determined that the first condition A is met and the first condition B is met.

The first condition A is that the determination of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type thereof is an unfavorable special failure result A. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above. On the other hand, the first condition B is that the determination of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type thereof is an unfavorable special failure result B. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

When the first condition A or the first condition B is satisfied in the normal state 601, the state shifts to the precursor state 602. Note that in the following, in order to distinguish between the precursor state 602 to which the first condition A was satisfied and the precursor state 602 to which the first condition B was established, the former will be referred to as the first precursor state 602a, and the latter will be referred to as the first precursor state 602a. This is called a second precursor state 602b.

In the first precursor state 602a, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is determined that the second condition A is satisfied, and in the second precursor state 602b, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, the second condition A is determined to be met. 2. It is determined whether condition B is met.

The second condition A is that in the first sign state 602a, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type thereof is an unfavorable special failure result C. This probability is set to 1/30 as described above. On the other hand, the second condition B is that in the second precursor state 602b, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type thereof is an unfavorable special failure result D. This probability is set to 1/10, which is higher than the second condition A. Incidentally, in the normal state 601, even if the judgment result of the first special symbol is a disadvantageous special failure result C, the second condition A is not satisfied. Similarly, in the normal state 601, even if the judgment result of the first special symbol is a disadvantageous special failure result D, the second condition B is not satisfied.

In the first omen state 602a and the second omen state 602b, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. That is, upon transition from the normal state 601 to the first precursor state 602a or the second precursor state 602b, there is no switching of the variable display time table, and the selected state of the normal table is maintained as it is. Therefore, in this embodiment, the normal state 601, the first precursor state 602a, and the second precursor state 602b correspond to the "first game state".

When the second condition A or the second condition B is satisfied in the precursor state 602a or 602b, the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure is switched, and the special table (FIG. 58(b) )) is selected. In this embodiment, the advantageous state 603 corresponds to the "second gaming state".

In this way, in this embodiment, it is more advantageous to go through the second precursor state 602b based on the establishment of the first condition B than to go through the first precursor state 602a based on the establishment of the first condition A. The configuration is designed to be easy to migrate to.

Therefore, for the player, the second precursor state 602b is more pleasing than the first precursor state 602a, and the player plays the game with priority given to the transition to the second precursor state 602b. However, since two routes to transition to the advantageous state 603 are set: a first route via the first precursor state 602a and a second route via the second precursor state 602b, it is assumed that the first condition Even if the player misses the fulfillment of condition B, he or she can play the game with the expectation that the first condition A will be satisfied.

By the way, even if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol in the first precursor state 602a becomes a disadvantageous special failure result D, it does not shift to the advantageous state 603, and in the second precursor state 602b, the result of the determination of the character of the first special symbol is Even if the disadvantageous special failure result C occurs, the transition to the advantageous state 603 does not occur. In addition, in the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, the opening/closing operation is performed in the same way as in the sixth embodiment. The gaming state after the mode ends is set to an advantageous state 603.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, after transition to the precursor state 602, mutual transition is possible between the first precursor state 602a and the second precursor state 602b.

Specifically, the configuration is such that when the promotion condition is satisfied in the first precursor state 602a, the first precursor state 602a shifts to the second precursor state 602b. The promotion condition is that in the first sign state 602a, the judgment of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type thereof becomes unfavorable special failure result B. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

In this way, by being able to promote from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b, it is possible to aim for the fulfillment of the promotion condition even if the second condition A fails to be satisfied. That is, in addition to the fun of satisfying the second condition A, it is possible to provide the fun of satisfying the promotion condition.

Furthermore, when the demotion condition is satisfied in the second precursor state 602b, the second precursor state 602b is configured to transition to the first precursor state 602a. The demotion condition is that in the second precursor state 602b, the judgment of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type thereof becomes an unfavorable special failure result A. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

In this way, since it is possible to demote from the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a, there is no sense of relief even if the transition to the second precursor state 602b occurs, and the transition to the first precursor state 602a is possible. It becomes possible to play the game with a sense of danger of being demoted. That is, in addition to the fun of satisfying the second condition B, it is possible to provide the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the demotion condition.

Note that in this embodiment, the promotion condition is the same as the first condition B, but the promotion condition may be different from the first condition B, and the content of the promotion condition is not limited to the above. . Further, although the demotion condition is the same as the first condition A, the demotion condition may be different from the first condition A, and the contents of the demotion condition are not limited to the above.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after transition to the precursor state 602, the precursor state 602 is terminated based on the falling condition (termination condition) being satisfied. Specifically, in the precursor state 602, if the judgment of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, and the type becomes unfavorable special failure result F, the state in which the first conditions A and B are met is canceled, and the normal state The process moves to 601. This probability is set to 1/50 as described above.

Therefore, if the player can satisfy the second condition after transitioning to the precursor state 602 and before the falling condition is satisfied (the second condition A in the case of the first precursor state 602a, and the second condition A in the case of the second precursor state 602b), According to the second condition B), the gaming state can be stepped up from the precursor state 602 to the advantageous state 603. Conversely, if the falling condition is satisfied before the second condition is satisfied, the state returns to the normal state 601.

Note that the probability that the second condition will be met is 1/30 or 1/10, while the probability that the falling condition will be met is 1/50. Therefore, if the transition to the precursor state 602 occurs, the probability of the fulfillment of the falling condition is 1/50. It is easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 than to go backwards.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the following description, parts different from the above-mentioned sixth embodiment will be mainly explained.

<Condition establishment determination process>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the condition satisfaction determination process of this embodiment.

The condition satisfaction determination process of this embodiment is executed in step S3101 of the first fluctuation start process in FIG. 61 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, in the condition satisfaction determination process of this embodiment, first in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The second fulfillment flag indicates that the second condition A or the second condition B has been satisfied, in other words, the gaming state has shifted to the advantageous state 603. This second establishment flag is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a special winning result) that is executed after the end of the game round of the first special symbol in which the second condition A or the second condition B is satisfied. Set.

If the second establishment flag is not stored, that is, if the gaming state is the normal state 601, the first precursor state 602a, or the second precursor state 602b, in step S4402, the flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is determined whether the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored. The first fulfillment flag A indicates that the first condition A has been satisfied, in other words, that the state has moved to the first precursor state 602a. On the other hand, the first fulfillment flag B indicates that the first condition B has been satisfied, in other words, that the state has moved to the second precursor state 602b. These first establishment flags A and B are used for the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a special winning result) that is executed after the end of the game round of the first special symbol in which the first condition A or the first condition B is satisfied. Set at the time of termination.

When neither the first establishment flag A nor the first establishment flag B is stored, that is, when the gaming state is the normal state 601, in step S4403, the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is unfavorable. It is determined whether the losing result A is a winning result, that is, whether the first condition A is satisfied. If the first condition A is satisfied, in step S4404, a first flag A indicating that the first condition A is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

After executing step S4404 or if a negative determination is made in step S4403 (if the first condition A is not satisfied), in step S4405, the result of the determination of the first special symbol is that the winning result is disadvantageous special winning result B. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the first condition B is satisfied. If the first condition B is satisfied, in step S4406, a first flag B indicating that the first condition B is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. After executing step S4406 or when a negative determination is made in step S4405 (if the first condition B is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determining process is ended.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored in step S4402, that is, if the gaming state is either the first or second precursor state 602a or 602b, the process proceeds to step S4407. Then, it is determined whether the first establishment flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the first establishment flag A is stored, that is, if the gaming state is the first precursor state 602a, in step S4408, the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is the disadvantageous special winning result C. In other words, it is determined whether the second condition A is satisfied. If the second condition A is satisfied, a second flag indicating that the second condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4409.

After executing step S4409 or if a negative determination is made in step S4408 (if the second condition B is not satisfied), in step S4410, the result of the determination of the first special symbol is that the winning result is unfavorable special winning result B. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the promotion conditions are satisfied. If the promotion conditions are met, the first flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4411. After executing step S4411 or when a negative determination is made in step S4410 (when the promotion condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag A is not stored in step S4407, it means that the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, that is, the first establishment flag B is 2 premonitory state 602b). In this case, in step S4412, it is determined whether the result of the determination of the first special symbol is that the disadvantageous special winning result D is the winning result, that is, whether the second condition B is satisfied. If the second condition B is satisfied, in step S4413, a second flag indicating that the second condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. Note that the second flag in this step is the same as the second flag in step S4409.

After executing step S4413 or if a negative determination is made in step S4412 (if the second condition B is not satisfied), in step S4414, the result of the determination of the first special symbol is that the winning result is disadvantageous special winning result A. In other words, it is determined whether the demotion conditions are satisfied. If the demotion condition is satisfied, the first flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4415. After executing step S4415 or when a negative determination is made in step S4414 (when the demotion condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, that is, if the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 204, the condition establishment determination process is ended without executing the processes after step S4402. . In other words, when the gaming state is the advantageous state 603, the configuration is such that the process for determining whether the first condition A, the first condition B, the second condition A, the second condition B, the promotion condition, and the demotion condition are satisfied is not executed. . As a result, the first condition A or B is satisfied during the transition to the advantageous state 603 and the transition to the precursor state 602 occurs, or the second condition A or B is satisfied during the transition to the advantageous state 603 and the specified number of times is 10. Inconveniences such as being reconfigured are avoided.

<Process for canceling conditions>
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the condition cancellation process of this embodiment.

The condition cancellation process of this embodiment is a process for returning to the normal state 601 when the end condition is satisfied in the first precursor state 602a or the second precursor state 602b. This process is executed in step S3002 of the first game round control process in FIG. 60 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the condition cancellation process of this embodiment, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. judge. When neither the first fulfillment flag A nor the first establishment flag B is stored, that is, when the first condition is not satisfied and the precursor state 602 is not established, the condition cancellation process ends.

On the other hand, if either the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored, in step S4502, the result of the determination of the validity of the first special symbol is the unfavorable special winning result F. In other words, it is determined whether the fall condition (termination condition) is satisfied. If the falling condition is satisfied, in step S4503, processing is executed to erase the first establishment flags A and B stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. In the following step S4504, the first condition end command is set as a transmission target to the production control device 82. After executing step S4504 or when a negative determination is made in step S4502, the condition cancellation process is ended.

<Table switching process>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the table switching process of this embodiment.

The table switching process of this embodiment is based on the satisfaction of the first conditions A and B, the promotion condition, the demotion condition, and the second conditions A and B. This is for transitioning the state between the 2 precursor state 602b and the advantageous state 603. This process is executed in step S3901 of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 69 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the table switching process of this embodiment, first in step S4601, it is determined whether the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. . The first winning flag is stored when the judgment result of the first special drawing is a jackpot result (see step S604 in FIG. 61), and the second winning flag is stored when the judgment result of the second special drawing is a jackpot result. This is stored when is a jackpot result (see step S904 in FIG. 66).

If neither the first winning flag nor the second winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The V winning flag is stored when the winning game ball in the second variable winning device 32B passes through the V winning area 356 (see step S1205 in FIG. 23).

If the V winning flag is stored, the table switching process ends; if the V winning flag is not stored, in step S4603, the first side disadvantageous release flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the unfavorable special winning result of the first special symbol.

In addition, if the game round of the second special figure is enabled (the game round of the first special figure is invalidated) and the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special winning result of the second special figure, the first special figure In the forced termination process (step S511) of the first game round control process (FIG. 16) that controls the game round of the special figure, the release flag of the first special figure is erased. Therefore, even if the first side unfavorable release flag is stored in the storage area 234 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the first side unfavorable release flag is stored in the storage area 234 at the time of determination in step S4603. It becomes a state where it is not stored in . In other words, the affirmative determination in step S4603 is made only when the validity determination result of the first special symbol is a disadvantageous special failure result and the game round of the first special symbol corresponding to the validity determination is validated. .

If the first side disadvantageous release flag is stored, it is determined in step S4604 whether the first flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first flag A indicates that the first condition A or the demotion condition is satisfied.

If the first flag A is stored, the first establishment flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4605. Furthermore, in step S4605, processing for erasing the first flag A stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the following step S4606, it is determined whether the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the first establishment flag B is stored, in step S4607, in order to demote the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a (to avoid duplication of the first establishment flags A and B), the first Execute processing to erase establishment flag B.

After executing step S4607 or when a negative determination is made in step S4606, in step S4608, the first established command A is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82, and then the table switching process is ended.

The first established command A set in step S4608 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the special effect display A1 shown in FIG. 81(b) to the display control device 212. As a result, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special performance display A1 is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round to be played after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the special effect display A1 is similar to the special effect display A (FIG. 72(b)) in the sixth embodiment.

On the other hand, if the first flag A is not stored in step S4604, it is determined whether the first flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first flag B indicates that the first condition B or the promotion condition is satisfied.

If the first flag B is stored, the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4610. Further, in step S4610, processing for erasing the first flag B stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the following step S4611, it is determined whether the first establishment flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the first establishment flag A is stored, in step S4612, in order to promote the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b (to avoid duplication of the first establishment flags A and B), the first Execute processing to erase establishment flag A.

After execution of step S4612 or when a negative determination is made in step S4611, the first established command B is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S4613.

Upon receiving the first establishment command B, the effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the special effect display A2 shown in FIG. 81(c) to the display control device 212. The special effect display A2 suggests to the player that the state is easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 than the first precursor state 602a (chance mode). As the special effect display A2, for example, at the upper and lower parts of the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a character display 621 such as a caption displaying the words "Big chance mode in progress" may be performed, or the background color of the display screen G may be changed. A configuration such as changing to a special color different from the normal effect display (FIG. 81(a)), special effect display A1 (FIG. 81(b)), and special effect display B (FIG. 81(d)) can be considered.

By executing the process of step S4613, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special performance display A2 is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round to be played after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the special effect display A2 does not necessarily have to be displayed at the fluctuation start timing, and may be displayed at a timing before the fluctuation start or after the fluctuation start. After executing step S4613, the table switching process ends.

On the other hand, if the first flag B is not stored in step S4609, it is determined in step S4614 whether the second flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The second flag indicates that the second condition A or the second condition B is satisfied.

If the second flag is stored, the first establishment flags A and B stored in the RAM 204 are erased in step S4615. In the following step S4616, the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. Furthermore, in step S4616, if the second flag is stored in the RAM 204, processing to erase it is also performed.

Next, in step S4617, the value of the game counter area CG2 for the second special symbol is set to 10. The game counter area CG2 is for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after the transition to the advantageous state 603. In the following step S4618, the second established command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82. As a result, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display B shown in FIG. 81(d) is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round to be played after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the special effect display B is similar to the special effect display B (FIG. 72(c)) in the sixth embodiment. After executing step S4618 or if a negative determination is made in step S4614, the table switching process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4603, that is, if the first side disadvantageous release flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, the table switching process is performed without executing the processes from step S4604 onward. end. As already explained, if the game cycle of the first special figure is invalidated by the game cycle of the second special figure, a negative determination is made in step S4603, so the lifting conditions and the like are changed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special figure. Even if the demotion conditions are met, table switching processing is not executed and promotion etc. are invalidated. For this reason, the presence or absence of promotion, etc. is associated not only with the selection of the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure and the second special figure, but also with the presence or absence of winning of the game ball in the second operating port 34, the timing of winning, etc. This makes it possible to complicate the execution conditions for promotions, etc., compared to a configuration in which promotions, etc. are performed based only on lottery results. In other words, even if the lottery result based on winning the first operating port 33 is a result corresponding to a promotion, etc., the promotion, etc. will be determined based on the winning entering the second operating port 34 or the process performed based on the winning. It is also possible to have cases in which it is permitted and cases in which it is restricted, and in particular, in a configuration that includes a demotion function, it becomes possible to provide a gameplay feature that allows demotion conditions to be invalidated after they have been established. .

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

When a predetermined change condition (such as winning an unfavorable outcome B in the first precursor state 602a) is satisfied, the conditions for transition to the advantageous state 603 are changed (such as changing from the second condition A to the second condition B). It was configured to do this.

For example, if the conditions for transition to the advantageous state 603 are fixed, there is a concern that the transition route will be unified and the game will become monotonous. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the transition condition can be changed when the change condition is satisfied, the transition route to the advantageous state 603 can be diversified, and the monotony of the game can be prevented. suppressed.

By making the second condition A and the second condition B different in the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied changes as the transition condition to the advantageous state 603 is changed.

In this case, the degree of difficulty in establishing the transition condition can be changed depending on whether the change condition is satisfied, and the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be adjusted. This makes it easier to create fluctuations in the anticipation of the transition to the advantageous state 603, which improves the level of interest, compared to the gameplay that is only concerned with whether or not the gaming state will transition to the advantageous state 603.

The change condition for changing the transition condition and the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied is configured to be established while the player is playing a pachinko machine 10.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the transition conditions and the ease with which the transition conditions are satisfied during the game. In this case, the player has a strong interest in whether the transition to the advantageous state 603 can be made, and the transition conditions and the ease with which the transition conditions are met will be changed. In other words, while aiming to move to the advantageous state 603, it is possible to change the items to be achieved and the difficulty level of the achievement, thereby making it possible to diversify the gameplay.

Based on the fulfillment of the promotion conditions, the transition conditions to the advantageous state 603 are changed from the second condition A (probability of fulfillment 1/30), which is difficult to satisfy, to the second condition B, which is difficult to satisfy (probability 1/10). ). Furthermore, the configuration is such that the transition condition to the advantageous state 603 is changed from the second condition B to the second condition A based on the demotion condition being satisfied.

According to the above configuration, when the promotion condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to change the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 to one that makes it easier to shift to the advantageous state 603. Therefore, in addition to the fun of meeting the transition conditions, it is possible to add the fun of meeting the promotion conditions, improving the level of interest. Furthermore, the presence of the demotion condition can provide the player with the fun of avoiding the fulfillment of the demotion condition.

The configuration is such that the first and second conditions are satisfied based on the validity determination result of the first special figure. Specifically, the configuration is such that each of the first and second conditions is satisfied when the validity determination result of the first special drawing is a disadvantageous special failure result and the type is a predetermined specific type. did.

Since the game round of the first special figure mainly functions to cancel (invalidate) the game round of the second special figure in the normal state 601, it is easy for players to have a negative impression of the first special figure. However, with the above configuration, the result of the determination of the validity of the first special symbol leads to a transition to the advantageous state 603, which can contribute to eradicating the negative image described above.

Note that in this embodiment, the configuration includes both promotion from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b and demotion from the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a; It is good also as a structure provided with only.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in the configuration for terminating the advantageous state 603. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 87. Note that the same components as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the advantageous state 603 is terminated based on the number of times the game of the second special figure is executed reaches the upper limit, and the number of times of the game up to the upper limit is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The configuration is such that the remaining number of times can be changed.

First, the validity table for the first special symbol of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 82.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the win/fail table for the first special symbol, two types of disadvantageous special losing results, consisting of disadvantageous special losing results A and B, are set as the types of disadvantageous special losing results. These unfavorable special losing results A and B are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1. Specifically, 15 values from 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 of the jackpot random number counter CA1 are assigned to the unfavorable special outlier result A, and 17 to 17 of the jackpot random number counter CA1 are assigned to the unfavorable special outlier result B. 581 values up to 572 are assigned.

Therefore, the probability that the result will be a disadvantageous special failure result A is 1/40, and the probability that the disadvantageous special failure result B will be a failure result B is 572/600. That is, in the case of a disadvantageous special failure result in the judgment for the first special symbol, the majority of the cases are disadvantageous special failure results B, and occasionally the disadvantageous special failure results A are configured. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the above-mentioned unfavorable special losing results A and B are merely examples, and are not limited to the above.

By the way, if the result is a disadvantageous special failure result in the judgment of the first special symbol, regardless of whether the type is disadvantageous special failure result A or B, the driving mode of the second variable prize winning device 32B and the shutter 358 will be changed. are set to be the same. That is, the ease with which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B and the ease with which the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 are common to disadvantageous special winning results A and B. Specifically, in both disadvantageous special winning results A and B, the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 are configured in such a manner that passing through the V winning area 356 in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment is unlikely to occur. Drive controlled.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the internal state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the normal state 601, the normal table (FIG. 58(a)) is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the result of the win/fail determination corresponding to the win becomes a special lose result, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied.

When the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the state shifts to the precursor state 602. In the precursor state 602, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the result of the win/fail determination corresponding to the win becomes a special lose result, it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied in the precursor state 602, the variable display time table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is switched, and the state shifts to an advantageous state 603 in which the special table (FIG. 58(b)) is selected. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602 correspond to the "first gaming state", and the advantageous state 603 corresponds to the "second gaming state".

The advantageous state 603 is a game state where the number of times is cut off, and is configured to end when the number of times the game of the second special symbol is executed from the start reaches a specified number (upper limit number). The specified number of times at the time of transition to the advantageous state 603, that is, the initial specified number of times, is set to 5 times.

In this embodiment, as explained in the first embodiment, the first length variation (30 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the first special symbol, and the second length variation (30 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the second special symbol. When the variation (20 seconds) is selected, and when the first long variation (30 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second short variation (5 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the second special symbol. and a case where the first short variation (10 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the first special figure and the second short variation (5 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the second special figure. Then, a specific state occurs in which the variable display time for the second special symbol passes earlier than the variable display time for the first special symbol from the start of each game round of the first and second special symbols, The winning/failing lottery result on the second special drawing side is validated. Since most of the special losing results of the second special drawing are considered to be advantageous special losing results (see Figure 9(b)), if the winning/failure lottery results on the second special drawing side are validated, it will almost certainly be You will be able to win the V jackpot.

In the advantageous state 603, the above three patterns are more likely to be established in the selection of the variable display time of the first and second special symbols than in the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602, and the winning/failure lottery result on the second special symbol side is more likely to be validated. It has become. Then, in the advantageous state 603, the probability that the win/fail lottery result on the second special figure side will be validated, that is, the probability that the selection mode of the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure will be one of the above three patterns. is approximately 1/10. In other words, in the advantageous state 603, the game is such that you can win about 1/10 within the restriction that the prescribed number of times is 5 times.

Under such gameplay, this embodiment is configured to perform an additional lottery in an advantageous state 603 to determine whether or not to add a prescribed number of times, as shown in FIG. 83. Specifically, it is determined whether the add-on condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball enters the first operating port 33. The additional condition is that in the advantageous state 603, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special out result, and the type thereof becomes an unfavorable special out result A. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

Then, when the addition condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of times (5 times) is added to the specified number of times (remaining number of times until the upper limit). In other words, by winning the additional lottery, the prescribed number of times increases, and the transition period (gaming period) of the advantageous state 603 is extended.

With this configuration, the player can expect that when the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state 603, the winning lottery result on the second special drawing side will be valid (substantially it will be a V jackpot). While receiving the 1/10 lottery, it becomes possible to receive the 1/40 lottery with an additional specified number of times. Therefore, even if the player loses the lottery by about 1/10, by winning the additional lottery by 1/40, the chance of winning the V jackpot before the advantageous state 603 ends can be greatly improved.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the following description, parts different from the above-mentioned sixth embodiment will be mainly explained.

<Additional determination processing>
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the addition determination process of this embodiment.

The addition determination process of this embodiment is executed in step S5001 of the first fluctuation start process in FIG. 84. Note that the first variation start process in FIG. 84 is similar to the first variation start process in FIG. 61 in the sixth embodiment, except that it includes the process in step S5001.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the addition determination process, first in step S5101, it is determined whether the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The second fulfillment flag indicates that the second condition has been satisfied, in other words, the gaming state has shifted to the advantageous state 603.

If the second establishment flag is stored, that is, if the gaming state is in the advantageous state 603, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the add-on condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is an unfavorable special failure result A or not.

If the addition condition is satisfied, the addition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S5103. The add-on flag indicates that the add-on condition is satisfied. After executing step S5103, or when a negative determination is made in steps S5101 and S5102, the additional determination process ends.

<Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends>
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends in this embodiment.

In the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of this embodiment, first, in step S3901, table switching processing is executed. This process is similar to the table switching process shown in FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. However, in the process of step S4111, the value of the game counter area CG2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is set to 5. The game counter area CG2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after the advantageous state 603 is started, and is a counter area for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after the advantageous state 603 is started. will be cremented. Note that the table return process in FIG. 68 is executed at the end of the game round of the second special figure (see step S3502 in FIG. 65), and the game round counter area CG2 is executed at the end of the game round of the second special figure. is decremented each time it is executed.

After executing step S3901, it is determined in step S5101 whether an additional flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the add-on flag is stored, in step S5102, 5 is added to the value of the game counter area CG2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. As a result, the remaining number of games in the advantageous state 603 is increased by five times. In the subsequent step S5103, the additional command is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82. The additional command set in step S5103 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Upon receiving the add-on command, the effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the add-on effect display shown in FIG. 87 to the display control device 212. The additional performance display informs or suggests to the player that the number of remaining games in the advantageous state 603 has increased. As an additional effect display, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), in the center of the display screen G where the special effect display B (see FIG. 72(c)) is displayed, "+5 times!!" After displaying characters 631 such as , etc., as shown in FIG. 87(b), a remaining number of games display 632 displayed at the corner of the display screen G is displayed indicating the remaining number of games after addition (after addition). Possible configurations include changing the configuration to

By executing the process of step S5103, the symbols are displayed so that the additional effect display is displayed on the display screen G from the end of the opening/closing execution mode or from the next game round to be played after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Device 41 is controlled. Note that the additional effect display does not necessarily have to be displayed at the start timing of the fluctuation, and may be displayed at a timing before the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed after the start of the fluctuation. After executing step S5103 or when a negative determination is made in step S5101, the process from step S1201 onwards is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

The configuration is such that the remaining number of times in the advantageous state 603 is increased based on the addition condition being satisfied in the advantageous state 603.

For example, in a configuration where the number of times the game is played in an advantageous state is fixed, when the remaining number of times in the advantageous state decreases, it becomes difficult to expect a bonus (V jackpot in this embodiment). There is a concern that the more the players become, the more their desire to play will decline. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times during the advantageous state 603 can increase, so that the player can continue to have expectations for the award of benefits, and it is possible to maintain his desire to play. Moreover, since the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 may increase during the course of the game, it becomes difficult to predict how long the advantageous state 603 will last, which improves the interest.

A normal table and a special table are provided as variable display time tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and by switching the selection states of these tables, game states with different degrees of advantage are constructed. As a result, it is possible to realize a shift to an advantageous gaming state without relying on changing the probability of a winning lottery as in the past, and it is possible to provide innovative gaming features. In addition, in this embodiment, the prescribed number of times (remaining number of times) corresponding to the selection period of the special table is increased during the game in the advantageous state 603 where the special table is selected. As a result, it is possible to extend the advantageous state 603 in a practically preferable manner, and it is possible to effectively increase the degree of attention to the game.

Note that in this embodiment, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the remaining number of times of advantageous state 603 is increased, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of times of advantageous state 603 is decreased based on the satisfaction of a predetermined reduction condition.

In this case, the transition period to advantageous state 603 can be shortened. This adds the fun of avoiding satisfaction of the reduction condition in the advantageous state 603, and improves the interest. In this case, the reduction condition may be the same as the additional condition (for example, when the second additional condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times the advantageous state 603 occurs is reduced), or it may be different from the additional condition. It may be a condition (for example, the type of unfavorable special out result of the first special symbol is other than disadvantageous special out result A).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, a first precursor state 602a and a second precursor state 602b are provided, and the transition from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b occurs when promotion conditions are met. Alternatively, the second precursor state 602b may be shifted to the first precursor state 602a upon satisfaction of the demotion condition.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that a plurality of gaming states are provided as advantageous states 603. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94. Note that the same components as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the validity table for the first special figure of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 88. Note that the entries in the "probability" column in FIG. 88 are added for convenience and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the win/fail table for the first special symbol, three types of unfavorable special lose results consisting of disadvantageous special lose results A to C are set as the types of unfavorable special lose results. These unfavorable special outlier results A to C are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1. In the validity judgment for the first special symbol, the probability of an unfavorable special out result A is set to 1/100, the probability of an unfavorable special out result B is set to 1/200, and the probability of an unfavorable special out result B is set to 1/200. The probability of obtaining C is set to 588/600. That is, when the judgment for the first special symbol results in an unfavorable special failure result, the result is often an unfavorable special failure result C, and occasionally an unfavorable special failure result A or B is configured. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the disadvantageous special losing results A to C are merely examples, and are not limited to the above.

By the way, if the result is a disadvantageous special failure result in the judgment of the first special symbol, regardless of the type of disadvantageous special failure result A to C, the driving mode of the second variable prize winning device 32B and the shutter 358 will be changed. are set to be the same. That is, the ease with which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B and the ease with which the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 are common to the unfavorable special winning results A to C. Specifically, in any of the unfavorable special losing results A to C, the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 are configured in such a manner that passing through the V winning area 356 in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment is unlikely to occur. Drive controlled.

Next, the special table of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. Note that the entries in the "selection probability" column in FIG. 89 are added for convenience and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. Further, since the normal table in FIG. 34(a) is similar to the normal table in FIG. 58(a), a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 89, the special tables include a special table A (FIG. 89(b)) and a special table B (FIG. 89(c)). Among these, the special table A is similar to the special table in FIG. 58(b), so its explanation will be omitted.

The special table B shown in FIG. 89(c) is provided corresponding to each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In the special table B for the first special symbol, the first short variation (10.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 180/200, and the first long variation (10.0 seconds) is selected with a probability of 20/200, according to the value of the variation type counter CSA. 30.0 sec) is selected. On the other hand, in the special table B for the second special symbol, the second length variation (20.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 180/200, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 20/200, according to the value of the variation type counter CSB. The configuration is such that fluctuation (5.0 sec) is selected.

Comparing special table A and special table B, special table B has a higher probability of selecting the first long variation and second short variation than special table A, and has a higher probability of selecting the first short variation and second long variation. The probability is low. Therefore, when special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and second special figure, the start of the game round of the first special figure is faster than when special table A is selected. A specific situation is likely to occur in which the variable display time for the second special symbol passes from the start of the game round of the second special symbol earlier than the variable display time for the first special symbol passes from the beginning of the game. In other words, when the special table B is selected as the variable display time table, it is easier to win a V prize than when using the special table A, resulting in a very advantageous gaming state for the player.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the internal state of the pachinko machine 10.

In this embodiment, a normal state 601, a first advantageous state 603a, and a second advantageous state 603b are provided as gaming states. Note that in this embodiment, the precursor state 602 (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment is not provided. In this embodiment, the normal state 601 corresponds to the "first gaming state", and the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b correspond to the "second gaming state".

In the normal state 601, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the result of the judgment corresponding to the winning becomes a jackpot result (the winning/fail lottery result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot result), the opening/closing operation is performed. The gaming state after the end of the execution mode is set to the second advantageous state 603b.

Further, in the normal state 601, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the win/fail determination result corresponding to the win becomes a special lose result, it is determined that the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied. The first transition condition is that the validity determination result of the first special symbol becomes the unfavorable special failure result A, and the probability thereof is set to 1/100 as described above (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, the second transition condition is that the judgment result of the first special symbol becomes disadvantageous special failure result B, and the probability thereof is set to 1/200, which is lower than the probability of establishment of the first transition condition ( (See Figure 88).

When the first transition condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the state shifts to the first advantageous state 603a. The first advantageous state 603a is a state in which the special table A is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In this embodiment, as explained in the first embodiment, the first length variation (30 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the first special symbol, and the second length variation (30 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the second special symbol. When variation (20 seconds) is selected, the first long variation (30 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the first special figure, and the second short variation (5 seconds) is selected as the variation display time of the second special figure. In the three patterns described above, the first short variation (10 sec) is selected as the variable display time of the first special figure, and the second short variation (5 sec) is selected as the variable display time of the second special figure. A specific state occurs, and the winning/failure lottery result on the second special drawing side is validated. Since most of the special losing results of the second special drawing are favorable special losing results (see Figure 9(b)), if the winning/failure lottery results on the second special drawing side are validated, almost all This means that you can definitely win the V jackpot. In the advantageous state 603, the probability that the win/fail lottery result on the second special figure side will be validated, that is, the probability that the selection mode of the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure will be one of the above three patterns, is: It is about 1/10.

On the other hand, when the second transition condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the state shifts to the second advantageous state 603b. The second advantageous state 603b is a state in which the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the second advantageous state 603b, the probability that the selection mode of the variable display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be one of the three patterns described above is approximately 1/5. That is, in the second advantageous state 603b, the winning/failure lottery results on the second special drawing side are validated with a higher probability than in the first advantageous state 603a, and most of them are connected to the V jackpot.

The first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b are both game states with a limited number of times, and are configured to end when the number of times the game of the second special symbol is executed from the start reaches a specified number (upper limit number). ing. The predetermined number of times for both states 603a and 103b is the same, and specifically set to 10 times.

Therefore, when moving to the first advantageous state 603a, the game is a game in which approximately 1/10 is won within the restriction that the specified number of times is 10 times, and when moving to the second advantageous state 603b, the game is a game where the specified number of times is limited to 10 times. It is a game where you win about 1/5 of the winnings. In other words, by shifting to the second advantageous state 603b, it is easier to obtain the V jackpot by the end of the advantageous state, making the game state advantageous for the player.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the following description, parts different from the above-mentioned sixth embodiment will be mainly explained.

<Judgment process for state transition>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the state transition determination process of this embodiment.

The state transition determination process of this embodiment is executed in place of the condition satisfaction determination process in step S3101 of the first fluctuation start process of FIG. 61 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the state transition determination process, first in step S5201, it is determined whether the advantageous table flag A or the advantageous table flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The advantageous table flag A indicates that the special table A is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. On the other hand, the advantageous table flag B indicates that the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

If neither advantageous table flags A nor B are stored, in step S5202, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is that the disadvantageous special winning result A will be won, that is, the first Determine whether the transition conditions are satisfied. If the first transition condition is satisfied, in step S5203, an advantageous flag A indicating that the first transition condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. After executing step S5203 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, the state transition determination process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S5202, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is that the disadvantageous special winning result A is not determined and the first transition state is not established, then in step S5204, the first special symbol is It is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination is that the unfavorable special loser result B is won, that is, whether or not the second transition condition is satisfied. If the second transition condition is satisfied, in step S5205, an advantageous flag B indicating that the second transition condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. After executing step S5205, or when a negative determination is made in step S5205, the state transition determination process ends.

<First variable display time setting process>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the first variable display time setting process of this embodiment.

The first variation display time setting process of this embodiment is executed in step S3102 of the first variation start process of FIG. 61 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, in the first variable display time setting process, first in step S5301, it is determined whether the advantageous table flag A or the advantageous table flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. .

If neither advantageous table flags A nor B are stored, in step S5302, the normal table (Fig. 89(a)). In the following step S5303, with reference to the normal table, the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is obtained, and set as the variable display time of the game time of the first special symbol. do. Thereafter, the process of setting the first variable display time is ended.

On the other hand, if either advantageous table flag A or B is stored in step S5301, it is determined in step S5304 whether advantageous table flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the advantageous table flag A is stored, in step S5305, the special table A (FIG. 89(b) )). In the subsequent step S5303, the special table A is referred to, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is obtained, and the variable display time of the game round of the first special symbol is obtained. Set as .

On the other hand, if the advantageous table flag A is not stored in step S5304, it means that the advantageous table flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, in step S5306, the advantageous table flag A is stored. The special table B (FIG. 89(c)) stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is selected as the variable display time table for one special figure. In the subsequent step S5303, special table b is referred to, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is obtained, and the variable display time of the game round of the first special symbol is obtained. Set as .

Although not shown, the variable display time of the second special figure game is also executed in the same manner as the first variable display time setting process. That is, if neither advantageous table flags A nor B are stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the second special symbol, and the advantageous table flags are stored in the storage area 234. If flag A is stored, special table A is selected as the variable display time table for the second special figure. Further, when the advantageous table flag B is stored in the storage area 234, the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the second special symbol.

<Table switching process>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the table switching process of this embodiment.

The table switching process of this embodiment is for transitioning the gaming state between the normal state 601 and the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b based on the satisfaction of the first and second transition conditions. . This process is executed in step S3901 of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 69 according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the table switching process, the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 in steps S4101 and S4102, as in the sixth embodiment. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored.

If the V winning flag is not stored in step S4102, it is determined in step S5401 whether or not the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, that is, the opening/closing execution mode is set to the first It is determined whether it corresponds to the disadvantageous special out result of the special figure.

If the first side unfavorable release flag is not stored, the table switching process ends, and if the first side unfavorable release flag is stored, in step S5402, the advantageous flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. Determine whether A is stored. The advantageous flag A indicates that the first transition condition is satisfied.

If advantageous flag A is stored, advantageous table flag A is stored in various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204 in step S5403. Further, in step S5403, processing to erase the advantageous flag A stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the subsequent step S5404, 10 is set to the value of the game time counter area CG2 for the second special symbol provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The game counter area CG2 is for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after the transition to the first advantageous state 603a. The prescribed number of times (upper limit number) of the advantageous state 603a is set to 10 times. In the following step S5405, the advantageous table command A is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82, and then the table switching process is ended.

The advantageous table command A set in step S5405 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the content of the special effect display B to the display control device 212. As a result, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special performance display B is displayed on the display screen G from the next game to be played after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Note that the special effect display B is similar to the special effect display B (FIG. 72(c)) in the sixth embodiment.

On the other hand, if advantageous flag A is not stored in step S5402, it is determined whether advantageous flag B is stored in various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204. The advantageous flag B indicates that the second transition condition is satisfied.

If advantageous flag B is stored, advantageous table flag B is stored in various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204 in step S5407. Further, in step S5407, processing to erase the advantageous flag B stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the following step S5408, the value of the game counter area CG2 for the second special symbol is set to 10. The game counter area CG2 in this step is for counting the number of times the second special symbol is played after moving to the second advantageous state 603b, and by executing this step, The prescribed number of times (upper limit number) of the second advantageous state 603b is set to 10 times.

In the subsequent step S5409, the advantageous table command B is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82. Upon receiving the advantageous table command B, the effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the special effect display C shown in FIG. 94 to the display control device 212. The special performance display C suggests to the player that the game should move to the second advantageous state 603b. As the special effect display C, for example, at the upper and lower parts of the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a text display 641 such as a caption displaying the text "In super heat mode" or the like, or a background color on the display screen G may be displayed. A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color may be considered.

By executing the process of step S5409, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display C is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round to be played after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S5405 or when a negative determination is made in S5406, the table switching process ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

In an advantageous state 603 that is more advantageous than the normal state 601, first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b having different advantageous degrees are provided, and when the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state 603, the first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b. As a result, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to shift to the advantageous state 603 while the degree of advantage is diversified. (Second advantageous state 603b) can also be aroused.

As the fluctuation display time table for the advantageous state 603, the ease with which the second short fluctuation is selected (in other words, it is faster than the fluctuation display time for the first special symbol passes from the start of the game round of the first special symbol). , the ease of establishment of a specific state in which the variable display time for the second special symbol has elapsed from the start of the game round of the second special symbol) is provided, thereby creating first and second advantageous states with different degrees of advantage. The configuration is such that 603a and 603b are constructed. This makes it possible to diversify the degree of advantage of the advantageous state 603 with a simple configuration that only controls the selection of which of these tables to obtain the variable display time from, making the above configuration a practically preferable aspect. It becomes possible to realize this by

In addition, in this embodiment, like the said 6th and 7th embodiment, it is good also as a structure which transfers to the advantageous state 603 through the establishment of a step-by-step condition. In this case, it is preferable to set a first condition and a second condition as conditions for shifting to the advantageous state 603, and to shift to the precursor state 602 (see FIG. 76) when the first condition is satisfied.

In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, a first precursor state 602a and a second precursor state 602b are provided, and the transition from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b occurs when the promotion condition is met. Alternatively, the second precursor state 602b may be shifted to the first precursor state 602a upon satisfaction of the demotion condition.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second advantageous state 603b is possible when a specific promotion condition is satisfied during the stay in the first advantageous state 603a. A configuration may also be adopted in which a transition to the first advantageous state 603a is possible when a specific demotion condition is met during the stay.

In such a configuration, for example, in the first advantageous state 603a, the promotion condition is satisfied when the judgment result of the first special figure becomes an unfavorable special failure result B, and in the second advantageous state 603b, the promotion condition is satisfied. The demotion condition can be determined to be satisfied when the appropriateness determination process results in a disadvantageous special failure result A.

The promotion and demotion conditions are not limited to those mentioned above, and may correspond to disadvantageous special failure results other than unfavorable special failure results A and B, or may be set using a dedicated random number counter (for example, the sixth embodiment described above). It is also possible to provide a conditional random number counter (such as a conditional random number counter in the form) and establish the condition when the value becomes a specific value. Furthermore, it may be realized when the jackpot random number counter CB1 for the second special figure (second operating port 34) becomes a specific value, and the variation type counter CS of the first special figure or the second special figure may be set to a specific value. It may be established that the value is a specific value. Furthermore, for both the promotion and demotion conditions, both conditions may be the same, such as setting the judgment result of the first special symbol to be an unfavorable special failure result B in the first advantageous state 603a. .

Incidentally, promotion from the first advantageous state 603a to the second advantageous state 603b and demotion from the second advantageous state 603b to the first advantageous state 603a do not necessarily have to include both, but only one of them. It may be a configuration.

Also, in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the remaining number of times in the advantageous state 603 may be increased based on the addition condition being satisfied in the advantageous state 603. Furthermore, the remaining number of times in the advantageous state 603 may be reduced based on the fact that the reduction condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603. In this case, it is not necessary to include both a configuration that increases the remaining number of times and a configuration that decreases the remaining number of times, and a configuration that includes only one of them may be used.

<Modification of the ninth embodiment>
This modification differs from the ninth embodiment in the configurations of the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b. This modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 95. Note that the same configurations as those in the ninth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b of this modification, the common special table A (FIG. 89(b)) is used as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, while the upper limit A different prescribed number of times is set as a number. Specifically, the prescribed number of times of the first advantageous state 603a is set to 10 times, and the prescribed number of times of the second advantageous state 603b is set to 20 times.

In the above configuration, in both the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b, the probability that the winning/failure lottery result on the second special drawing side will be validated (the probability that it will be a virtual jackpot) is approximately 1/10. However, in the second advantageous state 603b, the number of times the lottery is received is greater than in the first advantageous state 603a, so that the expected value of winning the V jackpot by the end of the advantageous state becomes higher. With such a configuration, the storage capacity of the variable display time table can be reduced, and the memory usage of the ROM 203 can be saved.

In this modification, a common special table is used for the first advantageous state 603a and the second advantageous state 603b, but as in the ninth embodiment, FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c) It is also possible to use different special tables, such as special tables A and B shown in FIG. In other words, the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b may be constructed by combining a configuration in which the special tables are different and a configuration in which the specified number of times is different.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from each of the above embodiments in that the frequency of winning of game balls into the second operating port 34 is limited. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 104. Note that the same components as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the validity table for ordinary figures of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 96(a). In each of the above embodiments, the probability of a winning result in the support lottery (a winning result in the judgment of the correctness of the common map) is set to approximately 99.6% (see FIG. 11(a)). In the form, as shown in FIG. 96(a), it is set to 1/25. That is, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11(b), even if the game ball that enters the first operating port 33 passes through the through gate 35 immediately before that, the electric accessory 34a does not become open almost every time. The frequency of opening of the electric accessory 34a is limited to such an extent that the electric accessory 34a occasionally becomes open.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the picture (ordinary figure) in the ordinary figure display part 38 and the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a are the same as the structure of the said 1st embodiment shown in FIG.11(c). be. Specifically, if the picture on the common picture display section 38 is displayed in a fluctuating manner for 0.3 seconds, and if it is a winning result in the support lottery, the electric accessory is displayed for 1.5 seconds after the fluctuating display of the picture is finished. 34a is kept open continuously. Therefore, when the result of the support lottery is a winning result, the subsequent game ball can enter the second operating port 34 about 1.0 sec after the game ball enters the first operating port 33.

Next, the structure of the validity table of the first special figure and the second special figure in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 96(b) and 96(c). As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the win/fail table of the first special figure of this embodiment, the normal winning result and the advantageous special winning result are not set, but only the jackpot result and the disadvantageous special winning result are set. For this reason, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is not a jackpot result, it will always be a disadvantageous special miss result. By the way, the jackpot probability is set at 1/200.

On the other hand, in the win/fail table of the second special drawing, as shown in FIG. 96(c), the normal winning result and the unfavorable special winning result are not set, but only the jackpot result and the advantageous special winning result are set. For this reason, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is not a jackpot result, it will always be an advantageous special miss result. By the way, the jackpot probability is set at 1/200.

In addition, in the second special figure win/fail table, three types of advantageous special lose results A to C are set as advantageous special lose results. These advantageous special losing results A to C are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. In the validity judgment for the second special symbol, the probability of obtaining an advantageous special deviation result A and the probability of obtaining an advantageous special deviation result B are both set to 35/100, and the probability of obtaining an advantageous special deviation result C is approximately 30/100. /100.

Next, the configuration of the distribution table of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 97. In addition, this distribution table is used to distribute the jackpot type when a jackpot result is obtained in the judgment of the first special drawing or the second special drawing.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the distribution table of this embodiment, 8R jackpot results and 16R jackpot results are set as jackpot types, and two types of 16R jackpot results A and B are set as 16R jackpot results. . These 8R jackpot results and 16R jackpot results A and B are set in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In the distribution table, the probability of being assigned to 8R jackpot result is set to 50/100, the probability of being assigned to 16R jackpot result A is set to 40/100, and the probability of being assigned to 16R jackpot result B is set to 10/100. has been done. That is, if the first special drawing or the second special drawing is determined to be a jackpot, half of it will be distributed to the 16R jackpot result, and most of it will be distributed to the 16R jackpot result A.

Note that the entries in the "probability" column shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 described above are added for convenience and are not stored as data in the probability table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. In addition, the various probabilities, such as the probability of winning in the support lottery mentioned above and the probability of getting a jackpot result in the judgment of the first special drawing or the second special drawing, are only examples and are limited to the above. It's not a thing.

Next, the normal table and special table of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) shows a normal table, and FIG. 98(b) shows a special table.

As shown in FIG. 98, the normal table and the special table show the relationship between the variation type counter CSA and the variation display time of the first special symbol game time, and the relationship between the variation type counter CSB and the variation display time of the second special symbol game time. It stipulates the relationship with time. Note that in both of these tables, unlike the variable display time table of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29), the relationship with the game counter (the number of times a game is executed) is not defined.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the normal table is provided corresponding to each of the first special figure and the second special figure. Only the first variation A (10.0 sec) is set in the normal table for the first special figure, and the second variation A (10.0 seconds) is set in the normal table for the second special figure, and the second variation A has a longer variation display time than the first variation A. (20.0 sec) is set. That is, in the normal table selection state, the first variation A is always selected for the variable display time of the first special figure game time, and the second variation A is always selected for the variable display time of the second special figure game time. Ru. In this case, as explained in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the game round of the second special figure starts 1.0 sec after the start of the game round of the first special figure, the second special figure The variable display time for the first special symbol passes from the start of the game session for the first special symbol earlier than the variable display time for the second special symbol passes from the start of the game session for the first special symbol. The validity judgment result is validated.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), special tables are provided corresponding to the first special figure and the second special figure. Only the first variation B (3.0 sec) is set in the special table for the first special figure, and the second variation B (3.0 seconds) is set in the special table for the second special figure, and the second variation B (3.0 seconds) is set in the special table for the second special figure. 1.0 sec) is set. That is, in the selected state of the special table, the first variation B is always selected for the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure, and the second variation B is always selected for the variable display time of the game round of the second special figure. Ru. In this case, the variable display time for the second special symbol passes from the start of the game session for the second special symbol earlier than the variable display time for the first special symbol passes from the start of the game session for the first special symbol. A specific state is established, and the result of the determination of the validity of the second special symbol is validated.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100.

Here, first, the relationship between the variable display time table, the support state of the electric accessory 34a (the lottery result of the support lottery), and the probability of a V jackpot will be explained with reference to FIG. 99(a).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in a state where the normal table is selected as the variable display time table of the first and second special symbols, the electric accessory 34a is lost in the support lottery and enters the support state (open state). If the transition is not made, the game ball does not enter the second operating port 34, and the game ball enters only the first operating port 33. In this case, only the game round of the first special figure is executed, and the validity determination result of the first special figure is validated.

Here, in the validity table of the first special figure, only two types are set: jackpot results and unfavorable special failure results (Fig. 96(b)), so when determining the validity of the first special figure, there are only two types of jackpot results and disadvantageous special failure results. If this is not the case, all results will be unfavorable. If the result of the judgment of the first special figure is unfavorable, the second variable winning device 32B is driven in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 356, so the probability of a V jackpot is high. is almost 0%.

On the other hand, in a state where the normal table is selected as the variable display time table of the first special figure and the second special figure, if the support lottery is won and the electric accessory 34a shifts to the support state, the first and second special figures A game ball enters each of the two operation ports 33 and 34. In this case, as already explained, the validity determination result of the first special symbol is validated, and the probability of a V jackpot is approximately 0%, similar to the case where the electric accessory 34a does not shift to the support state.

In addition, in a state where the special table is selected as the variable display time table of the first special figure and the second special figure, if the electric accessory 34a does not shift to the support state due to a loss in the support lottery, the second operating port 34a Since the game ball does not win in , the validity determination result of the first special symbol is validated. Therefore, as in the case where the normal table is selected, the second variable winning device 32B is driven in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 356, and the probability of a V jackpot is approximately 0%.

On the other hand, in a state where the special table is selected as the variable display time table of the first special figure and the second special figure, if the support lottery is won and the electric accessory 34a shifts to the support state, the first Since game balls are won in each of the second operation ports 33 and 34, both game rounds of the first special figure and the second special figure are executed. As already explained, if the first and second special figures are played in a state where the special table is selected, the above-mentioned specific state is established, and the validity judgment result of the second special figure is valid. be converted into

Here, in the second special pattern's validity table, only two types are set: the jackpot result and the advantageous special failure result (Fig. 96(c)), so in the judgment of the second special pattern's validity, the jackpot result and If this is not the case, the result will be a special loss in your favor. If the result of the judgment of the second special figure is an advantageous special winning result, the second variable winning device 32B is driven in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 356, so the probability of a V jackpot is is almost 100%.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the support lottery is won in a state where the special table is selected as the variable display time table of the first and second special symbols, it is configured such that the V jackpot can be won. ing.

Next, the transition of the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 99(b).

In the normal state 601, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to an advantageous state 603.

The advantageous state 603 is a state in which a special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the number of times the game of the first special figure is executed from the start is the specified number (upper limit). The configuration is such that the process ends when the number is reached. The advantageous state 603 includes a first advantageous state 603a in which the prescribed number of times is set to 10 times, and a second advantageous state 603b in which the prescribed number of times is set to 30 times.

Note that in all of the normal state 601, the first advantageous state 603a, and the second advantageous state 603b, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same 1/25. In other words, it does not have a function to shift the gaming state to a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of a winning result in the support lottery is high, or a low-frequency support mode in which the probability of a winning result is low.

In this embodiment, when the support lottery is won in the selected state of the special table, the V jackpot can be won, while the probability of winning the support lottery is set to 1/25 (Fig. 96(a) ). Therefore, in the first advantageous state 603a, if the support winning of 1/25 can be won within the restriction that the specified number of times is 10, the game feature is such that the V jackpot can be won. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state 603b, if a support win of 1/25 can be won within the restriction that the prescribed number of times is 30, the game feature is such that a V jackpot can be won. That is, although the probability of winning the support lottery is the same, it is easier to win the support prize in the second advantageous state 603b by the end of the second advantageous state 603b, making it a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

Here, the manner in which the variable display time table is distributed in the case of a jackpot result will be explained with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100(a) is a distribution table for the variable display time table, and FIG. 100(b) is a distribution table for the prescribed number of times. These distribution tables are stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203. Note that the entries in the "Probability" column in FIG. 100 are added for convenience and are not stored as data in the storage area 222.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in the distribution table for the variable display time table, there are cases where the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, and when it is a V jackpot. For each, whether or not to transition to the special table selection state (advantageous state 603) is defined. In the case where the judgment result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, it is defined whether or not to shift to an advantageous state 603 in association with the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot A or B (see FIG. 97), the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state 603, and if it is an 8R jackpot, it is set not to shift. Since the probability that 16R jackpot A or B will be selected is 50% (see Figure 97), if the result of the judgment of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot, there is a 50% probability that it is advantageous. The process moves to state 603. Incidentally, the case of a V jackpot will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), in the distribution table for the prescribed number of times, the judgment result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot result, and when it is a V jackpot, respectively. , a prescribed number of times of advantageous state 603 is prescribed. In the case where the judgment result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, it is defined whether or not to shift to an advantageous state 603 in association with the type of 16R jackpot.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot A, the prescribed number of times is set to be 10, and when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot B, the prescribed number of times is set to be 30. In the case of a 16R jackpot result, the probability that 16R jackpot A will be selected and the probability that 16 jackpot B will be selected are 80% and 20%, respectively (see Figure 97), so the first special drawing or the second special drawing If the result of the judgment is a jackpot, there is a probability of 80% to shift to the first advantageous state 603a, and a probability of 20% to shift to the second advantageous state 603b. In other words, it is easier to shift to the first advantageous state 603a than to the second advantageous state 603b. Incidentally, the case of a V jackpot will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 96, if a V jackpot occurs in the first advantageous state 603a or the second advantageous state 603b, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the normal state 601, the first advantageous state 603a, and the second advantageous state 603b. 2 advantageous state 603b. This distribution is performed using the distribution table for the variable display time table and the distribution table for the specified number of times.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in the distribution table for the variable display time table, it is specified whether or not to shift to the advantageous state 603 in association with the type of advantageous special winning result of the second special symbol. . Specifically, when the type of advantageous special losing result is advantageous special losing result A or B (see FIG. 96(c)), the gaming state shifts to advantageous state 603, and when it is advantageous special losing result C. is set not to migrate. Since the probability that advantageous special failure results A and B are selected is 70% (see FIG. 96(c)), if it becomes a V jackpot, there is a 70% probability that it will shift to advantageous state 603, and a 30% Transition to normal state 601 occurs with probability. That is, it is easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 compared to the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), in the predetermined frequency allocation table, the predetermined number of times of advantageous state 603 is defined in association with the type of advantageous special winning result of the second special symbol. Specifically, the prescribed number of times is set to be 10 in the case of an advantageous special losing result A, and the prescribed number of times is set to be 30 in the case of an advantageous special losing result B. If the result of the judgment of the second special drawing is a special favorable/unfavorable result, the probability that the favorable/special negative results A and B are selected is 50% each (see Figure 96(c)), resulting in a V jackpot. In this case, the configuration is such that there is a 50% probability of transition to the first advantageous state 603a, and a 50% probability of transition to the second advantageous state 603b. That is, it is easier to shift to the second advantageous state 603b compared to the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the normal state 601 is a jackpot result, the advantageous state 603 is reached with a probability of 50% (relatively low probability). If the player can make a transition and obtain a V jackpot in the advantageous state 603, the system is configured to transition to the advantageous state 603 again with a probability of 70% (relatively high probability). In other words, the configuration is such that it is easy to repeatedly shift to the advantageous state 603.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the transition to the advantageous state 603 occurs, there is a probability of 20% (relatively low probability). When shifting to the second advantageous state 603b and then shifting to the advantageous state 603 triggered by a V jackpot, the system is configured to shift to the second advantageous state 603b with a probability of 50% (relatively high probability). That is, the configuration is such that by acquiring the V jackpot, it becomes easier to shift to the second advantageous state 603b.

In this embodiment, it is advantageous that the first variation B (3 seconds) of the special table for the first special symbol is set to a shorter period than the first length variation (30 seconds) of each of the above embodiments. This is to allow the game to proceed at a good tempo while most of the game rounds of the first special symbol are executed to the end without being invalidated in the middle in state 603.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the following description, parts different from the above-mentioned sixth embodiment will be mainly explained.

<Storing process of first side 16R flag>
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the first side 16R flag storage process of this embodiment.

The storage process of this embodiment is executed in step S608 of the first fluctuation start process of FIG. 61 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that in the first variation start process in FIG. 61, in this embodiment, the processes in steps S611 to S614 and S617 are not executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S603, the process advances to step S615.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the first side 16R flag storage process, first in step S6001, it is determined whether the distribution result for the current jackpot is 16R jackpot A. If it is a 16 jackpot A, the 16R flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6002. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6001, it means that the distribution result for the current jackpot is 16R jackpot B. Therefore, in step S6003, 16R flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. . After executing steps S6002 and S6003, the first side 16R flag storage process ends.

<Storing process of second side advantageous release flag>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the process of storing the second side advantageous release flag according to this embodiment.

The storage process of this embodiment is executed in step S914 of the second fluctuation start process of FIG. 66 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that in the second variation start process in FIG. 66, in this embodiment, the processes in steps S911, S912, and S915 to S917 are not executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S903, the process advances to step S913.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the storage process of the second side advantageous opening flag, first in step S6101, it is determined whether the type of the advantageous special winning result of the second special symbol is the advantageous special winning result A. If the result is an advantageous special failure result A, an advantageous opening flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6102.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S6101, it is determined in step S6103 whether the type of the advantageous special losing result of the second special symbol is advantageous special losing result B or not. If the result is an advantageous special failure result B, an advantageous opening flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6104. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6103, it means that the type of advantageous special losing result of the second special symbol is advantageous special losing result C. Therefore, in step S6105, various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 are An advantageous release flag C is stored in 234. After executing steps S6102, S6104, and S6105, the storage process of the second side advantageous release flag is ended.

<Table switching process>
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the table switching process of this embodiment.

The table switching process of this embodiment is executed in step S3901 of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 69 according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the table switching process, first in step S6201, it is determined whether the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first winning flag is stored when the judgment result of the first special drawing is a jackpot result (see step S604 in FIG. 61), and the second winning flag is stored when the judgment result of the second special drawing is a jackpot result. This is stored when is a jackpot result (see step S904 in FIG. 66).

If the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S6202 whether the 16R flag A or the 16R flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If neither 16R flags A nor B are stored, it means that the jackpot type is an 8R jackpot, and in this case, the table switching process is ended.

On the other hand, if 16R flag A or 16R flag B is stored in step S6202, advantageous table flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204 in step S6203. By storing the advantageous table flag A, the special table is selected as the variable display time table of the first special figure and the second special figure, and the gaming state shifts to an advantageous state 603.

On the other hand, if neither the first nor second winning flag is stored in step S6201, it is determined whether the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The V winning flag is stored when the winning game ball passes through the V winning area 356 in the second variable winning device 32B, and indicates that a V jackpot has been won.

If the V winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S6205 whether the advantage opening flag A or B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the advantageous release flag A or B is stored, the process advances to step S6203, and as already explained, the advantageous table flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S6204, it means that neither the jackpot nor the V jackpot has been won, and when a negative determination is made in step S6205, the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is an advantageous special. This means that the result is an error C, and in these cases, the table switching process is ended.

After execution of step S6203, in the subsequent step S6206, it is determined whether the 16R flag A or the advantageous opening flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If any of these flags is stored, in step S6207, the value of the game counter area CG1 for the first special symbol is set to 10. The game counter area CG1 is for counting the number of times the first special symbol is played after the transition to the advantageous state 603. By executing the process of step S6207, the specified number of times of advantageous state 603 is set to 10 times, and advantageous state 603 is set to first advantageous state 603a.

In the subsequent step S6208, the advantageous table command A is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82, and then the table switching process is ended. The advantageous table command A set in step S6208 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). Upon receiving the advantageous table command A, the effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the special effect display A shown in FIG. 104(a) to the display control device 212.

The special performance display A informs or suggests to the player that the gaming state has shifted to the first advantageous state 603a. As the special effect display A, for example, as shown in FIG. A configuration may be considered in which the background color is changed to a dedicated color different from that of the normal effect display (FIG. 72(a)). Furthermore, in the special effect display A, the first advantageous state 603a becomes an advantageous state with a limit of the number of times, and since the specified number of times is 10, the first advantageous state 603a ends at the upper left of the display screen G. A remaining number of times display 652 of "10 times remaining" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations up to the present time is also displayed.

On the other hand, if neither the 16R flag A nor the advantageous release flag A is stored in step S6206, it means that the 16R flag B or the advantageous release flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, In this case, in step S6209, the value of the game counter area CG1 for the first special symbol is set to 30. As a result, the prescribed number of times of the advantageous state 603 is set to 30, and the advantageous state 603 is set to the second advantageous state 603b.

In the subsequent step S6210, the advantageous table command B is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82, and then the table switching process is ended. Upon receiving the advantageous table command B, the effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the special effect display B shown in FIG. 104(b) to the display control device 212.

The special performance display B informs or suggests to the player that the gaming state has shifted to the second advantageous state 603b. As the special effect display B, like the special effect display A, the text 651 of "Special Time!!" is displayed on the display screen G, the background color on the display screen G is the same color as the special effect display A, or A configuration may be considered in which the color is changed to a special color different from both the normal effect display and the special effect display A. Furthermore, in the special performance display B, since the prescribed number of times of the second advantageous state 603b is 30, "30 times remaining" is also displayed as the remaining number of times display 652.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

Based on the fact that the judgment result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot result, a specific state is likely to occur (in other words, a V jackpot is likely to occur) to shift to an advantageous state 603, and further The winning probability of the support lottery is set to 1/25, and the frequency of winning of game balls to the second operating port 34 is limited.

By providing a configuration in which the advantageous state 603 is provided, it is possible to provide the fun of realizing the transition to the advantageous state 603 by satisfying the transition condition. However, in this configuration, the establishment of a specific state is essentially a condition for the occurrence of the V jackpot, so in order to obtain the V jackpot, it is not enough to simply shift to the advantageous state 603; It is necessary to make the game ball enter the second operating port 34. This is because the establishment of the specific state requires the occurrence of a game round of the second special symbol. Under such a configuration, in this configuration, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second operating port 34 is limited, so that it is possible to play a simple game in which it becomes easier to obtain benefits automatically when the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603. In addition to the nature of the game, it is possible to provide a gaming feature in which a player can win a prize if he or she is able to win a prize in the second operating port 34 while the difficulty level of winning the second operating port 34 is increased. It becomes possible to improve interest.

In both the normal state 601 and the advantageous state 603, the probability of winning the support lottery is set to 1/25, and in both states 601 and 603, the degree of restriction on the frequency of winning to the second operating port 34 is made the same.

According to the above configuration, it is sufficient to keep the winning probability of the support lottery unchanged and to switch the variable display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from either the normal table or the special table, which simplifies the control process. It becomes possible to become

After the gaming state shifts to an advantageous state 603, the advantageous state 603 is terminated based on the number of times the first special symbol is played a specified number of times (upper limit number).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 34 before the advantageous state 603 ends while the frequency of winning in the second operating port 34 is limited. This makes it possible to play the game with a sense of danger that the advantageous state 603 will end without winning any prizes in the second operating port 34, thereby improving the interest.

As a transition condition to the advantageous state 603, a first transition condition is that the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result, and 16R jackpot A, B is selected as the jackpot type; It has a second transition condition, which is a condition that a V jackpot is achieved in the opening/closing execution mode when the second special symbol's validity determination result is an advantageous special winning result A or B, and the first transition condition is satisfied. By doing so, the second transition condition is more likely to be satisfied than before the first transition condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, before the first transition condition is satisfied, the game is played with the aim of satisfying the first transition condition, and after the first transition condition is satisfied, the game is played with the aim of satisfying the second transition condition. The gaming method can be switched once the first transition condition is met. This prevents players from becoming confused even though the game feature is to shift to the advantageous state 603 when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the game feature to shift to the advantageous state 603 when the second transition condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to suppress this and improve playability.

If the second transition condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603, and the second transition condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the advantageous state 603 again after the advantageous state 603 ends. The structure is as follows.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to satisfy the second transition condition in the advantageous state 603 that is transitioned based on the establishment of the first transition condition, and when the second transition condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603, , after the end of the advantageous state 603, the gaming state can be shifted to the advantageous state 603 again. As a result, if the second transition condition is satisfied in the previous advantageous state 603, the advantageous state 603 can be repeatedly transferred, and the advantageous state 603 can be continuously generated. As a result, not only the expectation that a V jackpot will occur in the advantageous state 603, but also the second transition condition (that the type of advantageous special winning result that triggers the V jackpot becomes advantageous special winning result A and B) is satisfied. A sense of anticipation can also be aroused, and interest can be improved.

A configuration in which first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b having different advantageous degrees are provided as the advantageous state 603, and when the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state 603, it shifts to either the first or second advantageous state 603a or 603b. And so.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the gaming property of shifting to the advantageous state 603 among various degrees of advantage, and not only the expectation that the gaming state will shift to the advantageous state 603, but also the side with the higher degree of advantage. At the same time, it is possible to arouse a feeling of anticipation for transitioning to the gaming state (second advantageous state 603b).

In this embodiment, a common special table is used for the first advantageous state 603a and the second advantageous state 603b. A configuration may be adopted in which different special tables are used, such as special tables A and B shown in FIG. In this case, the prescribed number of times (upper limit number) may be set to the same number in the first advantageous state 603a and the second advantageous state 603b, or may be set to different numbers.

Further, in this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the configuration may be such that the state shifts to the advantageous state 603 after the conditions are met in stages. In this case, it is preferable to set a first condition and a second condition as conditions for shifting to the advantageous state 603, and to shift to the precursor state 602 (see FIG. 76) when the first condition is satisfied.

In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, a first precursor state 602a and a second precursor state 602b are provided, and the transition from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b occurs when the promotion condition is met. Alternatively, the second precursor state 602b may be shifted to the first precursor state 602a upon satisfaction of the demotion condition.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second advantageous state 603b is possible when a specific promotion condition is satisfied during the stay in the first advantageous state 603a. A configuration may also be adopted in which a transition to the first advantageous state 603a is possible when a specific demotion condition is satisfied during the stay.

In such a configuration, for example, in the first advantageous state 603a, the promotion condition is satisfied when the judgment result of the first special figure becomes an unfavorable special failure result B, and in the second advantageous state 603b, the promotion condition is satisfied. The demotion condition can be determined to be satisfied when the appropriateness determination process results in a disadvantageous special failure result A.

The promotion and demotion conditions are not limited to those mentioned above, and may correspond to disadvantageous special failure results other than unfavorable special failure results A and B, or may be set using a dedicated random number counter (for example, the sixth embodiment described above). It is also possible to provide a conditional random number counter (such as a conditional random number counter in the form) and establish the condition when the value becomes a specific value. Furthermore, it may be realized when the jackpot random number counter CB1 for the second special figure (second operating port 34) becomes a specific value, and the variation type counter CS of the first special figure or the second special figure may be set to a specific value. It may be established that the value is a specific value. Furthermore, for both the promotion and demotion conditions, both conditions may be the same, such as setting the judgment result of the first special symbol to be an unfavorable special failure result B in the first advantageous state 603a. .

Incidentally, promotion from the first advantageous state 603a to the second advantageous state 603b and demotion from the second advantageous state 603b to the first advantageous state 603a do not necessarily have to include both, but only one of them. It may be a configuration.

Also, in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the remaining number of times in the advantageous state 603 may be increased based on the addition condition being satisfied in the advantageous state 603. Furthermore, the remaining number of times in the advantageous state 603 may be reduced based on the fact that the reduction condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603. In this case, it is not necessary to include both a configuration that increases the remaining number of times and a configuration that decreases the remaining number of times, and a configuration that includes only one of them may be used.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configurations of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are different. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each operating port in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the operating port on the second special figure side is different. A third operating port 34B is provided as the operating port on the second special figure side in this embodiment. The third operating port 34B is located upstream of the first operating port 33 and the through gate 35. As for the first operating port 33 and the through gate 35, the through gate 35 is arranged directly above the first operating port 33 on the first special figure side, similar to the first and second embodiments.

More specifically about the third operating port 34B, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the third operating port 34B is an opening large enough to allow a game ball opened in the front-rear direction to pass through. It is formed. The third operating port 34B is provided with an electric accessory 331 that can be switched between an open state in which the ball can easily enter the third operating port 34B and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the third operating port 34B. The electric accessory 331 corresponds to the electric accessory 34a described above.

More specifically, the electric accessory 331 includes an opening/closing accessory 332 that defines the movement of the game ball in the back and forth direction at the third operating port 34B, and a game ball that flows down from above the third operating port 34B. and a receiving accessory 333 that receives the game from below and guides it to the third operating port 34B (rear of the gaming machine). The opening/closing accessory 332 has an opening/closing member 334 that can be switched between a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through the third operating opening 34B and an open state in which a game ball can pass through. 335 through a link mechanism (not shown), it is switched between an open state and a closed state. When the opening/closing member 334 is in the open state, the opening/closing member 334 is arranged at the rear of the third operating port 34B (the front surface of the game board 24), and more specifically, at the upper part of the ball discharge passage leading from the third operating port 34B. Placed. When the opening/closing member 334 is in the closed state, the opening/closing member 334 closes the third operating port 34B and becomes flush with the front surface of the game board 24. In other words, the opening/closing member 334 does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the game board 24 regardless of whether it is placed in the open state or the closed state.

The receiving accessory 333 is in a receiving state in which it receives a predetermined number (only one ball) of game balls flowing down from above the third operating port 34B from below and guides the received game balls to the third operating port 34B. , and a receiving member 336 that can be switched to a non-receiving state in which the game balls flowing down from above cannot be received from below. The receiving member 336 is switched between a receiving state and a non-receiving state by being driven by a drive unit 337 through a link mechanism (not shown). When the receiving member 336 is in the receiving state, the receiving member 336 protrudes forward from the third operating port 34B (the front surface of the game board 24) and can receive a predetermined number of game balls (only one ball) flowing down from above. Become. On the other hand, when the receiving member 336 is in the non-receiving state, the receiving member 336 is placed behind the third operating port 34B (the front surface of the game board 24), and more specifically, the receiving member 336 is located in the ball discharge passage leading from the third operating port 34B. placed at the bottom. That is, the receiving member 336 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 when in the receiving state, and is disposed behind the front surface of the game board 24 when in the non-receiving state.

That is, a state in which the opening/closing accessory 332 is in the open state and the receiving accessory 333 is in the receiving state corresponds to the support state (open state) of the electric accessory 331, and when the opening/closing accessory 332 is in the closed state, the receiving accessory 333 is in the receiving state. A state in which the object 333 is in a non-receiving state corresponds to a non-support state (closed state) of the electric accessory 331. When the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, the ball is allowed to enter the third operating port 34B, and when the electric accessory 331 is in the non-support state, the ball is restricted from entering the third operating port 34B. In other words, when the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, the rate of ball entry into the third operating port 34B is improved, and when the electric accessory 331 is in the non-support state, the rate of ball entry into the third operating port 34B is improved. decreases.

As in the first and second embodiments, a ball enters the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33, a game round on the first special figure side starts, and a support lottery is held. When a prize is won, the electric accessory 331 enters a support state and winning is allowed through the third operating port 34B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 105, the third operating port 34B is arranged so as to be on the path for letting the game ball enter the first operating port 33. Therefore, when a game ball is fired in order to cause a winning to the third operating port 34B, the game ball will flow down on the path to the first operating port 33. Then, the flowing game ball enters the third operating port 34B if the electric accessory 331 of the third operating port 34B is in the support state, and enters the first operating port 33 if the electric accessory 331 is in the non-support state. Win a prize. As mentioned above, since the electric accessory 331 is placed in the support state based on a winning in the first operating port 33, more specifically, a winning in the through gate 35, when a winning in the third operating port 34B occurs. This means that a winning has occurred at the first operating port 33 before that.

As described above, in this embodiment, the third operating port 34B on the second special figure side is arranged on the flow path to the first operating port 33 on the first special figure side, and the third operating port 34B on the first special figure side A through gate 35 is provided at one operating port 33. Therefore, when trying to generate a winning at the third operating port 34B on the second special drawing side, it is necessary to flow down the path to the first operating port 33 on the first special drawing side, and the third operating port 34B It has become difficult to generate only winnings. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize a gaming feature in which the first operating port 33 and the third operating port 34B are used as a set to win and advance the game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the flow path of the game ball to the operating port on the second special figure side is different. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming area PE on the upstream side of the second special figure side operating port (fourth operating port 34C) of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, each component of the game area PE is provided so that there is a first route and a second route through which the game ball can pass on the upstream side of the fourth operating port 34C on the second special figure side. There is. The first route and the second route are downstream paths through which game balls entering from the inlet portion 370 pass, and a fourth operating port 34C is provided in the discharge portion 371 on the downstream side thereof. Note that the fourth operating port 34C has the same configuration as the third embodiment, and is provided with an electric accessory 331.

A game ball entering from the entrance section 370 branches into a first route and a second route at a branching position 372 provided on the downstream side of the entrance section 370. In this case, the flow time required to reach the fourth operating port 34C is set to be shorter when passing through the first route than when passing through the second route.

Therefore, when a prize is won to the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, when trying to win a prize to the fourth operating port 34C, it is better to let the prize pass through the first route, and then to the second route. It becomes possible to generate a winning prize to the fourth operating port 34C more quickly than when the winning part passes through the fourth operating port 34C. As a result, it is possible to start the game round on the second special map side earlier in the first route than in the second route, and the game round on the second special map side can start earlier than the game round on the first special map side. is also more likely to finish first. This makes it easier to implement the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special deviation result. Therefore, in a configuration where it is more advantageous to start the game round on the second special figure side immediately after the game round on the first special figure side has started, the game round on the second special figure side will depend on the behavior of the game ball. Since the start timings are different, it is possible to add a game where you can enjoy the behavior of game balls in addition to the variable display time and lottery results, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a plurality of actuation ports on the second special figure side are provided. FIG. 108(a) is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are integrated into the operating port case and provided in the lower region PE4. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the second operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a. However, the electric accessory 34a is not operated through a lottery on the general drawing side when a prize is won in the through gate 35, but is activated when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 without going through a lottery. be done. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 sec) has elapsed from the winning timing to the first operating port 33, the electric accessory 34a is brought into a closed state. In other words, the operation of the electric accessory 34a is automatically set to the open state based on winning to the first operating port 33, and automatically set to the closed state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The control in this case may be performed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, or the opening/closing control may be performed electrically via an independent board without going through the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. It's okay.

In the right side area PE3 of the game board 24, a fifth operating port 34D is provided as an operating port on the second special figure side, which is provided separately from the second operating port 34. A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the fifth operating port 34D in the right region PE3. An electric accessory 34d is provided in the fifth operating port 34D, and a lottery on the common map side is held when a prize is won in the through gate 35, and when the lottery is won, the electric accessory 34d is opened. It is said that Note that the relationship between the electric accessory 34d and the through gate 35 is the same as the relationship between the electric accessory 34a and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 108(b), in a situation where the electric accessory 34d is in the closed state, the distance between the nail 24b provided upstream of the fifth operating port 34D and the electric accessory 34d is equal to the distance of the game ball. By becoming shorter than the diameter, winning to the fifth operating port 34D is restricted, and by opening the electric accessory 34d, winning to the fifth operating port 34D is permitted.

In this embodiment, a high-frequency support state and a low-frequency support state are set so that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34d is in the open state is relatively high or low. The configuration for setting the high or low frequency is well known and will not be explained here, but it may be realized by changing the probability of winning or losing on the general drawing side, or it may be realized by changing the probability of winning or losing on the general drawing side. The structure may be realized by changing the variable display time, the structure may be realized by changing the opening/closing manner of the electric accessory 34d, or the structure may be realized by a combination of these. It may also be a configuration.

Although detailed explanation with figures is omitted, in this embodiment, in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the game state transition process (FIG. 21), the current opening/closing execution mode is set to the first special figure side as a predetermined game result. Or, when the game result on the second special figure side is the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, the configuration is such that the electric accessory 34d shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, when the first special figure side or the second special figure side is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the system shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, the probability and distribution table of the validity determination on the first special symbol side, and the probability and distribution table of the validity determination on the second special symbol side are the same as those of the above-mentioned first embodiment. In other words, the judgment on the first special figure side almost gives an unfavorable special result, and the judgment on the second special figure side almost gives an advantageous special result.

The gameplay of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 109.

In the low-frequency support mode, even if a game ball is fired aiming at the right area PE3 and a winning occurs in the through gate 35, the prize ball will not be paid out based on the winning, and the electric ball will not be paid out based on the winning. The frequency with which the accessory 34d is left open is low, and winnings cannot be expected from the fifth actuating port 34D. Furthermore, as in the first embodiment, when the game ball is fired aiming at the right side area PE3, the winning rate to the first operating port 33 is lower than when the game ball is fired aiming at the left side area PE2. The nails 24b and the like are arranged so that winnings to the first operating port 33 do not substantially occur. In other words, if a game is played aiming at the right side area PE3 in the low frequency support mode, the game will be a game in which it is virtually impossible to receive a lottery on the special drawing side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, a game ball is fired aiming at the left side area PE2, and based on winnings in the first operating port 33, a lottery is held on the first special drawing side, and a prize is entered in the first operating port 33. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the second special drawing side is determined by lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 which is opened based on the winning.

In the high-frequency support mode, by firing a game ball aiming at the right side area PE3, a prize is generated in the through gate 35, and the electric accessory 34d is likely to be in an open state based on the prize. Then, it becomes possible to carry out the game round on the second special figure side regardless of the game round on the first special figure side, and it becomes easier to reflect the winning/failure lottery results on the second special figure side. In other words, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result that frequently occurs in the win/fail lottery on the second special symbol side becomes easier to implement. Then, when a V winning occurs during the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed. When the game is played a predetermined number of times in the high-frequency support mode, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, since the probability of the electric accessory 34d being released and the probability of winning the fifth actuation port 34D are not zero, it is also possible to play a game aiming at the right area PE3.

As described above, in this embodiment, there is a state (low frequency support mode) in which the game times on the second special figure side can be performed in relation to the game times on the first special figure side, and Since it has a state in which the game times on the side can be played independently of the game times on the first special drawing side, the so-called consecutive winning zone (high frequency support mode).

In particular, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning or losing the lottery on the second special map side is not changed. Furthermore, the length of the selected variable display time does not change regardless of the number of times the game is played. Therefore, it is possible to provide a substantial consecutive win zone without changing the winning probability or variable display time, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

In the low-frequency support mode, the recommended game is a left-handed game in which a prize is won in the second operating port 34 through a winning in the first operating port 33, but when hitting right, a player enters the fifth operating port 34D. Although the winning probability is not zero and the frequency is relatively low, it is possible to play the game round on the second special figure side without going through the game round on the first special figure side. Since the winning/failure lottery on the second special drawing side is set so that the result is almost an advantageous special winning result, the game round on the second special drawing side can be played without going through the playing round on the first special drawing side. If implemented, it will be possible to benefit from the advantageous special outlier results. In other words, even in the low-frequency support mode, it is not a left-handed game where you wait for the result of the game round on the second special figure side to be reflected in relation to the game round on the first special figure side, but the 5th special figure side. It is also possible to play a right-handed game in which the player waits for a prize to enter the operating port 34D, depending on the player's preference. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to select the desired game, and it is possible to respond to various needs. In addition, even during the high frequency support mode, a left-handed game in which a game round on the second special figure side is executed via a game round on the first special figure side is also possible. In this case, since the game result on the second special figure side will be reflected with the same probability as during the low frequency support mode, the benefit for the player is low. However, for example, if the time when you have to leave the store is approaching, and you want to play only the first special drawing side and leave the store without leaving the consecutive winning zone, you can use high-frequency support. It can be said that there is also significance in playing left-handed games. From this point of view, it is possible to respond to a wide variety of needs.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment, when the first long variation on the first special figure side is selected or the second short variation on the second special figure side is selected, the Although the length of the variable display time is set so that the game round on the second special figure side ends first regardless of the winning timing, this may be changed as follows. That is, if the winning timing to the second operating port 34 is later than the predetermined timing, such as when the electric accessory 34a is about to enter the closed state, Even if the first long variation is selected on the first special figure side or the second short variation is selected on the second special figure side, the game round on the first special figure side will end first. You may set each variable display time and the period in which the open state of the electric accessory 34a is maintained. In this way, even if the same variable display time is set in the game round on the second special figure side, the game on the second special figure side can be started at the earliest possible timing after the game round on the first special figure side has started. It is more advantageous for the player to start the game. Therefore, if the player enters the second operating port 34 immediately after winning the first operating port 33, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that is more advantageous to the player.

In the above-mentioned gameplay, the fluctuation display time of the game round on the first special figure side is long, the fluctuating display time of the game round on the second special figure side is short, and the fluctuation display time of the game round on the second special figure side is short. The game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the first special figure side due to either the early start timing. That is, in addition to the items selected on the gaming machine side such as the length of the variable display time of both game times, the player's firing operation such as the start timing of the second special figure side, that is, the winning timing at the second operating port 34. Since it includes matters related to players, it is possible to leave room for players to intervene and encourage active participation in the game.

(2) In the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result or the disadvantageous special winning result, when a V winning occurs in the second variable winning device 32B, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is implemented as the next opening/closing execution mode. However, for example, if a V win occurs in a predetermined round (for example, the first round) of the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result or disadvantageous special losing result, the winning result after the predetermined round of the opening/closing execution mode is A configuration may be adopted in which rounds (second and subsequent rounds) are performed.

(3) In the opening/closing execution mode based on advantageous special losing results and disadvantageous special losing results, the probability that a V win will occur is arbitrary, and may be changed according to the designed gaming experience. However, if it is made too easy for V-wins to occur, the opening/closing execution mode based on V-winnings may be implemented frequently, and the batting rate may rise extremely. Therefore, by setting the V winning rate to, for example, a predetermined value or less (1/10 or less), it is possible to realize the above-mentioned excellent gameplay while suppressing a rise in the ball exit rate.

(4) The positional relationship between the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above. For example, the first variable winning device 32A may be arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 32B, or both variable winning devices 32A, 32B may be arranged side by side. Furthermore, although both the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are placed in the lower area PE4, they may be placed in areas PE1, PE2, and PE3 that are different from the lower area PE4. However, they may be placed in different areas. For example, the first variable winning device 32A may be placed in the lower area PE4, and the second variable winning device 32B may be placed in the left side area PE2 or the right side area PE3, or it may be placed in the opposite positional relationship. good. Further, both variable winning devices 32A and 32B may be arranged in the left side area PE2 and right side area PE3, respectively, or both or one of them may be arranged in the upper area PE1. Among these, by arranging both variable winning devices 32A and 32B so that they can be fired separately (arrangement in which firing aiming at one does not reach the other), it is possible to generate a V winning based on a special winning result. It becomes possible to play the game while clearly distinguishing the gameplay between the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result. Conversely, by placing the shot in a position where it is difficult or impossible to separate the shots (a position where firing aimed at one will reach the other), for example, an opening/closing execution mode that generates a V winning and an opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning. This makes it possible to play the series of games more smoothly.

In each of the embodiments described above, the opening/closing execution mode based on the special deviation result is frequently implemented. Therefore, in relation to the ball entry section for acquiring the holding information, such as the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, ) and the second variable winning device 32B for generating V winnings are arranged in such a way that it is difficult or impossible to separate them, so that the second variable winning device 32B, which is frequently executed, can acquire pending information. It is also possible to use the prize ball obtained by winning the second variable prize winning device 32B during the opening/closing execution mode to assist the ball held. Conversely, the ball entry part for acquiring pending information and the second variable winning device 32B for generating a V winning are arranged so that they can be fired separately (if the ball is fired aiming at one, it will not reach the other). arrangement), it is possible to prevent extra prize balls (prize balls based on winnings to the second variable winning device 32B) from being awarded during a game in which reservation information is acquired; If you try to win with the variable winning device 32B, it will be necessary to change the firing intensity, so unless you aim intentionally, it will be difficult for V winnings to occur during the opening/closing execution mode, which is a low distribution mode.

(5) In the above-mentioned first embodiment, etc., the configuration is such that the jackpot result, unfavorable special losing result, advantageous special losing result, and normal losing result are set as the game results of the first special drawing and the second special drawing. However, the game result on the first special figure side may be only a disadvantageous special lose result, and the game result on the second special figure side may be only an advantageous special lose result. In addition, from the perspective of gameplay, such as how to implement the opening/closing execution mode of the advantageous special winning result on the second special drawing side, the game result on the first special drawing side is not only the disadvantageous special winning result but also the normal winning result. It is also possible to include the configuration. This is because if the first special figure side has a normal winning result, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result of the second special figure side is carried out even if the game round of the first special figure side ends first.

(6) A first game counter and a second game counter are provided separately, the number of games played on the first special figure side is specified by the first game counter, and the number of games played on the second special figure side is specified as the number of games played on the second special figure side. Although the configuration is such that the number of games played is specified by a number of times counter, it may be possible to specify the number of times played for both by one counter. For example, if the game round on the first special figure side is played but the game round on the second special figure side is not played, the first game round counter is incremented, but the second game round counter is Although the values are not added and a deviation occurs between the two counters, by doing as described above, it is possible to avoid an event where the variable display time does not match the design due to the deviation.

However, as in the embodiment described above, by adopting a configuration that allows for a discrepancy between the first game counter and the second game counter, the following games can also be realized. For example, a game is played in which a prize is generated in the first operating port 33, but a prize is not generated in the second operating port 34, and only the first game counter is incremented. For example, in a situation where the second game counter is 10, if only the first game counter is incremented to 101, the variable display time of the first special drawing side game will be set according to the second zone. On the other hand, in the game round on the second special figure side, the variable display time is set according to the first zone. Then, if you return to the game where the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side are played in parallel, there will be 10 game times (the first game time counter is 101 to 110, The 2nd game counter is 11-20) is the zone where the set of 1st length variation and 2nd length variation is likely to be selected, and the 11th to 90th time (1st game counter is 111-190, 2nd game counter is 21 to 100) is the zone where the set of the first short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation is likely to be selected, and from the 91st to the 100th game (the first game counter is 191 to 200, the second game counter is 101 to 110) The set of the first short fluctuation and the second short fluctuation is the zone that is likely to be selected, and the 101st to 110th (first game counter is 201 to 210, second game counter is 111 to 120) is the first long fluctuation. The set of second length fluctuations is a zone that is likely to be selected. In other words, if the configuration is such that a zone where the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first is realized by the length of the variable display time on the first special figure side and the length or shortness of the variable display time on the second special figure side. , due to a discrepancy between the two game counters, the zone in which the game times on the second special figure side are likely to end first is changed to the zone realized by the setting of the variable display time on the first special figure side (in the above example, The first game counter is 101-110, 201-210, the second game counter is 11-20, 111-120), and the zone realized by setting the variable display time on the second special drawing side (the above In the example, the first game counter is a zone of 191 to 200, and the second game counter is a zone of 101 to 110). In this way, it is also possible to intentionally adjust the zone in which the game round on the second special figure side ends first.

(7) In the variable display time table (Fig. 29) of the first embodiment, etc., if the first length variation is set as the variable display time on the first special figure side, or the variable display time on the second special figure side When the second short variation is set as the time, the game round on the second special figure side ends first in either case, but if the first special figure side is the first long variation and the second When the special figure side has the second short fluctuation, it may be configured such that the game round of the second special figure side ends first.

Furthermore, by adjusting the variable display time of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it may be configured to cause an event in which the game round of the second special symbol ends first. Specifically, for example, the variable display time on the second special figure side is made constant with the second long variation. Then, the variation display time on the first special figure side is configured such that either the first short variation or the second long variation is selected, and when the first short variation is selected, the first special figure side The game round ends first, and when the first length variation is selected, the game round on the second special symbol side ends first. In this way, the event that the game round on the second special figure side ends first becomes more likely to occur as the length of the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side becomes longer. The contents of the game session become easier to understand.

(8) The display times of each of the first short variation, first long variation, second short variation, and second long variation are merely examples, and may be longer than those listed above within the scope of each invention. It's fine, and it can be short. Also, if the first special figure side has the first length variation, the game cycle of the second special figure side will change regardless of the start timing of the game cycle of the second special figure side or the length of the variable display time of the second special figure side. Although it is configured to end first, depending on the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side and the length of the variable display time on the second special figure side, whether the game round on the second special figure side ends first or not. The lengths of the first length fluctuations may be set so that the first length fluctuations are different. In addition, if it is the second short variation on the second special figure side, the game cycle on the second special figure side regardless of the start timing of the game cycle on the second special figure side or the length of the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side. However, depending on the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side and the length of the variable display time on the first special figure side, the game round on the second special figure side may end first. The length of the second short fluctuation may be set so that the length of the second short fluctuation is different.

(9) The opening/closing manner of each opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the above. For example, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning may be the 8-round jackpot result, or the opening/closing execution mode with an opening/closing mode different from the 16-round opening/closing execution mode or the 8-round opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result. You can also use it as Furthermore, the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result may be provided with an opening/closing mode different from the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds. For example, a 2-round opening/closing execution mode may be provided, which has fewer rounds than 16 rounds or 8 rounds. Further, even if the number of rounds is the same, opening/closing execution modes may be provided in which the opening/closing manner of the big prize opening 321 is different. For example, the opening mode of the big prize opening 321 may include a mode in which it is opened for a long time and a mode in which it is opened for a short time, and the opening/closing mode may be varied depending on a combination of these modes. In addition, the opening and closing of the big prize opening 321 during one round is not limited to one time, but may be performed multiple times, and in this case, the opening and closing mode may also be a combination of the above-mentioned mode in which it is opened for a long time and mode in which it is opened for a short time. good. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special result, it may be possible to open/close multiple times during one round.

(10) The first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are separately provided, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result is executed by the second variable winning device 32B. It is also possible to adopt a configuration realized by. In this case, a V-winning area where a V-winning is possible is provided in the one variable winning device, and whether or not a V-winning occurs is varied depending on the opening/closing manner of the variable winning device and the allocation part to the V-winning area. It is good to have a configuration.

(11) Although the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B have a configuration in which 15 prize balls are paid out no matter which one wins, the number of prize balls may be made different. For example, if the number of prize balls of the second variable winning device 32B is smaller than the prize balls of the first variable winning device 32A, the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or V winning and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, A clear distinction can be made between the opening/closing execution mode for awarding benefits and the opening/closing execution mode for generating V winnings. In this way, for example, it is possible to suppress the act of trying to obtain a prize ball by aiming at the opening/closing execution mode based on the special result.

(12) Utilizing the positional relationship between the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35, when a game round on the second special drawing side is started, the game on the first special drawing side must be started. However, the determination of whether or not a prize is won at the second operating port 34 is determined mechanically based on the winning at the first operating port 33, rather than using the electric accessory 34a. A configuration may also be adopted in which winnings to the two operating ports 34 are allowed. For example, the electric accessory 34a is brought into an open state by using the movement or weight of a game ball that has entered the first operating port 33, and after a predetermined period, the electric accessory 34a is brought into a closed state by using the movement or weight of the game ball. It may also be a so-called non-electric accessory. This configuration includes, for example, providing a link mechanism for opening the electric accessory 34a at a position where the game ball that has won the first operating port 33 passes immediately after winning the first operating port 33, in a path through which the game ball passes, The electric accessory 34a is brought into an open state by the opening link mechanism. Further, a link mechanism for closing the electric accessory 34a is provided at a position where the game ball passes after a predetermined period from the position where the link mechanism for opening is provided, and the electric accessory 34a is closed by the link mechanism for closing. It may also be configured to be in a closed state.

(13) In the variable display time table of FIG. 29, the second zone (for example, the first game counter = 101 to 110, 201 to 210, etc.) where the game times on the second special figure side tend to end first is as described above. It is not limited to this, and can be changed depending on the designed gameplay. For example, the second zone may not be provided up to the ceiling (from 501), or as in the second embodiment, the second zone may be set as a continuous winning zone after a jackpot, and the smaller the value of each game counter, the second special feature. A configuration may be adopted in which the game round on the side shown in the figure is more likely to be completed first. In addition, there are multiple zones in which the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first, and each zone has a configuration in which the probability that the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first is different (the first A configuration in which the probabilities of selecting the long variation and the second short variation may be different may be used.

Furthermore, in each zone, the same numerical value was set for the first game counter and the second game counter, but by setting different numerical values, the number of games in which the first length variation is likely to be selected, and the second The number of games in which short fluctuations are likely to be selected may be different. Even if the first long variation is selected or the second short variation is selected, the game round on the second special figure side ends first, so opening and closing based on the advantageous special winning result Although the event that makes it easier to implement the execution mode is the same, the length of the performance duration of the game round by each symbol row Z1 to Z3 may be different. Therefore, by doing as described above, it is possible to provide a difference in relation to the performance, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

(14) The special table, such as in the second embodiment, may be configured to be set when the power is turned on. In this way, a configuration in which the player who plays the game first after the game hall opens can be realized without changing the probability of winning or losing the lottery.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the suspension information is not stored in a situation where each game round is being played, but the suspension information may be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4).

In this case, if the variable display time is set to be different depending on the number of stored hold information, which of the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side will end first? It is also possible to change the relationship such as , depending on the number of pending information. For example, if the variable display time of the game times on the second special figure side is made shorter as the number of pending information on the second special figure side increases, the more the number of pending information on the second special figure side It is easier to finish the game round on the side shown in the figure first. In addition, if the variable display time of the game times on the first special symbol side is made to be shorter as the number of pending information on the first special symbol side is larger, the more the number of pending information on the first special symbol side is, the more the first special symbol is displayed. It is easier to finish the game on the outside side of the figure first.

(16) In the second variable prize winning device 32B, the timing at which the shutter 358 is drive-controlled is the same timing for each opening/closing execution mode, and the shutter 358 is configured to perform a fixed operation from the opening/closing execution mode start timing. Any configuration may be used as long as a certain operation is performed from a predetermined timing. For example, the shutter 358 may be configured to operate after a predetermined period from the start timing of the game round on the first special figure side or the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side. In this way, it is possible to change the likelihood of V winnings occurring depending on the length of the variable display time of each game.

(17) During a game round on the first special figure side that is executed based on a winning in the first operating opening 33, how to make a winning in the second operating opening 34 and execute a game round on the second special figure side. We have explained the gameplay, such as whether to end the game round on the second special figure side before the game round on the first special figure side. The game may be ended before a predetermined state different from the previous one. For example, a state is set in which a predetermined performance is executed for a predetermined period on the display screen G, and a prize is entered into the second actuation port 34 during the state, and the game round on the second special drawing side based on the prize is set. If the predetermined performance ends before the predetermined period in which it is performed, a bonus may be given as a game result on the second special figure side (an opening/closing execution mode based on the game result is implemented). In addition, a sorting device is provided upstream of the second variable winning device 32B, and the game balls are sorted by the sorting device into a mode in which the game balls are distributed to the second variable winning device 32B and a mode in which they are not distributed to the second variable winning device 32B. Set. Then, during the period in which the distribution is made to the second variable winning device 32B, when the game round on the second special drawing side ends, winning to the second variable winning device 32B is allowed and a V winning occurs. It may also be configured to obtain.

(18) In the lottery system on the regular map side, when determining the variable display time, a counter provided for setting the variable display time may be obtained without using the electric accessory opening counter C4.

(19) In the lottery system on the common map side, the number of openings, opening duration, and variable display time of the electric accessory 34a are not limited to those described above, and may be changed without departing from the effects of the invention.

(20) As in the thirteenth embodiment, by using the second operating port 34 and the fifth operating port 34D, the second special drawing side can only be used while the first special drawing side game round is being executed. We have set a state in which the game round cannot be carried out, and a state in which the game round on the second special figure side can be carried out regardless of whether or not the game round on the first special figure side is carried out, but as a configuration that produces this effect, For example, the following changes may be made. That is, during the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operating port 34 is kept in an open state for a predetermined period when a prize is won in the first operating port 33, as in the thirteenth embodiment. The configuration is as follows. Based on the transition to the high-frequency support mode, the system is configured to frequently allow winnings into the second operating port 34. Even if this is done, in the low-frequency support mode, winnings to the second operating port 34 will not occur unless winnings are won to the first operating port 33, and in the high-frequency support mode, winnings will not occur to the second operating port 34. It is possible to generate a prize at the second operation opening 34 without going through the winning at the opening 33. In this case, the position of the through gate 35 may be directly above the first operating port 33 as in the first embodiment, or may be provided in the right side region PE3 as in the thirteenth embodiment.

(21) Based on the fact that the V winning flag is stored during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the start of each game round is restricted in the first game round control process and the second game round control process (step A configuration in which an affirmative determination is made in step S501 or step S801 may be adopted. By storing the V winning flag, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning flag is implemented in the gaming state transition process of the normal process that is started next. However, if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode in which the V winning flag is stored and before the next game state transition process, the first special symbol is This is because the game round on the side and the game round on the second special figure side can be started. In the above embodiment, although the game round is started even in such a situation, an affirmative determination is made in step S501 or step S801 of each subsequent game round control process, and the game round does not progress (does not end). ) until the opening/closing execution mode ends.

(22) The probability of being allocated to the 16th round jackpot result will be different depending on whether the first special drawing side determines whether it is a jackpot or the second special drawing side which results in a jackpot result. Although the configuration is such that the superiority of the second special drawing side is ensured, the distribution destination and distribution rate of the jackpot results may be different from those described above. For example, a 2-round jackpot result in which two round games are played is set as the destination of the jackpot result. Then, if the first special symbol side determines whether or not it is a jackpot, it is set so that it is likely to be sorted into the second round jackpot result. In this way, the superiority of the second special drawing side can be more clearly ensured.

(23) A support lottery on the general map side is carried out based on the winnings in the through gate 35, and if a winner is won in the support lottery, the electric accessory 34a is opened and the prize is allowed to be won in the second operating port 34. However, after winning the support lottery, the electric accessory 34a may be opened by satisfying a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the game ball has passed through a predetermined passing portion, and when the game ball passes through the predetermined passing portion, winning to the second operating port 34 is permitted. In this case, if the predetermined passing portion is provided at the position where the through gate 35 is provided in the first embodiment (right above the first operating port 33), the winning entry to the first operating port 33 The electric accessory 34a is configured to be opened. The through gate 35 may be placed directly above the first operating port 33 (either above or below the predetermined passage portion), as in the first embodiment, or may be placed directly above the first operating port 33. It may be placed at a position other than the above, and a position through which the game ball passes when the game ball is being fired aiming at the first operating port 33 (for example, left side area PE2).

(24) Regarding the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result is implemented, the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode ends (the timing at which the ending period ends) ) may be configured to end the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this way, the attention of the player who is enjoying watching the fluctuating display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is prevented from shifting to the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result that is carried out every time. , it becomes possible to fully enjoy the performance.

(25) When implementing the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result, the opening command may not be set in step S1010 in the gaming state transition process, or the external signal may not be set in step S1011. If the opening command is not set, it will be possible to reduce the number of output/receive commands in the opening/closing execution mode based on unfavorable special failure results, which is executed every time. It is also possible to eliminate the trouble of having to receive an external signal of the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special result every time on the hall computer of the game hall.

(26) In a configuration in which multiple types of unfavorable special winning results on the first special drawing side are provided to realize gameplay according to the types of these unfavorable special winning results, there are also multiple disadvantageous special winning results on the second special drawing side. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which different types are provided, and when the unfavorable special winning result on the second special figure side is reflected, the game performance is realized according to the type. In addition, multiple types of advantageous special losing results for either or both of the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side are set, and when these advantageous special drawing results are reflected, the gameplay is adjusted according to the type. A configuration that realizes this may also be used.

(27) In the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot result, the transition is made to the advantageous state 603. It is also possible to have a configuration in which no migration occurs. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, the establishment of the first condition is a prerequisite for transition to the advantageous state 603, and a configuration is constructed that allows transition to the advantageous state 603 when the first condition is satisfied. I can do it.

(28) In the sixth to ninth embodiments, the gaming state is always set to the normal state 601 after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot ends, but the gaming state can be set to the advantageous state 603. You can also use it as In this case, for example, the gaming state may be divided into a normal state 601 or an advantageous state 603 based on the judgment result of the second special symbol that triggered the occurrence of the V jackpot (type of special winning result). Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the state can be set to the precursor state 602. In this case, the transition destination may be selected from two types of states, the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602, or the transition destination may be selected from three types of states including the advantageous state 603. .

(29) In the sixth embodiment, the first and second conditions are satisfied that a specific value is acquired as the conditional random number counter CC. The result of judging whether the drawing is correct or not becomes a specific result (for example, the judgment result of the first special drawing becomes a specific unfavorable special result), or the lottery result of the support lottery becomes a specific result (support result). , a specific value may be acquired as the variation type counter CS, specific variable display time information may be obtained as the variable display time information of the first and/or second special symbol, etc.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, the second condition is different from the first condition, but it may be the same as the first condition.

(31) In the sixth to eighth embodiments described above, the transition to the precursor state 602 or the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b is made based on the fact that the validity determination result of the first special symbol is an unfavorable special result. Although the configuration has been described in which the process of determining whether or not to perform the transition is performed, the trigger for executing the transition determination is not limited to this. For example, the judgment result of the second special symbol may be unfavorable, the specific value may be acquired as the variation type counter CS, or the variation display time information of the first and/or second special symbol may be specified. The trigger may be the acquisition of variable display time information, the lottery result of the support lottery becoming a specific result (support result), etc. In addition, a special random number (dedicated random number for an independent determination trigger, such as a conditional random number counter CC) for drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to make a transition to the precursor state 602 is provided, and a specific value is set as the dedicated random number. The acquisition may be used as an opportunity. Furthermore, the number of support lottery draws (or the number of times the regular game game is executed) from a predetermined timing (immediately after the power is turned on or the end of the jackpot, the first condition is satisfied in the second condition), the first special lottery and/or the first special lottery The trigger may be the fact that the number of executions (or the number of executions of the game) of the two special drawings reaches a specific number of times.

(32) In the sixth embodiment, when the first condition is satisfied, the normal table is maintained as the variable display time table of the first special figure and the second special figure. A configuration may also be adopted in which a precursor table different from the table and the special table is provided, and a transition is made to a state in which the precursor table is selected. The precursor table may be the same as or different from the normal table in terms of the ease with which the specific state occurs (the ease with which the second short fluctuation is obtained). When changing the ease with which specific states occur, the specific state is more likely to occur than in the normal table (the second short variation is more likely to be selected), and the specific state is less likely to occur than in the special table (the second short variation is less likely to be selected). ) structure. As a result, when the first condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy a certain amount of profit, and it is possible to reduce disappointment when the precursor state 602 ends while the second condition is not satisfied.

In the seventh embodiment described above, which includes the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, a configuration may be adopted in which different variable display time tables are selected for the first precursor state 602a and the second precursor state 602b. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the precursor table is selected in one of the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, and the normal table is selected in the other. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which mutually different first and second portent tables are provided, and the first portent table is selected in the first portent state 602a, and the second portent table is selected in the second portent state 602b.

(33) In the sixth to eighth embodiments described above, the configuration is such that when the advantageous state 603 ends without winning the V jackpot, the transition is made to the normal state 601, but it may be configured that the transition is made to the precursor state 602. .

(34) In the sixth to eighth embodiments described above, the precursor state 602 is configured to end based on the number of executions of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, but the conditions for ending the precursor state 602 are is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the game of the second special figure is executed becomes the upper limit, the total number of times of the game of the first and second special figures is executed becomes a predetermined upper limit, A different upper limit number may be set for each of the game times in the figure, and one or both of the game times of the first and second special symbols may reach the respective upper limit numbers, etc., as a condition for ending the precursor state 602. Further, in a configuration including an intermediate table, the number of times the variable display time is acquired from the intermediate table may be the upper limit. Furthermore, the upper limit number may be configured to set the number of executions of the validity judgment of at least one of the first and second special drawings, or the number of drawings of the support lottery (or the number of executions of the general drawing game). It may also be a configuration. Further, the termination condition may be that the elapsed period of time since the transition to the advantageous state 603 reaches a predetermined period, or that the number of game balls fired after the transition to the advantageous state 603 reaches a predetermined number.

(35) In the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the advantageous state 603 is configured to end based on the number of executions of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, but the conditions for ending the advantageous state 603 are is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the game of the second special figure is executed becomes the upper limit, the total number of times of the game of the first and second special figures is executed becomes a predetermined upper limit, Separate upper limit numbers are set for the game times in the figure, and one or both of the game times of the first and second special figures will be the respective upper limit numbers, and the number of acquisition times of the variable display time from the special table will be set. The condition for ending the advantageous state 603 may be that the number reaches the upper limit. In addition, the upper limit number may be set to the number of times the judgment of the validity of at least one of the first and second special drawings is executed, and furthermore, the number of drawings for the support lottery (or the number of times the general drawing game is executed) may be set. It is also possible to configure the settings.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous state 603 is not limited to the number of times the game of the second special figure is executed to be the upper limit, but the number of times of the game of the first special figure to be executed is the upper limit. may be the upper limit number.

(36) In the sixth to tenth embodiments, the advantageous state 603 ends based on the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol is played, but instead of or in addition to this, The advantageous state 603 may be terminated based on the falling lottery.

(37) In the sixth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous state 603 occurs when the first and second conditions are satisfied in stages, but the advantageous state 603 is reached when the respective conditions are satisfied in stages. It may be configured such that the game ends (transfers to a gaming state with a lower advantage).

(38) In the seventh to ninth embodiments described above, the condition for transition to the advantageous state 603 is that the judgment result of the first special symbol becomes a specific special failure result. It is not limited. For example, the judgment result of the second special symbol may be a specific special error result, a specific value may be acquired as the variation type counter CS, or the variation display time information of the first and/or second special symbol may be The transition condition may be that specific variable display time information is acquired, that the lottery result of the support lottery becomes a specific result (support result), etc.

(39) In the seventh embodiment, the condition for transition to the first and second portent states 602a and 602b is that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a specific unfavorable special result. Although the configuration is such that the conditions for promotion from the precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b and the conditions for demotion from the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a are set, at least these transition conditions, promotion conditions, and demotion conditions In one, for example, the judgment result of the second special drawing will be a specific result (for example, a specific advantageous special losing result), or the lottery result of the support lottery will be a specific result (support result). , the condition may be that a specific value is acquired as the variation type counter CS. Furthermore, a dedicated random number (an independent dedicated random number such as the conditional random number counter CC of the sixth embodiment) is provided for the above-mentioned transition conditions, etc., and a condition is set that a specific value is acquired as the dedicated random number. good.

(40) In the seventh embodiment, as the second condition (condition for transition to advantageous state 603) is changed, the ease with which the second condition is satisfied (ease of transition to advantageous state 603) Although the second condition is configured to change, the ease with which the second condition is satisfied may remain unchanged and only the content of the condition changes. However, considering the player's interest in changes in the second condition, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

Alternatively, when the change condition is satisfied, the content of the second condition may remain unchanged and the ease with which the second condition is satisfied may be changed. Such configurations include, for example, changing the probability of the second condition being met, changing the frequency of execution of the process of determining whether or not the second condition is satisfied, and changing the trigger for executing the determination process. A possible configuration is possible.

As a configuration for changing the probability that the second condition is satisfied or changing the execution frequency of the above-mentioned determination process, for example, specific variable display time information is acquired as variable display time information of the game time of the first special symbol. With this as the second condition and the trigger for executing the above-mentioned determination process, it is possible to select multiple pieces of information that have different ease of selection of specific variable display time information (different numbers of variable type counters CSA are assigned to specific variable display time information). A conceivable configuration is to provide a variable display time table for obtaining variable display time information, and to switch the variable display time table from which variable display time information is obtained based on a change condition being satisfied.

In addition, as a configuration for changing the execution trigger of the above-mentioned determination process, for example, the first execution trigger is when the validity determination result of the first special symbol becomes the first specific special failure result, and the first execution trigger is when the validity determination result of the first special symbol is Based on the fact that the change condition is satisfied, the first and second A conceivable configuration is such that switching is performed between execution triggers.

(41) In the seventh embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is switched from the second condition A to the second condition B when the promotion condition is satisfied, but the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 When multiple conditions are set for , the promotion condition is established in a situation where the transition is made to the advantageous state 603 when any one of them is satisfied, and the second condition A is the transition condition. In this case, the second condition B may be added to the transition conditions to increase the number of conditions. In this case, the number of conditions to be added may be one or more.

This also applies when the demotion conditions are met, and if the demotion conditions are met in a situation where the second conditions A and B are transition conditions, either of those conditions A or B is set as the transition condition. It is also possible to reduce the number of conditions by excluding the above conditions.

(42) In the seventh embodiment, the conditions for transition to the advantageous state 603 are changed when the change conditions (promotion conditions, demotion conditions) are satisfied, but the conditions for ending the precursor state 602 and the advantageous state A configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of 603 is changed.

Even in this case, the configuration may be such that the ease with which the change condition is met remains unchanged and only the content of the condition changes. Alternatively, the content of the change condition may be unchanged, but the ease with which it is satisfied may be changed. Furthermore, when a plurality of conditions are set as the end conditions for the precursor state 602 or the advantageous state 603, the modification condition is The configuration may be such that termination conditions are added or deleted based on the fact that .

(43) In the above-mentioned eighth embodiment, the addition condition is that the validity determination result of the first special symbol is a specific unfavorable special failure result, but the addition condition is not limited to this. The judgment result of the second special drawing will be a specific result (for example, a specific advantageous special losing result), the lottery result of the support lottery will be a specific result (support result), and the fluctuation type counter CS Additional conditions may include that a specific value is acquired, that specific variable display time information is acquired as the variable display time information of the first and/or second special symbol, etc. Further, a dedicated random number (an independent dedicated random number such as the conditional random number counter CC of the sixth embodiment) is provided for the above-mentioned additional conditions, etc., and the additional condition is that a specific value is obtained as the dedicated random number. Good too.

(44) In the eighth embodiment described above, the fact that the judgment result of the first special symbol is unfavorable special is used as a trigger for executing the judgment process to judge whether the addition condition is satisfied or not, but the addition judgment The trigger for execution is not limited to this. For example, the judgment result of the second special drawing may be a disadvantageous special result, a specific value may be obtained as the fluctuation type counter CS, the lottery result of the support lottery may be a specific result (support result), etc. You can also use it as In addition, a special random number (dedicated random number for an independent determination trigger such as a conditional random number counter CC) for drawing lots to determine whether or not to perform an additional determination is provided, and a specific value is obtained as the dedicated random number. It can also be used as an opportunity.

Furthermore, the number of times support lottery is performed (or the number of times the normal pattern game is executed) from a predetermined timing (for example, the start of the advantageous state 603), the number of times the judgment of the validity of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern is performed (or The trigger may be that the number of times the game is played reaches a specific number of times. In this case, the execution trigger may be set so that the number of executions of the above-mentioned determination process from the start to the end of the advantageous state 603 is one time, or the execution trigger may be set so that the number of executions is multiple times. good. In addition, the execution trigger for the above judgment process is set so that the result of the judgment of the first special drawing is unfavorable and special (the above judgment process is executed almost every time the judgment of the judgment of the first special drawing is carried out). If the number of remaining game rounds of the first special figure up to the upper limit number is less than or equal to a predetermined number, or after transitioning to an advantageous state 603, the execution of the game round of the first special figure. The configuration may be such that the execution of the determination process is started when the number of times exceeds a predetermined number.

(45) In the eighth embodiment, based on the satisfaction of the addition condition, the remaining number of times the second special symbol is played until the number of times the game reaches the upper limit is added, but for example, In a configuration in which the number of times the second special symbol is played after transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is counted up, an upper limit number may be added. Furthermore, in a configuration having a reduction condition, the upper limit number may be reduced based on the establishment of the condition.

(46) In the eighth embodiment, the number of additions is fixed at a predetermined number (5 times), but there are multiple types of numbers that can be added, and one number is selected from among these numbers. , the selected number may be added as an additional number. In this case, the selection of the number of additions can be made based on, for example, the validity determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, the type of special winning result). According to this configuration, the number of additions can be randomized, and it is possible to add the fun of not only seeing whether the remaining number of times the advantageous state 603 increases, but also seeing how much the increase will be. can. Similarly, in a configuration in which the remaining number of times or the upper limit number is decreased, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of types of numbers are provided as the number of decreases.

(47) In the eighth embodiment, the prescribed number of times is added based on the satisfaction of the addition condition, but the prescribed number of times may be reset. For example, in a configuration where the initial specified number of times is set to 5, if the additional condition (change condition) is satisfied with 3 times remaining, 5 times is set again, and from the remaining 5 times, the advantageous state 603 It is possible to configure the system so that the game can be played. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of different types of prescribed times are provided as the prescribed number of times that can be reset, and one of these prescribed times is selected and reset. In this case, the prescribed number of times can be selected based on, for example, the validity determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, the type of special failure result). In these cases, the special effect displayed on the display screen G is to set the remaining number of times display 632 to 5 times and then display text such as "Restart!!" to give the impression that the game can be played again from the state of 5 times remaining. Alternatively, the specified number of times can be increased by displaying characters such as "+2 times!!", that is, adding the difference between the remaining number of times when the change condition is met and the remaining number of times after resetting. It may also be something that gives the impression that something has been added.

(48) In the eighth embodiment, the remaining number of times added is effective only in that advantageous state, but if a V jackpot occurs in the advantageous state 603 where the remaining number of times is added, the next The configuration may be such that it can be carried over to the advantageous state 603. Thereby, the presence or absence of a top-up can be reflected in the likelihood of the next V jackpot, improving the interest.

In this case, as the remaining number of times at the start of the next advantageous state 603, the remaining number of times at the time of V jackpot or immediately before the V jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "immediate remaining number of times") may be used as is, or the initial specified number of times may be used as is. A configuration may be adopted in which a number obtained by adding the immediately preceding remaining number of times is used. However, in the case of the former, compare the immediately remaining number of times with the initial specified number of times (5 times), and if the immediately remaining number of times is greater than (or more than) the initial specified number of times, use the linear remaining number of times, and do not exceed the initial specified number of times. In the case of (or in the case of less than), it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the initial specified number of times is used. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the remaining number of times at the start of the advantageous state 603 becoming less than the initial prescribed number of times.

(49) In the eighth embodiment, the top-up specialization state in which it becomes easier to obtain a winning result in the top-up determination, it becomes easier to perform the top-up determination, or both conditions occur. A configuration may also be adopted in which the non-additional specialization state is transitioned to the additional specialization state based on the establishment of a predetermined state transition condition.

In such a configuration, as the predetermined state transition condition, various conditions such as that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol becomes a specific unfavorable special result can be used. Additionally, the specialization state may span multiple gaming sessions or may be limited to one gaming session, and the period that has elapsed from the start of the specialization state will be the predetermined period. It may be terminated based on the

(50) In the eighth embodiment, as the advantageous state 603, a first special gaming state in which an additional lottery is not performed and a second special gaming state in which an additional lottery is performed are set, and the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made. In this case, it may be configured to shift to either the first or second special gaming state. In this case, the degree of advantage excluding the presence or absence of top-up may be the same in the first and second special game states, or may be different.

Further, it is also possible that an additional lottery is held in each of the first and second special gaming states, and the second special gaming state is more likely to be added on than the first special gaming state. Such a configuration may be such that the lottery result of the additional lottery in the second special gaming state is more likely to be an additional lottery result than that in the first special gaming state, or the execution frequency of the additional lottery is higher in the second special gaming state than in the first special gaming state. It is conceivable that there will be more special game states. In a configuration that includes a plurality of special game states in which the presence or absence of top-up and the ease of top-up are different, the configuration may be such that transition between the game states is possible upon satisfaction of promotion conditions or demotion conditions. In these cases, the number of special game states is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(51) In the ninth embodiment, it is configured to determine which of the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b to move to based on the type of special winning result of the second special symbol, but for example, It may be configured to be determined based on the type of special out result of the first special figure, the fluctuation type counter CS, etc. In addition, a dedicated random number (an independent dedicated random number such as the conditional random number counter CC of the sixth embodiment) for selecting which advantageous state 603 to shift to is provided, and the decision is made based on the random number. Good too.

(52) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the second advantageous state 603b occurs when the judgment result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, but the first advantageous state 603a It may be a configuration in which the state shifts to another advantageous state 603 having a different degree of advantage from the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b, or it may be a structure in which the state does not shift to the advantageous state 603.

(53) In the ninth and tenth embodiments, there are two types of advantageous states 603, first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b, but the number of types of advantageous states 603 is not limited to two. , 3 or more.

Further, embodiments other than the ninth and tenth embodiments may be configured to include a plurality of advantageous states 603. In this case, the number of types of advantageous states 603 is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(54) In the above-described tenth embodiment, the frequency of winning to the second operating port 34 is limited by setting the winning probability of the support lottery, but instead of or in addition to this, the variation of the number of regular game games is It may be configured to limit the frequency of winnings to the second actuation port 34 by setting the display time, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a, and the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened.

(55) In the tenth embodiment described above, the frequency of winning to the second operation port 34 is limited by setting the winning probability of the support lottery, but instead of or in addition to this, the A game ball flowing down the first downstream route can win a prize at the second operating port 34, and a gaming ball flowing down a second downstream route different from the first downstream route cannot win a prize at the second operating port 34. After configuring the area PE, a distribution member is provided on the upstream side of the first and second downstream paths, and the game balls flowing down the game area PE are divided into the first downstream path and the second downstream path by the distribution member. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is distributed. In this case, it is possible to limit the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 34 depending on the distribution mode of the distribution member, in other words, the downward flow mode of the game balls, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the flow of the game balls. become. In such a configuration, the game ball flowing down the first flow path is more likely to enter the second operating port 34, and the game ball flowing down the second flow path is more likely to enter the second operating port 34 than the game ball flowing down the first flow path. It is also possible to have a configuration that makes it difficult to win.

In the above configuration, the distribution member may be driven by a drive unit such as an electromagnetic solenoid or an electric motor, or the distribution direction may be switched by a game ball passing through the distribution member. In the former case, the driving section may be electrically connected to the main control device 81 to periodically drive the distribution member. This makes it possible to simplify the control process while changing the distribution mode of the distribution members under the control of the main controller 81.

(56) In the tenth embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery may be changed when the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state 603. For example, before transitioning to the advantageous state 603, there is a high frequency support mode in which support winning results occur with almost 100% probability as in the first embodiment, and after transitioning to advantageous state 603, support winning results occur. It is possible to configure a low-frequency support mode in which the probability that this happens is low.

In addition to lowering the probability of winning the support lottery, the low-frequency support mode may also be one in which the fluctuating display time of the regular game game is increased, or the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is shortened. It may also be a combination of two or more of the three elements.

(57) In the tenth embodiment, the advantageous state 603 includes a plurality of advantageous states 603a and 603b having different degrees of advantage, but the number of advantageous states 603 may be one.

(58) In the tenth embodiment, the configuration shifts to the advantageous state 603 in each of the case where it becomes a V jackpot and the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot. However, the configuration may be such that the transition to the advantageous state 603 occurs only in the latter case. Furthermore, the conditions for transition to the advantageous state 603 are not limited to the V jackpot or the jackpot, but, like other embodiments, the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 may include that the judgment result of the first special symbol becomes a specific disadvantageous special winning result. Various conditions can be used.

(59) In the tenth embodiment described above, the transition to the advantageous state 603 occurs in both the case where the judgment result of the first special drawing is a jackpot and the case where the judgment result of the second special drawing is a jackpot. However, it may be configured to shift to the advantageous state 603 only in the former case. That is, if the transition to the advantageous state 603 is determined based on at least winnings to the first operating port 33, an opportunity for transition determination is properly secured even if the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 34 is limited. becomes possible. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the advantageous state 603 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into an entry port other than the first and second operating ports 33 and 34.

(60) In the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, in the case of a V jackpot, the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made easier than when the judgment result of the first special drawing or the second special drawing is a jackpot. However, the ease of transition to the advantageous state 603 may be made equal for both, or the latter may be configured to transition to the advantageous state 603 more easily than the former.

(61) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that releases a game ball a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when the game is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The following inventions are defined as follows: ``The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is capable of determining whether or not to grant a benefit to a player. There is a known gaming machine that can determine whether or not a game is played (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (a prize entered into the first operating port 33), a game round effect is started on a predetermined notification means (the first special figure display section AS of the main display section 37), and a predetermined In a gaming machine equipped with a game round control means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) that ends the game round performance based on the fulfillment of the termination condition,
A specific event control means (main control unit) that causes a specific event to occur based on a specific condition (winning to the second operating port 34) that is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and ends the specific event based on the elapse of a predetermined period. (a function of executing the second game round control process by the device 81);
A first benefit that grants a benefit to the player if the specific event ends before the end of the game round, but does not grant the benefit to the player if the specific event ends after the end of the game round. A granting means (a function that executes a process of starting an opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result of the game round on the second special figure side in the game state transition process by the main control device 81);
A second benefit that does not provide a benefit to the player when the specific event ends before the end of the game round, but grants a benefit to the player when the specific event ends after the end of the game round. A granting means (a function that executes a process of starting an opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result of the game round on the first special symbol side in the game state transition process by the main control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, depending on the specific event that takes place after the start of a game round, there are cases in which a privilege is awarded by the first privilege granting means and cases in which a privilege is awarded by the second benefit granting means. For example, if the length of the predetermined period in which the specific event lasts is the same, if the specific condition is met immediately after the start of the game session, the specific event will likely end earlier than the game session, and in this case, the first benefit will be granted. The possibility of receiving benefits increases depending on the method. On the other hand, if the timing at which the specific condition is established is delayed after the start of the game round, the possibility that the second benefit granting means will award the benefit increases. Furthermore, for example, when the specific conditions are met at the same timing, the shorter the predetermined period, the more likely the specific event will end earlier than the game round, and the higher the possibility that the first benefit awarding means will award the benefit. Become. On the contrary, the longer the predetermined period is, the higher the possibility that the second benefit granting means will grant the benefit. Furthermore, for example, the longer the length of the game round, the more likely it is that the specific event will end earlier than the game round, and the higher the possibility that the first reward awarding means will award the benefit. Conversely, the shorter the length of the game, the higher the possibility that the second benefit awarding means will award the benefit. In this way, by varying the method for awarding benefits based on the relationship between the end timing of a game round and the end timing of a specific event, it is possible to simply play a game round and receive benefits based on that. It becomes possible to realize innovative gameplay that is far different from conventional games, such as ``ru'', and it can greatly contribute to increasing the attention of the game.

Feature A2. Grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant a benefit to a player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition (a function that executes the processing of step S602 and step S902 by the main controller 81) and,
Privilege granting means (by main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
A special notification execution means (first game round by the main controller 81) that executes a special notification according to the determination result of the grant determination by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. control processing, a function of executing the second game round control processing);
A gaming machine comprising:
a period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of the main controller 81) for storing period information corresponding to the notification period of the special notification executed by the special notification execution means as a period information group;
Acquisition means for acquiring the period information according to the determination result by the provision determination means from the period information storage means (execution of a first variable display time setting process and a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) function) and
Equipped with
The special notification execution means executes the special notification in the notification period according to the period information acquired by the acquisition unit,
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a predetermined grant corresponding result (advantageous special outlier result), the acquisition means obtains the first period information (on the first special drawing side, the first short fluctuation, On the second special map side, when the second short variation) is acquired, it becomes possible to allow the bonus to be granted by the bonus granting means, while the acquisition means allows the bonus to be granted during the first period. If second period information different from the information (first length variation on the first special figure side, second length variation on the second special figure side) is acquired, the benefit is granted by the benefit granting means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special means (a function of executing forced termination processing by the main control device 81) that makes it possible to restrict the operations performed by the main controller 81.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is made based on the award determination by the award determination means, and in the gaming machine in which a privilege is awarded if the result of the award determination is a grant corresponding result, the result of the award determination is a predetermined result. In the case of a grant response result, depending on the length of the special notification, there are cases in which a benefit is granted, and there are cases in which the grant of a benefit is restricted. The length of the special notification is stored as period information in the period information storage means, and by simply changing this period information, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the benefit in the case of a predetermined grant response result. This can be said to be a possible configuration. In this way, it is possible to change the probability of granting a benefit without changing the probability of grant determination by the grant determination means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game that is different from the conventional game of changing the probability of award determination, and it can greatly contribute to increasing the attention of the game.

Feature A3. The special means is when a predetermined special condition (for the first special figure side, the end of the game round on the second special figure side, for the second special figure side, the end of the game round on the first special figure side) is satisfied. If the first period information that causes the special notification to end is acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to allow the benefit to be granted. In the case where the second period information for which the special notification ends after the condition is satisfied is acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to restrict the granting of the benefit. The gaming machine according to feature A2.

According to the above configuration, whether a benefit is awarded or not depends on the relationship between the end timing of the special notification and the timing of the establishment of the special condition. Therefore, not only the length of the period information but also other conditions are related to the awarding of benefits, so that the conditions for awarding benefits can be diversified.

Feature A4. A specific state execution means (first game by the main controller 81) that starts a specific state (game round on the first special figure side) based on a predetermined start opportunity and ends the specific state based on the satisfaction of an ending condition. (function to execute control processing),
The determination condition is satisfied during the specific state,
The special means allows the privilege to be granted when the first period information for which the special notification ends before the end of the specific state is acquired by the acquisition means. On the other hand, if the second period information in which the special notification ends after the end of the specific state is acquired by the acquisition means, the benefit is restricted from being granted. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to enable.

According to the above configuration, since the determination condition is satisfied during the specific state, the special notification is started during the specific state. Then, if the special notification ends before the specific state, a benefit is granted, and if the special notification ends after the specific state, the benefit is not granted. Therefore, not only the relationship between the first period information and the second period information such as the length of the special notification, but also the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied during the specific state (the start timing of the special notification) and the end timing of the specific state ( The duration of a specific state) also plays a role in whether or not a benefit is granted, making it possible to vary the conditions for granting a benefit in a wide variety of ways, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature A5. It is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and includes a first ball entry part (second operating port 34) and a second ball entry part (first operating port 33) into which game balls can enter,
The provision determination means executes the provision determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry section as the determination condition being satisfied;
A second awarding determination, which is different from the awarding determination made by the awarding determination means and determines whether or not to award a benefit to the player, based on the ball entering the second ball entry section; 2 provision determination means (a function for executing the process of step S602 by the main controller 81),
a second special notification execution means for executing a second special notification in accordance with a determination result of the second provision determination by a predetermined notification means based on the second provision determination being performed by the second provision determination means; (Function to execute the first game round control process by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific state execution means executes the second special notification by the second special notification execution unit as the specific state,
In a situation where the second special notification by the second special notification execution means is executed, the ball is allowed to enter the first ball entry section, while the second special notification by the second special notification execution unit is The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the game machine is configured such that entry of the ball into the first ball entry section is restricted in a situation where the game is not being executed.

According to the above configuration, by utilizing the relationship between the special notification based on the ball entering the first ball entering section (first special notification) and the second special notification based on the ball entering the second ball entering section, It is possible to change whether or not a benefit is provided. Since the entry of the ball into the first ball entry section, which triggers the first special notification, is allowed only while the second special notification is being executed, the ball enters the second ball entry section and the 2. While the special notification is being executed, the ball enters the first ball entry section, and a second period is set as the notification period of the first special notification that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entry section. The gameplay is such that a bonus is given by acquiring the first period information instead of the information. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel gameplay by utilizing the relationship between the ball entering a plurality of ball entering sections and the length of the notification period based on the ball entering each ball entering section.

Feature A6. A second period information storage means (fluctuating display time table storage area 223 of the main controller 81) that stores period information corresponding to the notification period of the second special notification executed by the second special notification execution means as a period information group. )and,
a second acquisition means for acquiring the period information according to the determination result by the second provision determination means from the second period information storage means (a function for executing a first variable display time setting process by the main controller 81); and,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, not only the length of the notification period of the first special notification side but also the notification period of the second special notification can be changed. Therefore, the first special notification is carried out during the second special notification that is carried out based on the ball entering the second ball entry section, and the first special notification is carried out before the second special notification that is being carried out. In terms of gameplay in which benefits are awarded upon ending the first special notification, it is important to consider not only whether or not the notification period corresponds to the second period information rather than the first period information regarding the first special notification. 2. Since the length of the special notification can also be related to the granting of benefits, the gameplay is greatly improved.

Feature A7. The period information storage means stores a period information group in a first mode in which the first period information is more easily acquired by the acquisition means than the second period information, and the second period information is more easily acquired by the acquisition means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, characterized in that the game machine stores at least a period information group having a second aspect that is more easily acquired by the acquisition means than the first period information.

According to the above configuration, when the period information is acquired from the period information group that is the first aspect, the benefit is likely to be granted, and when the period information is acquired from the period information group that is the second aspect, the benefit is not granted. less likely to be granted. In this way, the probability of granting a benefit can be changed simply by changing the form of the period information group stored in the period information storage means, so the probability of granting a benefit can be varied without changing the probability of determination of granting. This makes it possible to easily realize innovative gameplay.

Feature A8. The period information storage means stores a specific period information group including a period information group corresponding to the first aspect and a period information group corresponding to the second aspect,
comprising a number grasping means (second game counter) for grasping the number of executions of the special notification from a predetermined timing;
As the specific period information group, a first specific number group in which the period information group in the first mode is likely to be selected and a period information group in the second mode are selected according to the number of times grasped by the frequency grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that a second specific number of times the game is likely to be played is set.

According to the above configuration, since the first period information and the second period information are selected from the specific period information group according to the number of times the special notification has been made, the acquisition means acquires the period information. It is possible to change the probability of awarding a benefit without changing the period information group, and to realize novel gameplay in which the probability of awarding a benefit varies depending on the number of times the special notification is given.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the number of times grasping means is configured to grasp the number of times of the special notification carried out after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the above configuration, the number of special notifications ascertained by the number-of-times-ascertaining means is reset by the granting of the privilege. As a result, when a player selects a gaming machine to sit at, it becomes possible to use the timing of past awarding of benefits as a guide.

Feature A10. The period information storage means stores a first period information group corresponding to the first mode and a second period information group corresponding to the second mode as different types of period information groups,
A first switching means (a variable display time table by the main controller 81) that switches the type of the period information group acquired by the acquisition means from the second period information group to the first period information group based on a first switching trigger. (a function that executes switching processing), and
a second switching means (main switching means) for switching the type of the period information group acquired by the acquisition means from the first period information group to the second period information group based on a second switching trigger different from the first switching trigger; (a function of executing the switching process of the variable display time table by the control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first switching opportunity occurs, the switch is made to the first period information group, which makes it easier to receive benefits, and when the second switching opportunity occurs, the switch is switched to the second period information group, so the benefits are not granted. It becomes difficult. In this way, it is possible to add not only games in which a benefit is expected to be granted based on the result of the grant determination, but also games in which a switching opportunity is desired/not desired to occur, thereby diversifying the games. It will be possible to make a significant contribution to

Feature A11. The first switching means uses the fact that the determination result of the grant determining means is a predetermined first grant correspondence result as a trigger for the first switching,
The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the second switching means uses the fact that the determination result of the grant determining means is a predetermined second grant corresponding result as the trigger for the second switching.

According to the above configuration, if the determination result of the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result, not only will a benefit be granted, but if the determination result is a predetermined first grant correspondence result, the benefit will be more easily granted during the first period. The state is switched to a state in which period information is acquired from the information group. On the other hand, even if a benefit is granted, if the result is a predetermined second grant response result, the period information is switched to a state where the period information is acquired from the second period information group in which the benefit is unlikely to be granted. In this way, if the period information group is switched according to the type of grant response result, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that a benefit is granted, but also to the type of grant response result that triggered the grant of the benefit. It becomes possible.

Feature A12. The benefit granting means grants a first benefit based on the fact that the determination result of the grant determining means is the predetermined first grant corresponding result, and the benefit granting unit grants a first benefit based on the determination result of the grant determining means being the predetermined second grant corresponding result. The configuration is such that a second benefit is granted based on the response result,
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first benefit is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit.

According to the above configuration, once the advantageous first benefit is granted, further benefits are likely to be granted thereafter. In this way, it is possible to add a certain tone to the granting of benefits and improve the gameplay.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) that fires a game ball into a gaming area based on a firing operation by a player;
a first ball entry part (first operating port 33) and a second ball entry part (second operating port 34) that are provided in the gaming area and into which game balls can enter;
A first lottery means (on the first special drawing side in the main control device 81 function to execute validity judgment processing),
A second lottery means (on the second special drawing side in the main control device 81) that executes a second lottery to determine whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section. function to execute validity judgment processing),
a first state in which a benefit is more likely to be awarded based on the first lottery than the second lottery according to the number of draws of the first lottery and the second lottery; A second state in which a benefit is more likely to be granted based on A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first lottery is held to decide whether or not to give a benefit to the player by entering the game ball into the first ball entry section, and the game ball is entered into the second ball entry section. In a game that has multiple lottery systems, where a second lottery is held to determine whether or not a benefit will be given to the player, it is possible to win in either lottery system depending on the number of times the first lottery and second lottery are held. Switching between a first state and a second state, such as whether it is easy or not, is performed. By doing so, the game can be played while the lottery systems that are performed independently are associated with each other. This makes it possible to diversify the games and suitably increase the level of attention to the games.

Feature B2. The switching means switches a state related to awarding a benefit in the first lottery according to the number of draws in the first lottery, and a state related to awarding benefits in the second lottery depending on the number of draws in the second lottery. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to switch between the first state and the second state by switching.

According to the above configuration, the state of the first lottery side is switched depending on the number of draws of the first lottery, and the state of the second lottery side is switched depending on the number of draws of the second lottery, so that the number of draws of both lottery systems can be changed. It becomes possible to manage each independently and switch states. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature B1 of ensuring the independence of both lottery systems and associating both lottery systems with a simple configuration.

Feature B3. A receiving means (an electric accessory) is provided for the second ball receiving part and is switchable between a receiving state in which game balls are accepted into the second ball receiving part and a non-accepting state in which game balls are more difficult to receive than in the receiving state. 34a) and
an acceptance control execution unit (a function for executing electrical service support processing by the main control device 81) that executes switching control between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the acceptance unit;
Equipped with
The acceptance control execution means is a means capable of changing the acceptance means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section (through control by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a prize-winning process for a game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the ball to enter the second ball entry section based on the ball entering the first ball entry section, so compared to a structure in which whether or not the ball can enter is independently determined. , the number of drawings between the first drawing and the second drawing are likely to be correlated. Thereby, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the first state and the second state are switched according to the number of drawings in the first drawing and the second drawing.

Feature B4. Any of the features B1 to B3, wherein the switching means switches between the first state and the second state without changing the probability of winning the first lottery and the probability of winning the second lottery. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the first state in which a benefit is more likely to be awarded in the first lottery and the second state in which a benefit is more likely to be awarded in the second lottery without changing the winning probability of each lottery system. conduct. In this way, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game and to simplify the structure compared to a structure in which the winning probability of each lottery system is changed each time.

Feature B5. A feature characterized in that the winning probability that results in the awarding of a benefit in the first lottery and the winning probability that results in the awarding of the benefit in the second lottery are set to be the same probability. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B4.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of winning in both lottery systems is the same, the probability of awarding a benefit is basically the same depending on which lottery is selected. However, as described in feature B1, the ease with which benefits are granted differs between the first state and the second state. In this way, in a configuration having a plurality of lottery systems with the same probability of winning, it is possible to realize an innovative game experience in which the ease of awarding each benefit is different.

Feature B6. In the first state, the second lottery conducted by the second lottery means is more likely to be invalidated, so that the first lottery is more likely to give a benefit,
In the second state, the first lottery conducted by the first lottery means is more likely to be invalidated, so that the second lottery is more likely to award a benefit. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the above configuration, in the first state, even if both drawings are performed, the second drawing is likely to be invalidated, so the remaining first drawing becomes more likely to give a benefit, and in the second state, both drawings are carried out. However, since the first lottery is more likely to be invalidated, it becomes easier for the remaining second lottery to award benefits. In this way, switching between the first state and the second state can be suitably realized.

Feature B7. In the first state, the second lottery conducted by the second lottery means is likely to be invalidated by the result of the first lottery conducted by the first lottery means. It becomes easier to receive benefits,
In the second state, the second lottery conducted by the first lottery means is likely to be invalidated by the result of the second lottery conducted by the second lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration that makes it easier to receive benefits.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that both lottery systems are being executed in any state, and it is possible to ensure the significance of having both lottery systems. Then, in the first state, the second lottery is invalidated by the first lottery, and in the second state, the first lottery is invalidated by the second lottery, so that the priority of both lottery systems is changed. For example, it is possible to change which lottery system gives a benefit without changing the probability of winning, etc., and it is possible to suitably realize switching between the first state and the second state.

Feature B8. Variable ball entry means (variable prize winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing a round game performed by variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state, and then switches it to the closed state (the main controller 81 controls the big prize opening/closing process) function) and
If the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery is a winning result, transition means for shifting to a specific state (opening/closing execution mode based on jackpot results) in which the round game is played a plurality of times by the variable ball entry means. (Function to execute the game state transition process by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
Feature B1 characterized in that the switching means is capable of switching between the first state and the second state even if the results of the first lottery and the second lottery are non-winning results. The gaming machine according to any one of items B7 to B7.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which if the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery is a winning result, the transition is made to a specific state in which a plurality of round games are played, the first state is such that a benefit is easily given by the first lottery. Switching between the state and the second state in which benefits are more likely to be given through the second lottery can be performed without going through the winning results. If the switching between the first state and the second state is performed by a specific state based on the winning result, it will be necessary to improve the winning probability of the first lottery and the second lottery, and there is a concern that the ball delivery rate will rise. Therefore, with the above configuration, switching between the first state and the second state is performed without passing through the specific state, so it is possible to achieve the effect of feature B1 while avoiding the above-mentioned concerns. becomes.

Feature B9. comprising a number grasping means (a first game counter, a second game counter) for grasping the number of draws of the first lottery and the second lottery conducted after the specific state;
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the switching means executes switching between the first state and the second state based on the number of lottery draws ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means.

According to the above configuration, since switching between the first state and the second state is performed depending on the number of drawings after entering the specific state, when a player selects a gaming machine to be seated, the timing of the past specific state is This can be used as a guideline.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) that launches a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a player's firing operation;
a first ball entry part (first operating port 33) and a second ball entry part (second operating port 34) that are provided in the gaming area and into which game balls can enter;
Variable ball entry means (variable prize winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state;
Variable ball entry control means (a function for executing the grand prize opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81) for performing variable ball entry control between the open state and the closed state of the variable ball entry means;
a first lottery means for executing a first lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section (a function for executing a correctness determination process on the first special drawing side by the main control device 81);
a second lottery means for executing a second lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section (a function for executing the correctness determination process on the second special drawing side by the main control device 81);
Transition means capable of shifting the variable ball entry control means to a specific state in which the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry control means is performed based on the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means. (Function to execute the game state transition process by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
As a lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means, a first result (unfavorable special losing result) in which the variable ball entry means shifts to a first specific state in which the variable ball entry control is controlled in a first manner; , a second result (advantageous special losing result) in which the variable ball entry means shifts to a second specific state in which the variable ball entry control is controlled in a second manner more advantageous to the player than the first manner; and
The transition means includes:
If the lottery result by the first lottery means is the first result and the lottery result by the second lottery means is the second result, the first specific state is changed without transitioning to the second specific state. a first specifying means (a function of executing a forced termination process for the game round on the second special drawing side in the second game round control process by the main control device 81);
If the lottery result by the first lottery means is the first result and the lottery result by the second lottery means is the second result, the second specific state is changed without transitioning to the first specific state. a second specifying means (a function of executing forced termination processing for the game round on the first special figure side in the first game round control process by the main control device 81),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means based on the ball entering the first ball entry section, and the second lottery is conducted by the second lottery means based on the ball entering the second ball entry section. There are a plurality of lottery systems in which the lottery results of both lottery means are such that when the first result is obtained, the variable entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed in the first mode, and when the second result is obtained, the first method is performed. Variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed in the second mode, which is more advantageous than the above embodiment. In such a configuration, the result of the first lottery by the first lottery means is the first result, the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means is the second result, and the result for which variable entry control is performed is In the case of overlapping situations, there is a case where variable ball entry control is performed in the first mode (transition to the first specific state) and a case where variable ball entry control is performed in the second mode (transition to the second specific state). Both of these are possible. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect in which variable ball entry control is performed (whether the second aspect is advantageous to the player or not), and it is possible to increase the variety of games. The degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C2. The transition means is configured to select a round in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry means is performed in the specific state based on the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is a specific result. It has a configuration that allows the game to be transferred to a specific game state that can be executed multiple times,
The first specific state to which the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is transferred is the first result, and the second specific state to which the lottery result is the second result is the round. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is in a state where the game can be executed only once.

According to the above configuration, a specific gaming state in which a plurality of round games are played (so-called jackpot state), and a first specific state and a second specific state in which only one round game is played (so-called small winning state, special winning state) ), when the states in which only one round game is played overlap, the first specifying means and the second specifying means differ in which state is executed. Therefore, the inconvenience that a specific game state in which a plurality of round games are played is not carried out does not occur, and it becomes possible to realize the gaming property of feature C1 within a range that does not cause a large disadvantage to the player.

Feature C3. Before and after transitioning to the first specific state by the transition means, the probability of winning in the first lottery by the first lottery means does not change;
According to feature C1 or feature C2, the probability of winning in the second lottery by the second lottery means does not change before and after the transition means transitions to the second specific state. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability by the first lottery means does not change even if the transition to the first specific state occurs, and the winning probability by the second lottery device does not change even if the transition to the second specific state occurs. Even if control is performed by the first specifying means or the second specifying means that prevents the game from moving to the specific state or the second specific state, the gaming state before and after that will not be greatly affected. For example, if the winning probability increases after the transition but the game does not transition to the first specific state or the second specific state, the player will suffer a great disadvantage. Therefore, the gameplay of feature C1 can be realized within a range that does not cause a large disadvantage to the player.

Feature C4. Sorting means (shutter 358) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into a specific area (V winning area 356) and an area different from the specific area (ejection area 357);
In the sorting means, a sorting control means (by the main control device 81 function to execute V distribution setting processing),
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area (a function of executing processing for starting an opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning flag by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The distribution control means is configured to control, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry control is performed in the first aspect, the entered game ball to the distribution means. If the distribution means is set to the non-specific mode at the timing when the game ball reaches the non-specific mode, and when the variable ball entry control is performed in the second mode, a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the sorting means is set to the specific mode at the timing when the entered game ball reaches the sorting means.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific state in which variable ball entry control is performed in the first mode, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means is difficult to pass through the specific area, and the variable ball entry control is performed in the second mode. When the second specific state where the control is performed, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means becomes easier to pass through the specific area. In other words, in the case where the first result and the second result overlap, if the first specifying means sets the first specified state, it will not be possible to pass through the specific area and the privilege will not be granted, but the second specifying means will not grant the privilege. When the second specific state is entered, it becomes possible to pass through the specific area and a privilege is given. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the advantages of variable ball entry control based on the first result and variable ball entry control based on the second result.

Here, if you try to make the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means different between the first result and the second result, the difference will be greater than the maximum number of balls entering the variable ball entry means in one specific state. cannot be caused. In other words, there is a limit even if you try to create a difference in advantage depending on the prize ball based on the ball entered. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a benefit is given depending on whether or not the ball passes through a specific area as described above, the difference in advantage will exceed the difference in the number of prize balls based on the maximum number of balls entering in one specific state. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to create a large difference in advantage between the first result and the second result, and it is possible to improve the gameplay.

Feature C5. The distribution control means controls the timing of distribution control between the specific mode and the non-specific mode in the first specific state, and the timing of distribution control between the specific mode and the non-specific mode in the second specific state. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the gaming machine is controlled so that the timing is the same as the timing.

According to the above configuration, the timing of distribution control is the same regardless of the type of specific state. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to create a large difference in advantage between the first result and the second result.

Feature C6. A first notification is started by a predetermined notification means based on the fact that the first lottery has been conducted by the first lottery means, and thereafter, the first notification is issued as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first lottery. a first notification means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81);
A second notification is started by a predetermined notification means based on the fact that the second lottery has been conducted by the second lottery, and thereafter, the second notification is issued as a notification result corresponding to the result of the second lottery. a second notification means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The first specifying means causes a transition to the first specifying state based on the fact that the first notification by the first notification unit ends before the second notification by the second notification unit,
The second specifying means causes a transition to the second specifying state based on the fact that the second notification by the second notification unit ends before the first notification by the first notification unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

According to the above configuration, when the first result and the second result overlap in both lottery systems, the case where the transition to the first specific state based on the first result is the first notification corresponding to the first lottery means is the case where the notification ends first, and the case where the transition to the second specific state based on the second result is the case where the second notification corresponding to the second lottery means ends first, and the case where the second notification corresponding to the second lottery method ends first, It is made clear by each notification means whether a specific state is reached that reflects the result of the above. This makes it possible to easily discover, for example, fraudulent acts that take advantage of the complexity of each lottery system and attempt to generate a specific state without relying on the lottery.

Feature C7. When one of the first lottery by the first lottery means and the second lottery by the second lottery means is carried out, the other lottery is carried out, and the transition means The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the timing is before the transition to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, an event in which both lotteries overlap is likely to occur, and the first specific state or the second specific state is set by reflecting either the lottery result by the first lottery means or the lottery result by the second lottery means. It is possible to suitably realize a gaming feature such as a transition to the following.

Feature C8. The first lottery by the first lottery means is set so that the lottery result is more likely to be the first result than the second result,
The second lottery by the second lottery means is set so that the lottery result is more likely to be the second result than the first result,
When the second lottery by the second lottery means is carried out, the first lottery by the first lottery means is carried out, and the transition means shifts to the specific state based on the first lottery. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the timing is also earlier.

According to the above configuration, the second lottery is more advantageous for the player than the first lottery. However, if the second lottery is held, the first lottery has been conducted before that and the transition to the specific state based on the result of the first lottery has not yet occurred, and the specific state of both lottery systems overlap. Therefore, it becomes a target of the first identifying means and the second identifying means. In other words, it becomes difficult to receive only the second lottery and intentionally try to shift to the second specific state based on the second result. Therefore, when the specific states of both lottery systems overlap, it is possible to suitably realize a game feature that determines which lottery system will be executed.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) that launches a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a player's firing operation;
a ball entry part (first operating port 33) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Once a game run is started on a predetermined notification means (main display unit 37) based on the game ball entering the ball entry section, and the game run is ended as a predetermined notification result. a game time control means (a function for executing a first game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be played by the predetermined notification means as the game time;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming area is provided with variable ball entry means (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state,
comprising a switching control means (a function for executing electrical support processing by the main controller 81) for performing switching control between the open state and the closed state of the variable ball entry means;
The switching control means changes the variable ball entrance means from the closed state to the open state when the game round is started, and changes the variable ball entry means to the open state at a timing before the end of the game round. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entering means can be brought into the closed state.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a game round is always being played. In this way, it becomes possible to realize a new gameplay that utilizes the relationship between the game round and the ball entering the variable ball entering means.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which a certain benefit can be given when a ball enters the variable entry means, and whether or not the benefit is granted is determined in relation to the progress status of the game round being executed, if the If a ball enters the variable ball entry means in a situation where the ball entry is not performed, there may be an inconvenience that a privilege is given regardless of the progress status. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, when a ball enters the variable ball entry means, a game round is always being played, so the above-mentioned inconvenience does not occur, and the It is possible to suitably realize a gaming feature in which whether or not to give a benefit is determined in relation to the progress status of a game round.

Feature D2. a passing section (through gate 35) provided at a position where the game ball entering the ball entry section always passes;
an opening lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S1307 by the main controller 81) that executes an opening lottery for determining whether or not to put the variable entry means into the open state based on passing through the passage section;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the switching control means executes the switching control based on the fact that the result of the open lottery by the open lottery means is a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the variable ball entry means is performed based on the ball passing through the passing section rather than the entry into the ball entering section. It becomes possible to carry out the lottery based on the ball entering the ball and the lottery for opening the variable ball entering means independently and separately. As a result, it becomes possible to open and close the variable ball entry means before the end of the game round that is executed based on the ball entering the ball entry section, and the configuration of feature D1 described above can be suitably realized. can.

Feature D3. Specific notification means for causing a predetermined notification means to start specific notification based on the opening lottery being held by the opening lottery means, and thereafter terminating the specific notification as a notification result corresponding to the result of the opening lottery. (Function to execute electrical service support processing by the main controller 81)
The switching control means executes the switching control after the specific notification by the specific notification unit ends,
The game according to feature D2, wherein the notification period during which the specific notification is made by the specific notification means is set to be shorter than the length of the game round executed by the game round control means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the notification period until the open lottery is implemented and the variable ball entrance means is set to the open state based on the lottery result is set shorter than the length of the game round, so that during the game round It becomes possible to open the variable ball entry means.

Feature D4. The firing means fires the game ball at a predetermined firing cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the notification period is set to be shorter than the firing period.

According to the above configuration, for example, if the passage part and the variable ball entry means are arranged close to each other, when the game ball fired next to the game ball that passed through the passage part reaches the variable ball entry means. , there is a high possibility that the variable ball entry means is in an open state, and the game ball that has reached the ball can enter the variable ball entry means. By doing this, the series of flows such as passing through the passing section, entering the ball entering section, starting the game round, starting the open lottery, and entering the ball into the variable ball entering means can be realized more smoothly. becomes.

Furthermore, it is common for the firing cycle to be relatively short, and by making the notification period even shorter than such a short firing cycle as described above, the variable ball entry means will be in the open state. It is possible to make it difficult to perform a so-called stop shot action in which a game ball is fired at the right timing.

Feature D5. The variable ball entry means is arranged downstream of the passage section,
The passage portion and the variable ball entry means are positioned such that the period required for the game ball to flow down from the position corresponding to the passage portion to the position corresponding to the variable ball entry means is longer than the notification period. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, wherein:

According to the above configuration, the notification period has elapsed until the game ball flows down from the passing portion to the variable ball entry means, and the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state. Thereby, for example, when a game ball that has passed through the passage part flows down to the variable entry ball means, the game ball can enter the variable entry ball means. Therefore, it is possible to make the flow of the ball from passing through the passage section to entering the variable ball entry means smoother.

Feature D6. The firing means fires the game ball at a predetermined firing cycle,
The switching control means sets the variable entry means to the open state based on the fact that the lottery result of the open lottery is a winning result, maintains the open state for a predetermined opening period, and then It is in a closed state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D5, wherein the predetermined opening period is set to be longer than the firing cycle.

According to the above configuration, one or more game balls will reach the variable ball entry means during the predetermined opening period. Therefore, it is possible to expect a ball to enter the variable ball entry means during the predetermined opening period, and it is possible to suitably realize the gameplay by causing a ball to enter the variable ball entry means during a game round.

Feature D7. The opening lottery means can immediately carry out the opening lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passage section, while the notification period based on the opening lottery and the switching control based on the winning result are being executed. Even if a game ball passes through the passage section, an opening lottery is not performed based on the passing of the game ball, but a new opening lottery is executed using passage through the passage section that occurs after the switching control ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D6.

According to the above configuration, even if a game ball passes through the passing part during the execution of the notification period based on the open lottery or the switching control based on the winning result, the open lottery based on the passage is not performed, so for example After the completion of the first switching control, an open lottery is held without passing through the passing portion, and the variable entry means is brought into the open state, that is, the variable entry means is brought into the open state except during the execution of the game round. do not have. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably realize the gameplay of feature D1.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) that launches a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a player's firing operation;
a first ball entry part (first operating port 33) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Starting a game run by a predetermined notification means based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section, and ending the game run as a predetermined notification result is defined as one game run. , a game time control means (a function for executing a first game time control process by the main control device 81) for causing the game time to be played by the predetermined notification means;
a benefit granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) that grants a benefit to a player based on the fulfillment of a predetermined granting condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming area is provided with a second ball entry part (second operating port 34) different from the first ball entry part,
It is characterized in that the shorter the length of the specific period from when the game ball enters the first ball entry section to when the game ball enters the second ball entry section, the more likely the provision condition is satisfied. A gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a game ball is fired into the gaming area based on a player's firing operation, and when the fired game ball enters the first ball entry section, a game round effect is performed. If the ball can enter the first ball entry section and then immediately enter the second ball entry section, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the privilege is more easily awarded by the benefit awarding means.

Feature E2. Once a game ball enters the second ball entry section, a predetermined notification means starts a second game play, and ends the second game play as a predetermined notification result. A second game time control means (a function for executing a second game time control process by the main control device 81) is provided for causing the second game time to be played by the predetermined notification means as the second game time. The gaming machine according to feature E1.

According to the above configuration, the second game round is started based on the ball entering the second ball entering section. With such a configuration, in relation to the game round (first game round) based on the ball entering the first ball entering section, it is possible to start the second game round immediately after the start of the first game round. If possible, the gaming experience will be such that it will be easier to receive benefits, and it will be possible to realize a novel gaming experience that is far different from that of conventional gaming machines.

Feature E3. Based on the occurrence of a specific event in which a game ball enters the first ball entry section, means for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entry section (execution of an electric role support process by the main controller 81); The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, since the ball does not enter the second ball entry section until the ball enters the first ball entry section, the ball enters the second ball entry section immediately after the ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to make the game easier to understand, such as causing the ball to enter the ball section.

Feature E4. A means for restricting the entry of a ball into the second ball entry section based on the passage of a predetermined period after the occurrence of the specific event (a function for executing processing for electric support by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature E3.

According to the above configuration, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the occurrence of a specific event in which a game ball enters the first ball entry section, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry section. By doing so, it is possible to make the game easier to understand, in which the ball enters the second ball entry section immediately after the ball enters the first ball entry section.

Feature E5. It is equipped with a lottery means (a function for executing a win/fail determination process on the second special drawing side by the main controller 81) that executes a predetermined lottery based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance part,
According to any one of features E1 to E4, the award condition is more likely to be satisfied as the specific period is shorter when a winner is won in the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the ball enters the first ball entry section quickly and enters the second ball entry section, the lottery must be won based on the ball entering the second ball entry section. If the granting condition is not satisfied. In this way, by configuring the lottery process on the gaming machine side as well as the manner in which the game ball flows down, it becomes possible to manage, to some extent, the success or failure of the granting conditions on the gaming machine side. Therefore, it is preferable in terms of game design, and for example, it becomes possible to suitably design the ball launch rate.

Feature E6. When the launching means is operated so that the game ball reaches the first ball entering section, the first ball entering section and the first ball entering section are arranged so that the game ball can also reach the second ball entering section. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that a two-ball entry section is provided.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to aim at the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part without changing the aspect of the firing operation. In other words, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entry section while maintaining the manner of the firing operation that caused the ball to enter the first ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to easily play a game in which the ball enters the second ball entry section immediately after entering the first ball entry section.

Feature E7. As a downstream path from a predetermined position in the gaming area to the second ball entry section, a first downstream path (first route) that requires a first period to flow down to the second ball entry section, and a second ball entry section. The game according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that a second downstream route (second route) that requires a second period longer than the first period to flow down to the second period is provided. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the ball can flow down the first flow path, the ball can enter the second ball entry section more quickly than the ball can flow down the second flow path, and the provision condition is more likely to be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to attract attention to how the game ball behaves, and suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E8. It is arranged at a branching position between the first downstream path and the second downstream path from the predetermined position to the second ball entry part, and the game ball that has reached the branching position is connected to the first downstream path and the second downstream path. The gaming machine according to feature E7, further comprising a sorting means (shutter 358) for sorting into routes.

According to the above configuration, the ease with which the granting condition is satisfied changes depending on which downstream route the distribution means distributes to, and it is possible to attract a high level of interest in the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. a first acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process based on the first operating mouth winning by the main control device 81: the process of S301 to S306) that acquires the first determination information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first acquisition condition; ,
A first lottery means (a first variation start process by the main controller 81 (a function that executes validity judgment processing);
a first specific control means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the first specific control based on the lottery result by the first lottery means;
A second acquisition means that acquires second determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first acquisition condition (winning processing based on the second operating opening winning by the main controller 81) : a function to execute the processing of S307 to S312),
A second lottery means (second variation start process by the main controller 81 (a function that executes validity judgment processing);
a second specific control means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the second specific control based on the lottery result by the second lottery means;
A third acquisition means for acquiring third determination information based on the establishment of a third acquisition condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition. function to execute prize winning processing),
A third lottery means for executing a third lottery to determine whether or not to execute the third specific control based on the third determination information acquired by the third acquisition means (in the electric role support process by the main controller 81) function to execute lottery processing),
a third specific control means (a function for executing electric role opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) capable of executing the third specific control based on the lottery result by the third lottery means;
Equipped with
The first lottery means, the second lottery means, and the third lottery means may each carry out another lottery between when the corresponding lottery is held and when the specific control corresponding to the lottery is executed. The configuration is
The lottery result by the first lottery means is the lottery result that causes the first specific control to be executed, and the lottery result by the second lottery device is the lottery result that causes the second specific control to be executed. In this case, a setting means (support processing by the main control device 81 A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a process for setting a variable display time (a function of executing processes from S2008 to S2010).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the first specific control and the second specific control may overlap, which specific control has priority is set using the third determination information for the third specific control. be done. By doing this, not only is there an added game of enjoying which specific control is executed, but also the first and second specific controls are Randomness occurs in the execution of control, improving gameplay. Moreover, by setting the factor that causes such randomness to be the third determination information used in the third lottery to determine whether or not to execute the third specific control, it is easier to use than a configuration in which determination information exclusively for that purpose is prepared. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. Therefore, it is possible to diversify games and increase attention with a simple configuration.

Feature F2. The configuration is such that the third specific control can be executed regardless of whether the first specific control is given priority by the setting means or the second specific control is given priority. A gaming machine described in F1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the superiority or inferiority of the first specific control and the second specific control without affecting the winning probability of the third lottery means, that is, the execution probability of the third specific control. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature F1 without significantly changing the design of the gaming machine.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the second acquisition condition can be satisfied by performing the third specific control.

According to the above configuration, a situation in which all the first to third determination information are acquired is likely to occur. That is, even if the first specific control and the second specific control overlap, if the third determination information is not acquired, it is difficult for the setting means to set which one to prioritize. According to the above configuration, if the second lottery based on at least the second determination information is a lottery result for which the second specific control is executed, the third specific control has been performed before that, and the third lottery result is determined based on the second determination information. Since the information has been acquired, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to perform settings due to the absence of the third determination information as described above.

Feature F4. The setting means uses the third determination information that triggered the execution of the third specific control to determine the second information acquired when the second acquisition condition is satisfied during the third specific control. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the second specific control based on the determination information is set to be superior to the first specific control.

According to the above configuration, it becomes clear which third determination information is used when setting the superiority or inferiority of the first specific control and the second specific control in the configuration of feature F3. This prevents the inconvenience of not being able to set superiority or inferiority because it is unclear which third determination information is to be used when a plurality of pieces of third determination information exist.

Feature F5. Based on the fact that the third lottery is held by the third lottery means, a predetermined notification means (common map display section 38) starts to display a change, and the result of the third lottery is displayed based on the elapse of the display period. a change display means (a function for executing electric support support processing by the main controller 81) that terminates the change display as a notification result corresponding to the change display;
Period setting means for setting the display period in which the change display is performed using predetermined information (electric accessory release counter C4) of the third determination information (executes the processes of S2008 to S2010 by the main controller 81) function) and
Equipped with
Any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the setting means is configured to set the superiority or inferiority of the first specific control and the second specific control based on the display period set by the period setting device. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, a display period for notifying the result of the third lottery is set, and the superiority or inferiority of the first specific control and the second specific control is set based on the display period. In this way, the relationship between the first specific control and the second specific control can be adjusted without changing the lottery result of the third lottery or the winning probability of the third lottery. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature F1 without significantly changing the design of the gaming machine.

Feature F6. Any of the features F1 to F5, characterized in that among the first specific control and the second specific control, the side prioritized by the setting means is executed, while the side that is not prioritized is not executed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, an event where specific control is on standby because it is not prioritized does not occur. In this way, there is no need for a configuration such as storing unexecuted specific controls, and the gameplay of feature F1 can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature F7. Any of the features F1 to F6, characterized in that the player's advantage when the first specific control is executed is different from the player's advantage when the second specific control is executed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the gameplay of which one is prioritized by the setting means in relation to the advantage.

Feature F8. The setting means is configured to easily set the first specific control to be prioritized among the first specific control and the second specific control,
The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be more advantageous for the player when the second specific control is executed than when the first specific control is executed.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous second specific control is less likely to be prioritized. By doing so, it is possible to play a proper game without excessively stirring up expectations.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) that launches a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a player's firing operation;
a starting ball entry part (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where balls cannot enter or are difficult to enter;
Transition determination means capable of determining whether or not to transition the gaming state to a specific state in which opening/closing control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry section. (Function to execute the propriety judgment process by the main controller 81);
a transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning the gaming state to the specific state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means;
A game round in which a predetermined notification means starts the performance of the game round based on the transition determination made by the transition determination means, and ends the performance of the game round as a notification result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. A control means (a function of executing the first game time control process and the second game time control process by the main control device 81),
a period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of the main controller 81) for storing period information corresponding to the production period of the game round executed by the game round control means as a period information group;
Acquisition means for acquiring the period information according to the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means from the period information group stored in the period information storage means (setting process of the first variable display time by the main controller 81, 2. Function to execute variable display time setting process),
Equipped with
The game time control means executes the performance of the game time in the notification period according to the period information acquired by the acquisition means,
A first changing unit (by the main controller 81) capable of changing the period information group from which the acquisition unit acquires the period information from the previous period information group based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (end of the opening/closing execution mode). function to execute variable display time table switching processing),
a grasping means (switching counter) for grasping a number corresponding to the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means;
Based on the fact that the number grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined number, a second change means (main change means) capable of changing the period information group changed by the first change means based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition; A process of setting a ceiling table in the variable display time table switching process by the control device 81 (for example, a function of executing the process of S2106);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the period information group for setting the performance period of the game round is changed based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition. Therefore, for example, with the jackpot as a change condition, it is possible to realize a game in which the length of the performance period is varied before and after the jackpot (the result of judgment by the transition determining means is a result corresponding to a transition to a specific state). In addition, in this gaming machine, the grasping means grasps the number corresponding to the number of changes in the period information group, and the first changing means changes the period information based on the grasped number reaching a predetermined number. Period information may be changed when changing groups. Therefore, the change pattern of the period information group becomes much more diverse than if it were performed only by the first change means. In other words, for example, if we take the example of varying the length of the performance period after the jackpot, we can create a gameplay in which the length of the subsequent performance period may vary depending on the number of jackpots even if the result is the same jackpot. realizable. In this way, by diversifying the length of the performance period, it is possible to greatly expand the range of games and provide a gaming machine that attracts players' interest.

In addition, "a second change in which the period information group to be changed by the first changing means can be changed based on the number grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined number, based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition." ``means'' may be replaced with ``a second changing means that is capable of changing the period information group that the first changing means changes based on the number grasped by the grasping means and based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition.'' .

Feature G2. The case where the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means is better than the case where the period information group changed by the first changing means is not changed by the second changing means. The gaming machine according to feature G1 is characterized by being advantageous for players.

According to the above configuration, the player comes to desire the change by the second changing means, and the effect of the feature G1 is enhanced. Specifically, when the number of changes made by the first changing means reaches a predetermined number, the second changing means makes the change, so the player can be aware that the number of times the change condition is met reaches the predetermined number. It is thought that it will become what you want. It is also possible to use this information as a basis for selecting a game machine, such as actively selecting a machine for which the number of times the change condition has been satisfied is close to a predetermined number and playing a game.

Feature G3. Feature G1 or Feature G2 is characterized in that the predetermined change condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the transition determination means being a transition response result corresponding to the transition of the specific state. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the period information group is changed by transitioning to a specific state in which opening/closing control is performed in which a ball may enter the variable ball entry means. Moreover, depending on the number of transitions to the specific state, the period information group will be changed to a different period information group from the one changed by the first changing means. By doing this, the change points of the period information group are concentrated in a specific state, which is a point where the degree of attention can be greatly increased, increasing interest in the change, and ensuring that the change is not overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

Feature G4. When the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means, and when the period information group changed by the first changing means is not changed by the second changing means, the change The gaming machine according to feature G3, characterized in that the determination result by the transition determining means that the condition is met can be the same.

According to the above configuration, even if the determination result by the transition determining means is the same and the specific state is the same, the destination of the period information group may be different. In this way, the effect of feature G3 can be achieved without complicating the determination result by the transition determining means. Not only that, for example, even if the specific state is not what the player desires, by changing the destination of the period information group by the second changing means, the state itself becomes what the player desires. In some cases, Therefore, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention not only to the specific state but also to the change destination of the period information group.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the number grasped by the grasping means may be different from the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the second grasping means separately from the first grasping means. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the predetermined change condition is satisfied by a jackpot, the player can specify the number of times the period information has been changed by the first change means from a data display in the game hall, etc. be. Therefore, if the number grasped by the grasping means and the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means are the same, then the timing at which the period information group is changed by the second changing means (when a predetermined number is reached) It can be said that the player can clearly recognize the timing). In this case, if certainty is desired in the judgment of machine selection, it may be preferable for the number of times to be the same, but it is better to have a configuration in which both numbers can be different as described above, so that the change timing by the second change means is not affected. The ambiguity improves the enjoyment of selecting a platform.

The specific configuration of feature G5 is as follows: ``When the period information group is changed by the first changing means, the number of times grasped by the grasping means is increased by 1 to the number of times grasped until then. It is conceivable to include a means for adding and updating the above numbers (a function for executing processes such as steps S2102 and S2103 by the main control device 81).

Feature G6. In the determination result by the transition determination means, a plurality of types of transition response results are set as transition response results corresponding to transition to the specific state,
The grasping means corresponds to the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means after the determination result by the transition determination means becomes a predetermined transition response result among the plurality of types of transition response results. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to grasp numbers.

According to the above configuration, the trigger for starting to grasp the number of times by the grasping means becomes clear. In particular, by setting this start trigger as a predetermined transition response result among the transition response results for transitioning to a specific state, a specific state that has received increased attention in the first place will be performed, so attention to the start trigger is important. In addition, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to start from being overlooked.

Feature G7. comprising a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2208 by the main controller 81) for setting the predetermined number by which the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means,
Any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the setting means is configured to set one predetermined number out of a plurality of predetermined numbers according to the current setting opportunity (FIG. 45(b)). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, one number out of a plurality of types of numbers is set as the predetermined number of destinations to which the first changing means changes the period information group by the second changing means. In this way, it is not only difficult to know when the change is made by the second change means, but also the degree of advantage for the player may vary depending on the change made by the second change means (Feature G2). In this case, the timing at which the degree of advantage differs depends on the predetermined number that is set. By doing this, it becomes possible to greatly diversify the games through the simple event of changing the period information group.

Feature G8. When the period information group is changed by the first changing means, means for updating the number of times grasped by the grasping means by adding 1 or more to the number of times grasped up to then 81);
When the number of times grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the difference between the number of times grasped by the grasping means and the predetermined number is added at the next time when the grasping means starts grasping the number of times. means (a function for executing processing such as step S2409 by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, based on one change in the period information group, one or more is added to the number of times the grasping means grasps. In such a configuration, the number of changes in the period information group may be less than the predetermined number until the predetermined number is reached, and since the game element such as how the number of additions will be added is added, Improves gameplay.

Furthermore, when the number of times that the grasping means has grasped is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the difference between the number of times and the predetermined number may be carried over to the next time or later. By doing so, for example, if the second change means makes a change far more than the predetermined number of times, it is expected that the predetermined value will be reached more quickly next time. Therefore, for example, when a large value is added, it is possible to fully benefit from the addition.

Feature G9. comprising a setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2403 by the main controller 81) for setting the predetermined number by which the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means,
The grasping means is capable of grasping the number corresponding to the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means even in a situation where the predetermined number is not set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the number of times the grasping means is grasped before setting by the setting means becomes a predetermined number. By doing so, the timing at which changes are made by the second changing means can be varied, contributing to the diversification of games.

In particular, if applied to the configuration of feature G8, an event that greatly exceeds the predetermined number is likely to occur before the predetermined number is set, so it is possible to enhance the effect of carrying over the difference. In this case, in the configuration of feature G8, "If the number of times grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the difference between the number of times grasped by the grasping means and the predetermined number will be calculated next time. It is possible to achieve the above effect if there is provided a means for adding at the start of the counting of the number of times by the grasping means.

Feature G10. The number of times grasped by the grasping means can be notified on a predetermined notifying means (display screen G). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of displaying a value.

According to the above configuration, the player can clearly recognize how much time is left before the change by the second change means is made by the notification by the number of times notification means. Therefore, if the change by the second changing means is preferable to the player, the player can look forward to the change.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) that launches a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a player's firing operation;
a starting ball entry part (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
A grant determining means capable of determining whether or not to grant a benefit to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry section (a function for executing a propriety determination process by the main controller 81) and,
Based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means is a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting the benefit to the player, the benefit granting means (main control unit) capable of granting the benefit to the player (a function of executing gaming state transition processing by the device 81);
A game round in which the performance of the game round is started by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means, and the performance of the game round is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A control means (a function of executing the first game time control process and the second game time control process by the main control device 81),
Specific control means (main control means) for making it easier for the benefit awarding means to award a benefit based on the fact that the number corresponding to the number of times the gaming session control means has executed a game session from a predetermined starting opportunity reaches a specific number. a function of executing the processing of steps S2307, S2309, etc. by the control device 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific control means is capable of starting the game when the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means is a non-grant corresponding result that is different from the grant corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine where a benefit is awarded based on the fact that the award determination result is a grant compatible result, it is possible to generate interest even in a non-grant compatible result that is not a grant compatible result. . In particular, this gaming machine has a so-called ceiling function that makes it easier to receive benefits to the player based on the number of times the game has been executed, and the starting trigger is the key to this ceiling function. is configured to be performed based on the non-grant correspondence result. The ceiling function is generally provided from the viewpoint of relieving so-called addiction from the time a privilege is granted until the next privilege is granted. However, with such a ceiling function, information on whether or not the player is close to the ceiling can be completely determined from the timing of awarding benefits and the number of game rounds displayed on the data display machine installed in the game hall, for example. Gaming machines that are far from the ceiling are more likely to be avoided, which is thought to be a factor in lowering the operating rate of gaming machines. Therefore, as mentioned above, since the trigger for starting the ceiling function is the non-granting result rather than the granting result in which a benefit is granted, it is difficult to tell whether or not the ceiling is close to the ceiling, and the function is to relieve the user from getting hooked. It becomes possible to guarantee the

Feature H2. After using the non-grant corresponding result as the start trigger, the specific control means is configured to control the execution of the specified number of games even if the non-grant corresponding result becomes the non-grant corresponding result until the number of subsequent executions of the game reaches the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the starting trigger is not used as the starting trigger.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a specific number of measurements from being started many times due to consecutive occurrences of non-applying corresponding results, and it is possible to suitably perform the ceiling function.

Feature H3. As the non-granting response results that are not subject to the granting of the benefit by the benefit granting means, a first non-granting response result that is the starting trigger and a second non-granting response result that is not the starting trigger are set. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

According to the above configuration, depending on the relationship between the first non-grant correspondence result and the second non-grant correspondence result, it is possible to easily adjust such that even a non-grant correspondence result is used as a start trigger or not as a start trigger. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature H1 with a simpler configuration.

Feature H4. Feature H3 is characterized in that the grant determination by the grant determination means is set such that the probability of the second non-grant corresponding result is higher than the probability of the first non-grant corresponding result. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconvenience caused by successive first non-granting corresponding results that may serve as a trigger for starting.

Feature H5. The specific control means subtracts, from the specific number, the number of times the game has been executed since the game time in which the benefit was granted by the immediately preceding benefit granting means, based on the start trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to start measuring the number of times the game is played.

According to the above configuration, for example, if the number of times the game is played after the award is given is a predetermined number after reaching a specific number, the non-granting result will be obtained, and if the game is played a predetermined number of times after the award is given, The specific control means will put the user in a state where it is easy to receive benefits. In other words, the counting of the number of games played since the granting of the bonus is progressing, and if the result is a non-granting response, that count is treated as valid. By doing so, it is possible to create a novel configuration that differs from conventional ceiling functions.

Feature H6. When the number of executions of the game round from the game round in which the privilege was given by the immediately preceding privilege granting means is greater than the specific number, the specific control means calculates the difference to the start of the next game. The gaming machine according to feature H5, further comprising a first means (a function for executing processing such as step S2409 by the main control device 81) capable of subtracting from the specific number at an opportunity.

According to the above configuration, if the number of games played after the bonus award exceeds a specific number and a start opportunity occurs (if the result is a non-grant response), the difference is carried over to the next time. As a result, after a large hit occurs, consecutive hits are likely to occur, increasing the range of increase/decrease in the number of pitches, and improving gameplay.

Feature H7. The specific control means is configured to set the difference to 0 when the number of executions of the game round from the game round in which the privilege was given by the immediately preceding privilege granting means is greater than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature H5 or feature H6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a second means (a function for executing the process of step S2511 by the main control device 81) that allows the main controller 81 to perform the processing in step S2511.

According to the above configuration, although carryover does not occur as in feature H6, it is preferable for players who are thinking of ending the game after reaching the ceiling (after awarding benefits). Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the differences.

Feature H8. The specific control means is
If the number of executions of the game round from the game round in which the privilege was granted by the immediately preceding privilege granting means is greater than the specific number, the difference will be calculated as the specific number at the next start opportunity. a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2512 by the main controller 81) capable of subtracting from the
If the number of executions of a game round from the game round in which the privilege was granted by the immediately preceding privilege granting means is greater than the specific number, a second method capable of setting the difference to zero; means (a function for executing the process of step S2511 by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H5, further comprising a selection means (a function for executing the process of step S2509 by the main control device 81) that allows the first means and the second means to be selected.

According to the above configuration, whether the first means or the second means is used in handling the difference between the number of executions and the specific number is a point in which the degree of advantage to the player greatly differs, and the player is interested in the difference between the number of executions and the specific number. This can be said to be a point of focus. Therefore, by creating a configuration in which it is possible to select which of the first means and the second means to use, it becomes possible to greatly contribute to improving the gameplay.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A starting ball entry part (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a gaming ball can enter;
Acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section (winning processing for the actuation opening by the main controller 81);
Grant determining means (setting process of the first variable display time by the main controller 81, 2. Function to execute variable display time setting process),
a privilege granting means (a function of executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a determination result of the granting determination by the granting determination means;
Based on the award determination being made by the award determination means, a game run execution means (main controller 81),
The grant determination means is configured to be able to execute the grant determination so as to obtain a result corresponding to the number of times the game is executed from a predetermined timing,
For a predetermined gaming session to be carried out after the predetermined timing, a special notification corresponding to the award determination by the award determination means when the predetermined gaming session is carried out is sent for the determination for the predetermined gaming session. Equipped with a special notification means (a function for executing the production process for a specific period by the production control device 82) that can be executed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit at a timing before the information is acquired. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the grant determination means can execute the grant determination according to the number of times corresponding to the number of times of playing the game from the predetermined timing, and the grant determination means can perform the grant determination according to the number of times corresponding to the number of times the game is played from the predetermined timing, A special notification corresponding to the result of the provision determination may be made at a timing before the application information is acquired. By doing this, at the predetermined timing, even if the game ball does not enter the starting ball entry section, it becomes possible to grasp the subsequent determination result by the provision determination means, and the game can be started at the predetermined timing. It becomes possible to make a decision as to whether to continue or to cancel. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature I2. Feature I1 characterized in that the predetermined timing is set that the judgment result by the provision judgment means is a predetermined specific result (special outlier results B to D in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, a predetermined timing is reached based on the determination result by the provision determination means, and it becomes possible to grasp the subsequent determination result by special notification before the ball enters the ball. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest in the determination result by the provision determination means.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the specific result is a result in which the privilege is not awarded by the privilege awarding means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to attract attention even to results in which no benefits are given. Then, the effect of feature I2 can be achieved without significantly changing the probability of determination by the provision determination means.

Feature I4. Based on the arrival of the predetermined timing, a transition is made to a specific state (specific period) in which the bonus is more likely to be awarded by the bonus awarding means by playing the game a specific number of times after the predetermined timing. The configuration is
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the special notification means is configured to be able to notify that the special state will be shifted to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, at a predetermined timing, benefits are more likely to be awarded in the game after a specific number of times. Then, the player can be made aware of this through special notification. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of points of interest, such as when a benefit will be given, through a special notification of a predetermined timing, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I5. It is set as the predetermined timing that the determination result by the provision determination means is a predetermined specific result (special outlier results B to D in the fifth embodiment);
Based on the arrival of the predetermined timing, a transition is made to a specific state (specific period) in which the bonus is more likely to be awarded by the bonus awarding means by playing the game a specific number of times after the predetermined timing. The configuration is
If the determination result by the award determination means carried out during the specific state is the specific result, after the benefit becomes easier to be awarded in response to the specific result that triggered the transition to the specific state. , the gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the privilege is more likely to be awarded in response to the specific result being achieved during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result that triggers a transition to a specific state occurs during a specific state, a benefit is provided after the specific state to which the user has already transitioned. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a so-called draw loss event during the specific state, and improve the gameplay during the specific state.

Feature I6. If the determination result by the grant determination means carried out during the specific state is the specified result, regardless of the number of times the grant determination means has made a determination that resulted in the specified result from the predetermined timing. , after the benefit is granted in response to the specific result that triggered the transition to the specific state, the benefit is likely to be granted in response to the specific result occurring during the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the gaming machine has the following configuration.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is obtained during a specific state, the privilege is continuously provided after the specific state ends. In this way, for example, it is possible to avoid sluggishness in the game due to repeated execution of a specific state and awarding of benefits and a specific state and awarding of benefits.

Feature I7. It is set as the predetermined timing that the determination result by the provision determination means is a predetermined specific result (special outlier results B to D in the fifth embodiment);
Based on the arrival of the predetermined timing, a transition is made to a specific state (specific period) in which the bonus is more likely to be awarded by the bonus awarding means by playing the game a specific number of times after the predetermined timing. The configuration is
a storage means (variable display time table storage area 223) for storing a period information group in which a plurality of period information corresponding to the notification period when executing the game round are stored;
Selection means for selecting period information corresponding to the notification period of the current game round from the period information group stored in the storage means (setting process of the first variable display time by the main controller 81, second variable display (a function that executes time setting processing),
Equipped with
As the period information group, a specific period information group (a group of specific period information that makes it easier for the award determination means to select specific period information in which the bonus is granted when the number of executions of the game after setting becomes a specific number of times or more) Specific period table) is set,
The apparatus includes a changing means (a function of executing the process of step S2604 by the main controller 81) capable of changing the period information group to the specific period information group based on the predetermined timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6.

According to the above configuration, since the award determination is made using the notification period according to the number of times the game is played from a predetermined timing, for example, the award determination probability of award award may be changed. In comparison, the fairness of the game is guaranteed and the degree of freedom in game design is greatly improved. However, if the configuration is such that changes to the specific period information group can be made at any timing, the points that the player should pay attention to will be too diverse, and there is a possibility that the player's attention will be rather dispersed. Therefore, since the change to the specific period information group is made based on the gaming result (based on the fact that the determination result by the grant determination means is a specific result), it is important to note that the change to the grant determination means is The above effect can be achieved without breaking the premise that the determination result is based on the above.

Feature I8. As the period information group, a second specific period information group (ceiling table) is set in which the specific period information is set to be easily selected regardless of the number of times the game is executed after setting;
If the determination result by the grant determination means carried out during the specific state is the specific result, after the benefit is granted in response to the specific result that triggered the transition to the specific state, The gaming machine according to feature I7, characterized in that the second specific period information group is set.

According to the above configuration, the set period information group is different depending on whether the specific result is obtained before the specific state and the case where the specific result is obtained during the specific state. Specifically, if a specific result is reached before a specific state, the specific period information is set to a specific period information group that becomes more likely to be selected after a specific number of times and a benefit is more likely to be granted, and if a specific result is obtained during a specific state, the game A second specific period information group is set in which the specific period information is likely to be selected regardless of the number of times the game is played, so that a benefit is likely to be awarded regardless of the number of times the game is played. In this way, by simply changing the set period information group, it is possible to realize the phenomenon that a benefit is granted after a certain state and then consecutively, without changing the probability of the grant determination by the grant determination means. It can be realized.

In particular, if the period information set before and after a specific state is set differently, and the timing at which benefits are awarded thereafter is different, even if the specific result is the same, the advantage will vary greatly depending on the timing of the draw. become. In other words, if the game is before the specific state, the bonus will not be awarded unless the specific number of games have been played, while if the specific status is in progress, the bonus will be awarded less than the specific number of times. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to obtain a specific result during a specific state, and it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which the specific result is achieved during a specific state.

Feature I9. comprising a grasping means (loop counter) for grasping the number of times the determination result by the provision determination means performed during the specific state is the specific result;
The number of times the second specific period information group is set is determined according to the number of times that the information group is set for the second specific period after the benefit is granted in response to the specific result that triggered the transition to the specific state, and the number of times that the second specific period information group is determined by the grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature I8.

According to the above configuration, even if a specific result is obtained multiple times during a specific state, the second specific period information group is set correspondingly, so it will not be a so-called loss, but rather, it will not result in a loss during the specific state. It is possible to enhance the effect of the game, such as how to win a specific result.

Feature I10. A plurality of types of the specific results are set as determination results of the grant determination by the grant determination means,
The grasping means adds a number according to the type of the specific result to the number of times grasped up to that time, when the determination result by the provision determination means carried out during the specific state is the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that the gaming machine has a possible configuration.

According to the above configuration, the number of times the second specific period information group is set may vary depending on the type of specific result. In this way, interest in winning a specific result during a specific state and the type of the specific result will be increased, and the gameplay during the specific state will be greatly improved.

Feature I11. The benefit granting means grants the same benefit to a first identification result of the plurality of types and a second identification result in which the number added by the grasping means is different from the first identification result. The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration that allows for.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific results are given the same benefit, if the specific results are of different types, the number of times the second specific period information group is set will be different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the visual difference when a specific result is obtained, and to draw attention to the number of times set in the second specific period information group.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
a period information acquisition means (a function for executing a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) that acquires the period information from the period information storage means;
A specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and a period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means is elapsed. a specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81) capable of terminating the specific event based on the specified event;
Equipped with
Rather than acquiring first period information (fluctuation display time information of second long fluctuation) corresponding to the first period as the period information, second period information (corresponding to a second period different from the first period) is acquired. The second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information) is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to obtain the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information.
Equipped with a state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81),
The gaming states to which the state transition means can transition include a second gaming state (a special table selection state) in which the ease of acquiring the second period information is different from the first gaming state (a normal table selection state). Contains
The state transition means is
a specific condition determining means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 by the main controller 81) for determining whether a predetermined specific condition (first condition) is satisfied in the first gaming state;
When the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the second gaming state is made easier or the transition to the second gaming state is made easier than when the specific condition is not satisfied. Allowable transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the main controller 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event that has occurred is determined based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means. Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period as the period than to select the first period. In this way, by having a structure in which the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the period in which a specific event occurs, it is possible to distinguish it from conventional games in which winning results are drawn through a lottery. It becomes possible to provide novel gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which second period information is obtained differently from the first gaming state are provided as gaming states, and a specific condition is set in the first gaming state. When established, the gaming state is configured to easily shift to the second gaming state or to allow shifting to the second gaming state.

For example, if the difficulty level of transition to the second gaming state is made uniform, if the transition condition remains unsatisfied during a game, the expectation for transitioning to the second gaming state (second gaming state If the situation is undesirable for the player, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to feel a sense of crisis, which may lead to a decline in the player's desire to play. In this regard, according to this feature, the degree of difficulty in transitioning to the second gaming state is eased when the change condition is satisfied, and even if a situation occurs in which the transition to the second gaming state continues, the sense of anticipation and crisis is reduced. This can stimulate the player's desire to play, making it possible to sustain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest by making it easier to shift to the second gaming state depending on the gaming situation, which improves the level of interest.

Feature J2. The period information storage means stores a first period information group (normal table) and a second period information group (special table) that have different ease of acquisition of the second period information by the acquisition means,
The acquisition means acquires the period information from the first period information group in the first gaming state, and acquires the period information from the second period information group in the second gaming state (main controller 81 The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a first variable display time setting process according to the above.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to switch the gaming state by switching the period information group from which period information is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state without using a special winning result such as a jackpot as a trigger, and to provide a novel gameplay that is different from conventional games that are premised on winning a jackpot through a lottery. becomes possible.

Feature J3. The means for transition is:
When the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, transition condition determining means (main control function of executing the processing of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the device 81);
A means for shifting the gaming state to a second gaming state when the shifting condition determining means determines that the shifting condition is satisfied (a function for executing the processing of steps S4108 to S4112 by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the gaming state shifts to the second gaming state as the specific condition and the transition condition are met in stages. In conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to determine whether or not to move to another gaming state (for example, an advantageous state such as a high probability state in which the result of a winning lottery is more likely to result in a winning result) based on one ball entering the ball entering section. Therefore, it is assumed that the player can only enjoy each game (game round) corresponding to the above-mentioned ball entry, as to whether or not the game state will change. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the specific condition is satisfied in one game, the transition to the second game state does not occur unless the transition condition is satisfied in the subsequent game. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy checking whether or not the game will transition to the second game state over multiple games, thereby improving the level of interest.

Feature J4. The transition means is means for transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state when the transition condition is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied and before the predetermined end condition is satisfied (a condition set by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature J3, further comprising a function of executing cancellation processing.

If a configuration is adopted in which the transition condition is allowed to be satisfied indefinitely after the specific condition is satisfied, the player will have no choice but to continue playing after the specific condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied, but according to this configuration, this It becomes possible to suitably avoid the problem and improve the ease of play.

Feature J5. The transition means is a means capable of canceling the establishment of the specific condition when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied while the transition condition is not satisfied (the main controller 81 executes a condition cancellation process). The gaming machine according to feature J4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, when the end condition is satisfied, the period for facilitating the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state or the period for allowing the transition to the second gaming state ends, and the aim is to satisfy the specific condition again. It can provide gameplay. Thereby, the game can be played with a sense of tension after the specific conditions are met, and it is possible to improve the level of interest.

Feature J6. A presentation means (symbol display device 41) capable of executing a predetermined presentation,
a performance control means (a function for executing special performance start processing by the performance control device 82) that controls the performance means to perform a special performance when the specific condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since a special performance is performed in response to the establishment of the specific condition, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the establishment of the specific condition. If the second gaming state is a desirable state for the player, it is possible to suitably arouse expectations for the transition to the second gaming state, and if the second gaming state is an undesirable state for the player, , it is possible to suitably arouse a sense of crisis about transitioning to the second gaming state, and improve interest.

Feature J7. Means for controlling the performance means to perform the special performance based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition even if the specific condition is not satisfied (execution of special performance start processing by the performance control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature J6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, although the special performance indicates to the player that there is a possibility that the specific condition has been met, it is possible to configure such a configuration that the fulfillment of the specific condition cannot be uniquely determined from the special performance. This makes it possible to provide the fun of guessing whether the specific condition is met or not, and the thrill of playing the game without it being clear whether the specific condition is met.

Feature J8. A means for maintaining the first gaming state even if the specific condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (a function for maintaining the normal table selection state even after the first condition is satisfied by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition is met, it is sufficient to maintain the previous state as the gaming state related to the ease with which the second period information is acquired (or the ease with which the specific state is established). , it becomes possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load.

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the second gaming state is a state in which the second period information is more easily acquired than the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the specific conditions are met, it becomes possible to realize a gaming experience that facilitates transition to an advantageous gaming state or allows transition to an advantageous gaming state.

Feature J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the second gaming state is a state in which it is more difficult to obtain the second period information than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the specific conditions are met, it becomes possible to realize a gaming experience that makes it easier to end an advantageous gaming state or allows the end of an advantageous gaming state.

Feature J11. The specific condition determining means includes a means for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the ball entering the ball entry section (a function for executing a condition satisfaction determining process by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10.

According to the above configuration, the process for determining the establishment of the specific condition can be incorporated into the control process for the specific event, and the process for determining the specific condition can be executed as part of the control process. As a result, compared to a configuration in which both processes are performed separately, the control process can be simplified, and processing failures in determining whether a specific condition is satisfied can be suppressed.

Feature J12. Special information acquisition means (for the second operating port 34 by the main controller 81) that obtains special information (jackpot random number counter C1) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to the second operating port 34). function to execute the winning process), and
special determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S611 and S911 by the main controller 81) that performs determination processing based on the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Equipped with
A feature characterized in that the second period information is acquired as the period information and the game is configured to be advantageous to the player when the judgment result of the special judgment means is a specific result (special losing result). The gaming machine according to any one of J1 to J11.

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage can be varied depending not only on the ease of acquiring the second period information but also on the ease of obtaining the specific result. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of factors that change the degree of advantage, and for example, apart from the gaming state in which the second period information is likely to be acquired and the determination result is likely to be a specific result, although the second period information is easy to be acquired, It becomes possible to diversify the gaming states, such as the existence of gaming states in which the ease of obtaining a specific result is suppressed to a normal level.

Feature J13. a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (a function for executing a correctness determination process for the second operating port 34 by the main controller 81);
The game cycle of each game cycle is defined as one game cycle when a game cycle operation is started by a predetermined notification means and the game cycle cycle ends as a notification result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery unit. a game time control means (a function for executing the second game time control process by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the specific event is the game repeat operation.

According to the above configuration, the game repetition operation for notifying the lottery result can be utilized as a specific event. As a result, it is possible to notify whether the game replay operation will end in the second period and to notify the lottery results using one notification means, making it possible to centralize the points of interest. .

Note that when this feature is applied to the above feature J12, "lottery processing" and "lottery means" may be read as "determination processing" and "determination means", respectively.

Feature J14. The state transition means is configured to perform a special transition condition different from the specific condition in the first gaming state (the success/failure determination results for the first special pattern and the second special pattern are determined to be a jackpot result) even if the specific condition is not satisfied. The present invention includes means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4101 and S4110 by the main control device 81) capable of shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the fact that the following is true: The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J13.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to secure an opportunity to transition to the second gaming state even in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, and there is an expectation that the transition to the second gaming state will occur regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to heighten the sense of security and crisis. Not only that, it is also possible to diversify the transition routes to the second gaming state, making it possible to improve the level of interest.

Feature J15. The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a third gaming state that is different from both the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
According to any one of features J1 to J14, the state transition means includes means capable of shifting the gaming state to the third gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the player to understand whether the first specific condition is met based on the transition of the gaming state to the third gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to add the fun of guessing whether a specific condition is met based on changes in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game (changes in the gaming state).

Feature J16. A specific passing section (V winning area 356) through which the game ball can pass;
a privilege awarding means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of awarding a privilege (V jackpot) to a player based on the game ball passing through the specific passage section;
A plurality of aspects including a first aspect in which a game ball can pass through the specific passage part or it becomes easier to pass through, and a second aspect in which a game ball cannot pass through the specific passage part or becomes more difficult to pass through than the first aspect. a means for a specific passing section (second variable prize winning device 32B) operable with the
Equipped with
The specific passage section means is configured to operate in the second mode more easily when the second period information is acquired as the period information than when the first period information is acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J15.

According to the above configuration, by including the step of passing the game ball through the specific passing section in the process up to awarding the award, the player's participation in the game and technical intervention can be improved in addition to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. Opportunities can be secured and interest can be improved.

Feature J17. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning in the first operating port 33), and a first specific event period (first variation) is generated. a first specific event control means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (a game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (a winning in the second operating port 34), and a second specific event period (second variation) is generated. a second specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A specific state (reverse a privilege granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a state);
A state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the ease of establishing the specific state is different from the first gaming state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
a specific condition determining means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 by the main controller 81) for determining whether a predetermined specific condition (first condition) is satisfied in the first gaming state;
When the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the second gaming state is made easier or the transition to the second gaming state is made easier than when the specific condition is not satisfied. Allowable transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the main controller 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is met, the first specific event is controlled to be performed over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is met, the second specific event is controlled to be performed during the second specific event period. Under the configuration that the event is controlled to be carried out over the event period, the second specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events earlier than the first specific event period elapses. If the player does so, the player is provided with a benefit. In this way, by having a structure that determines whether or not a benefit is given depending on which period passes earlier, it is different from conventional games where the winning result is drawn through a lottery. This makes it possible to provide innovative gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Further, in the above configuration, the game state includes a first game state and a second game state in which the ease with which the specific state is established is different from the first game state, and the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state. In this case, the gaming state is configured to easily shift to the second gaming state or to allow shifting to the second gaming state.

For example, if the difficulty level of transition to the second gaming state is made uniform, if the transition condition remains unsatisfied during a game, the expectation for transitioning to the second gaming state (second gaming state If the situation is undesirable for the player, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to feel a sense of crisis, which may lead to a decline in the player's desire to play. In this regard, according to this feature, the degree of difficulty in transitioning to the second gaming state is eased when the change condition is satisfied, and even if a situation occurs in which the transition to the second gaming state continues, the sense of anticipation and crisis is reduced. This can stimulate the player's desire to play, making it possible to sustain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest by making it easier to shift to the second gaming state depending on the gaming situation, which improves the level of interest.

Note that each configuration described in any of the above features J2 to J16 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature J18. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
A ball entry area (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter;
Award determination means (executes the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) that determines whether a predetermined award condition (V winning) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. function) and
Privilege awarding means capable of awarding a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the awarding condition is determined to be satisfied by the awarding determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 by the main controller 81) and,
a state transition means for shifting the gaming state (a function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the ease with which the granting conditions are met is different from the first gaming state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
a specific condition determining means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 by the main controller 81) for determining whether a predetermined specific condition (first condition) is satisfied in the first gaming state;
When the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the second gaming state is made easier or the transition to the second gaming state is made easier than when the specific condition is not satisfied. Allowable transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the main controller 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether the awarding condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and the benefit is provided when it is determined that the awarding condition is satisfied. Below, as a game state, there are provided a first game state and a second game state in which the ease with which grant conditions are satisfied is different from the first game state, and when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the game The configuration is such that the state easily shifts to the second gaming state or allows the state to shift to the second gaming state.

For example, if the difficulty level of transition to the second gaming state is made uniform, if the transition condition remains unsatisfied during a game, the expectation for transitioning to the second gaming state (second gaming state If the situation is undesirable for the player, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to feel a sense of crisis, which may lead to a decline in the player's desire to play. In this regard, according to this feature, the degree of difficulty in transitioning to the second gaming state is eased when the change condition is satisfied, and even if a situation occurs in which the transition to the second gaming state continues, the sense of anticipation and crisis is reduced. This can stimulate the player's desire to play, making it possible to sustain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest by making it easier to shift to the second gaming state depending on the gaming situation, which improves the level of interest.

Note that each configuration described in any of the above features J2 to J16 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
A ball entry area (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter;
Award determination means (executes the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) that determines whether a predetermined award condition (V winning) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. function) and
a privilege awarding means (a function of executing the processing of S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of awarding a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the awarding condition is determined to be satisfied by the awarding determination means; ,
a state transition means for shifting the gaming state (a function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the ease with which the granting conditions are met is different from the first gaming state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
A special transition means (processing of steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main control device 81 function) and
A transition condition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606 by the main controller 81, function to execute the processing of S4607, S4611, and S4612);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether the awarding condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and the benefit is provided when it is determined that the awarding condition is satisfied. Below, the game state includes a first game state and a second game state in which the granting conditions are different in ease of fulfillment from the first game state, and a predetermined change condition is set as the transition condition to the second game state. The configuration can be changed once it is established.

For example, if the conditions for transition to the second gaming state are fixed, there is a concern that the transition route will be unified and the game will become monotonous. Furthermore, if the transition condition remains unfulfilled for a long period of time during gaming, it becomes increasingly difficult to have a sense of expectation for the transition condition to be satisfied (or a sense of crisis if the second gaming state is undesirable for the player), and the player's desire to play decreases. There is also a risk of causing attenuation.

In this regard, according to the present feature, since the transition condition can be changed when the change condition is satisfied, the transition route can be diversified, and the monotony of the game can be suppressed. Moreover, by changing the transition conditions, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation and a sense of crisis regarding the fulfillment of the transition conditions, making it possible to sustain the player's desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest by changing the transition conditions, improving the interest.

In addition, according to the above configuration, since the change condition is established based on a predetermined game result, it is possible to change the transition condition during the game. In this case, the player is interested in whether or not the transition to the second gaming state will occur, and the transition conditions will be changed. In other words, the goals to be achieved and the goals to be avoided can be changed during the game, making it possible to diversify the gameplay.

Feature K2. The transition condition changing means changes the transition condition from a first transition condition (winning the unfavorable special losing result C) to a second transition condition that is more likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition based on the fulfillment of the change condition. Feature K1 characterized by being equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of S4407, S4410, S4411, S4611, and S4612 by the main controller 81) that can change the condition (winning the disadvantageous special winning result D). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the change condition is satisfied, it becomes easier to shift to the second gaming state. For example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, in addition to the fun of satisfying the transition condition, it is possible to provide the fun of satisfying the change condition, and the second game state If the state is undesirable for the player, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition in addition to the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the transition condition, and the interest is improved.

Feature K3. The transition condition changing means changes the transition condition from a first transition condition (winning the unfavorable special losing result D) based on the fulfillment of the change condition to a second transition condition that is less likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition. Feature K1 characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of S4407, S4414, S4415, S4606, and S4607 by the main controller 81) that can change the condition (winning the disadvantageous special winning result C). Or the gaming machine described in feature K2.

According to the above configuration, when the change condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to shift to the second gaming state. For example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, in addition to the fun of satisfying the transition condition, it is possible to add the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition. If the game state is undesirable for the player, in addition to the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the transition condition, the fun of enjoying the satisfaction of the change condition can be added, and the interest is improved.

Note that when feature K3 is applied to feature K2, "the transition condition is changed from the second transition condition to the first transition condition based on the fulfillment of the change condition or a specific condition different from the change condition." It can be read as "having a means for making changes." According to this configuration, mutual conversion between a state in which it is easy to shift to the second gaming state and a state in which it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state is possible. This makes it possible to further diversify the gameplay and improve the level of interest.

Feature K4. Multiple conditions can be set as the transition conditions,
When a plurality of conditions are set as the transition conditions, the special transition means is capable of transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state based on one of the plurality of conditions being satisfied. have the means,
According to any one of features K1 to K3, the transition condition changing means includes means capable of adding a condition to the transition condition based on the fulfillment of the change condition. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the larger the number of conditions set as transition conditions, the easier it is to transition to the second gaming state, and it becomes possible to increase the number of transition conditions by satisfying the change condition. . In this case, it becomes easier to shift to the second gaming state as the change condition is satisfied, so for example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, it is possible to add the fun of fulfilling the change condition. Become. Note that the number of transition conditions is not limited to the addition of one condition, but may be the addition of a plurality of conditions.

Feature K5. Multiple conditions can be set as the transition conditions,
When a plurality of conditions are set as the transition conditions, the special transition means is capable of transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state based on one of the plurality of conditions being satisfied. have the means,
Feature K1 characterized in that the transition condition changing means includes means that can invalidate at least one of the plurality of conditions set as the transition condition based on the fulfillment of the change condition. The gaming machine according to any one of K4 to K4.

According to the above configuration, the larger the number of conditions set as transition conditions, the easier it is to transition to the second gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the number of transition conditions by satisfying the change condition. Become. In this case, it becomes difficult to shift to the second gaming state when the change condition is satisfied, so for example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, it is possible to add the pleasure of avoiding the fulfillment of the change condition. It becomes possible.

Note that when feature K5 is applied to feature K4, "the transition condition changing means invalidates at least one of the plurality of conditions set as the transition condition based on the fact that the change condition is satisfied. It can be read as "we have the means to do so."

Note that each configuration described in any of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any of the configurations of the features K1 to K5. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature K6. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
a period information acquisition means (a function for executing a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) that acquires the period information from the period information storage means;
A specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and a period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means is elapsed. a specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81) capable of terminating the specific event based on the specified event;
Equipped with
Rather than acquiring first period information (fluctuation display time information of second long fluctuation) corresponding to the first period as the period information, second period information (corresponding to a second period different from the first period) is acquired. The second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information) is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to obtain the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information.
Equipped with a state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81),
The gaming states to which the state transition means can transition include a second gaming state (a special table selection state) in which the ease of acquiring the second period information is different from the first gaming state (a normal table selection state). Contains
The state transition means is
A special transition means (processing of steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main control device 81 function) and
A transition condition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606 by the main controller 81, function to execute the processing of S4607, S4611, and S4612);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event that has occurred is determined based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means. Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period as the period than to select the first period. In this way, by having a structure in which the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the period in which a specific event occurs, it is possible to distinguish it from conventional games in which winning results are drawn through a lottery. It becomes possible to provide novel gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the condition for transition to the second gaming state can be changed by establishing the change condition based on a predetermined game result, so the effect of the feature K1 described above is achieved. can be played synergistically.

Note that each configuration described in any of the above features K2 to K5 and features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature K7. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning in the first operating port 33), and a first specific event period (first variation) is generated. a first specific event control means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (a game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (a winning in the second operating port 34), and a second specific event period (second variation) is generated. a second specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
If one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. a benefit granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) that can grant a benefit to the player based on the player's performance;
A state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the ease of establishing the specific state is different from the first gaming state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
A special transition means (processing of steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main control device 81 function) and
A transition condition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606 by the main controller 81, function to execute the processing of S4607, S4611, and S4612);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is met, the first specific event is controlled to be performed over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is met, the second specific event is controlled to be performed during the second specific event period. Under the configuration that the event is controlled to be carried out over the event period, the second specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events earlier than the first specific event period elapses. If the player does so, the player is provided with a benefit. In this way, by having a structure that determines whether or not a benefit is given depending on which period passes earlier, it is different from conventional games where the winning result is drawn through a lottery. This makes it possible to provide innovative gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the condition for transition to the second gaming state can be changed by establishing the change condition based on a predetermined game result, so the effect of the feature K1 described above is achieved. can be played synergistically.

Note that each configuration described in any of the above features K2 to K5 and features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature K8. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
A ball entry area (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter;
Award determination means (executes the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) that determines whether a predetermined award condition (V winning) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. function) and
a privilege awarding means (a function of executing the processing of S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of awarding a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the awarding condition is determined to be satisfied by the awarding determination means; ,
State transition means (main controller 81),
A plurality of the first game states are set (first precursor state 602a, second precursor state 602b),
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the first gaming states is configured to have a different ease of transition to the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to shift to the second gaming state in which the granting conditions are more easily met than in the first gaming state, the player aims to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. play games. Under such a configuration, a plurality of first gaming states are set, and each first gaming state is configured to have a different ease of transition to the second gaming state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to stay in the first gaming state, where it is easy to transition to the second gaming state, as a step before shifting to the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows players to enjoy not only whether they can move to the second gaming state but also which first gaming state they stay in, thereby making it possible to improve the level of interest.

Note that each configuration described in any of the above features K1 to K7 and features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball based on a predetermined firing operation;
A ball entry area (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter;
Award determination means (executes the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) that determines whether a predetermined award condition (V winning) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. function) and
a privilege awarding means (a function of executing the processing of S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of awarding a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the awarding condition is determined to be satisfied by the awarding determination means; ,
a state transition means for shifting the gaming state (a function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the ease with which the granting conditions are met is different from the first gaming state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
A special transition means (processing of steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main control device 81 function) and
Transition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4607, S4611, S4612 by the main controller 81 functions) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether the awarding condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and the benefit is provided when it is determined that the awarding condition is satisfied. Below, as a game state, there are provided a first game state and a second game state in which the ease with which the granting conditions are satisfied is different from the first game state, and the transition condition is satisfied when a predetermined change condition is satisfied. The configuration allows the ease of use to be changed. In this case, the degree of difficulty in establishing the transition condition can be changed depending on whether the change condition is satisfied, and the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be adjusted. As a result, compared to a case where the difficulty level of establishing the transition condition is fixed, the expectation of transitioning to the second gaming state (or the sense of crisis if the second gaming state is undesirable for the player) fluctuates. This makes it easier to cause problems and improves interest.

Feature L2. The transition change means changes the environment for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the change condition from a first environment to a second environment in which the transition condition is different from the first environment in that the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with environment changing means (a function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81) that can change the environment.

According to the above configuration, the environment in which it is determined whether the transition condition is met is changed from the first environment to the second environment based on the satisfaction of the change condition. Thereby, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed in a practically preferable manner.

Feature L3. The environment changing means includes means for changing from the first environment to the second environment by changing the probability that the transition condition is satisfied from a first probability to a second probability different from the first probability. The gaming machine according to feature L2.

According to the above configuration, simple control is performed by preparing a mode in which the transition condition is satisfied as a judgment mode with a first probability and a mode in which it is satisfied with a second probability, and switching between them when the change condition is satisfied. It is possible to change the ease with which the transition condition is met, making it possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load.

Feature L4. The environment changing means changes from the first environment to the second environment by changing the determination frequency of the satisfaction of the transition condition from a first frequency to a second frequency different from the first frequency. The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for.

According to the above configuration, a mode that can be determined at the first frequency and a mode that can be determined at the second frequency are prepared as modes for determining whether the transition condition is met, and it is easy to switch between them when the change condition is satisfied. It is possible to change the ease with which a transition condition is met through control, and it is possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load.

Feature L5. The environment changing means includes means for changing from the first environment to the second environment by changing the trigger for determining whether the transition condition is met from a first trigger to a second trigger different from the first trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4.

According to the above configuration, a mode that can be determined based on the first trigger and a mode that can be determined based on the second trigger are prepared as the modes of determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and these are determined based on the establishment of the change condition. The ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed by simple control such as switching, making it possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load.

Feature L6. The environment changing means includes means for changing from the first environment to the second environment by changing the transition condition from a first transition condition to a second transition condition different from the first transition condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5.

According to the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are prepared as the transition condition, and the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied is changed by simple control of switching them when the change condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load.

Note that each configuration described in any of the features K2 to K8 above may be applied to the feature L6. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L6, wherein the second environment is more likely to satisfy the transition condition than the first environment.

According to the above configuration, when the change condition is satisfied, it becomes easier to shift to the second gaming state. For example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, in addition to the fun of satisfying the transition condition, it is possible to provide the fun of satisfying the change condition, and the second game state If the state is undesirable for the player, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition in addition to the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the transition condition, and the interest is improved.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L6, wherein the second environment is one in which the transition condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first environment.

According to the above configuration, when the change condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to shift to the second gaming state. For example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, in addition to the fun of satisfying the transition condition, it is possible to add the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition. If the game state is undesirable for the player, in addition to the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the transition condition, the fun of enjoying the satisfaction of the change condition can be added, and the interest is improved.

Note that when feature L8 is applied to feature L7, feature L8 is changed to "an environment for determining whether the transition condition is met based on the fulfillment of the change condition or a specific condition different from the change condition". It can be read as "the environment is provided with means for changing from the environment to the first environment." According to this configuration, mutual conversion between a state in which it is easy to shift to the second gaming state and a state in which it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state is possible. This makes it possible to further diversify the gameplay and improve the level of interest.

Note that each configuration described in any of the features J1 to J17 may be applied to any of the features L1 to L8. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature L9. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
a period information acquisition means (a function for executing a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) that acquires the period information from the period information storage means;
A specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and a period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means is elapsed. a specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81) capable of terminating the specific event based on the specified event;
Equipped with
Rather than acquiring first period information (fluctuation display time information of second long fluctuation) corresponding to the first period as the period information, second period information (corresponding to a second period different from the first period) is acquired. The second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information) is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to obtain the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information.
Equipped with a state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81),
The gaming states to which the state transition means can transition include a second gaming state (a special table selection state) in which the ease of acquiring the second period information is different from the first gaming state (a normal table selection state). Contains
The state transition means is
A special transition means (processing of steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main control device 81 function) and
Transition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4607, S4611, S4612 by the main controller 81 functions) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event that has occurred is determined based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means. Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period as the period than to select the first period. In this way, by having a structure in which the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the period in which a specific event occurs, it is possible to distinguish it from conventional games in which winning results are drawn through a lottery. It becomes possible to provide novel gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game. Further, according to the above configuration, the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed when a predetermined change condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the feature L1 can be synergistically achieved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features L2 to L8 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature L10. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning in the first operating port 33), and a first specific event period (first variation) is generated. a first specific event control means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (a game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (a winning in the second operating port 34), and a second specific event period (second variation) is generated. a second specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
If one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. a benefit granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) that can grant a benefit to the player based on the player's performance;
A state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the ease of establishing the specific state is different from the first gaming state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
A special transition means (processing of steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main control device 81 function) and
Transition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4607, S4611, S4612 by the main controller 81 functions) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is met, the first specific event is controlled to be performed over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is met, the second specific event is controlled to be performed during the second specific event period. Under the configuration that the event is controlled to be carried out over the event period, the second specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events earlier than the first specific event period elapses. If the player does so, the player is provided with a benefit. In this way, by having a structure that determines whether or not a benefit is given depending on which period passes earlier, it is different from conventional games where the winning result is drawn through a lottery. This makes it possible to provide innovative gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game. Further, according to the above configuration, the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed when a predetermined change condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the feature L1 can be synergistically achieved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features L2 to L8 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
a period information acquisition means (a function for executing a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) that acquires the period information from the period information storage means;
A specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and a period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means is elapsed. a specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81) capable of terminating the specific event based on the specified event;
Equipped with
Rather than acquiring first period information (fluctuation display time information of second long fluctuation) corresponding to the first period as the period information, second period information (corresponding to a second period different from the first period) is acquired. The second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information) is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to obtain the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information.
Equipped with a state transition means (a function for executing state transition determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81) for transitioning the gaming state,
The gaming states to which the state transition means can transition include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the second period information is more easily acquired than the first gaming state (normal table selection state). Ori,
The second gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states (first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b) in which the second period information is obtained with different ease,
The state transition means includes special transition means (state transition determination processing by the main controller 81, A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing table switching processing.

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event that has occurred is determined based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means. Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period as the period than to select the first period. In this way, by having a structure in which the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the period in which a specific event occurs, it is possible to draw a clear line from conventional games in which winning results are drawn by lottery. It becomes possible to provide novel gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, in the second gaming state where the second period information is more easily acquired than in the first gaming state, the configuration includes a plurality of special gaming states in which the second period information is obtained with different ease. It is possible to build an advantageous state, and it is possible to realize a game feature in which the degree of advantage is diversified and the game moves to an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the gaming state will shift to the second gaming state, but also the expectation that the gaming state will shift to a special gaming state with a high degree of advantage, thereby improving interest.

Feature M2. The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state 603b),
The period information storage means is configured to be able to store the period information as a period information group,
The period information group includes a first period information group (special table A) that includes at least the second period information, and a second period information group (special table A) that includes at least the second period information, and a second period information group (special table A) in which the ratio of the second period information is different from that of the first period information group. There is a special table B).
In the first special game state, the period information acquisition means acquires the period information from the first period information group, and in the second special game state, the period information acquisition means acquires the period information from the second period information group. The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to acquire period information.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the advantageous degree of an advantageous state with a simple configuration that controls only the selection of which period information is to be acquired from the first and second period information groups, and the above characteristics It becomes possible to realize the configuration of M1 in a practically preferable manner.

Feature M3. The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state 603b),
Feature M1 or a feature characterized in that it is provided with means for making the transition period when transitioning to the second special gaming state different from the transition period when transitioning to the first special gaming state. The gaming machine described in M2.

According to the above structure, it is possible to diversify the degree of advantage of advantageous states with a simple structure that only differs the transition period of each special game state, and the structure of the above feature M1 is realized in a practically preferable manner. becomes possible.

Feature M4. The special transition means are:
Based on the fact that the number corresponding to the number of executions of the predetermined process after transitioning to the special gaming state (the number of executions of the second special figure game, the number of selections of the special table) is a specific number (specified number of times). A termination means capable of terminating the special gaming state;
a specific number setting means for setting the specific number of the special gaming state when the special gaming state is entered;
The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state 603b),
Any one of features M1 to M3, characterized in that the specific number setting means includes means for making the specific number in the first special gaming state different from the specific number in the second special gaming state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above structure, it is possible to diversify the degree of advantage of advantageous states with a simple structure of varying the specific number of each special game state, and the structure of the above feature M1 is realized in a practically preferable manner. becomes possible.

Feature M5. The period information storage means is configured to be able to store the period information as a period information group,
Feature M3 or Feature M4, characterized in that the period information acquisition means includes means for acquiring the period information from the same period information group in the first special game state and the second special game state. The gaming machine described in .

While the degree of advantage is diversified by making the transition period of each special gaming state different, by making the period information group used in the first and second special gaming states common, the amount of usage of the period information storage means This makes it possible to save on storage capacity and achieve an optimal configuration even when storage capacity is limited.

Feature M6. The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state) in which the second period information is more easily acquired than the first special gaming state. 603b),
The state transition means includes means capable of shifting the gaming state to the second special gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition (promotion condition) in the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5.

In a configuration in which a plurality of special gaming states with different degrees of advantage are provided as advantageous states that can be transitioned from the normal state, for example, it is advantageous to have a configuration in which the gaming state is fixed until the end of the transition to the advantageous state. There is a risk that the player will be disappointed if the game moves to the first special game state with a lower level. In this regard, according to the present configuration, it is possible to shift to the second special gaming state even after shifting to the first special gaming state, so the first special gaming state can be changed while expecting to shift to the second special gaming state. This allows the player to play the game, reduce player's disappointment, and continuously increase the player's desire to play.

Feature M7. The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state) in which the second period information is more easily acquired than the first special gaming state. 603b),
The state transition means includes means capable of shifting the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on a predetermined specific condition (demotion condition) being satisfied in the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6.

According to the above configuration, even if the game moves to the second special gaming state where the advantage is high, there is a possibility that the game moves to the first special gaming state where the advantage is low. As a result, it is possible to add the fun of playing the second special game state while avoiding transition to the first special game state, and the interest level is improved.

Note that when this feature is applied to feature M6, the "predetermined specific condition" may be read as "the specific condition or a predetermined condition different from the specific condition."

Note that each configuration described in any of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any of the features M1 to M6. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature M8. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning in the first operating port 33), and a first specific event period (first variation) is generated. a first specific event control means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (a game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (a winning in the second operating port 34), and a second specific event period (second variation) is generated. a second specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
If one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. a benefit granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) that can grant a benefit to the player based on the player's performance;
A state transition means for transitioning the gaming state (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first gaming state (normal table selection state);
The second gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states (first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b) in which the second period information is obtained with different ease,
The state transition means includes special transition means (state transition determination processing by the main controller 81, A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing table switching processing.

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is met, the first specific event is controlled to be performed over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is met, the second specific event is controlled to occur during the second specific event period. Under the configuration that the event is controlled to be carried out over the event period, the second specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events earlier than the first specific event period elapses. If the player does so, the player is provided with a benefit. In this way, by having a structure that determines whether or not a benefit is given depending on which period passes earlier, it is different from conventional games where the winning result is drawn through a lottery. This makes it possible to provide innovative gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, since the second gaming state in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states with different ease of establishing the specific state, a plurality of advantageous states are created. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a game feature in which the degree of advantage is diversified and the game moves to an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the gaming state will shift to the second gaming state, but also the expectation that the gaming state will shift to a special gaming state with a high degree of advantage, thereby improving interest.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features M2 to M7 and features J1 to J18 may be applied to the feature M8. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
a period information acquisition means (a function for executing a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) that acquires the period information from the period information storage means;
A specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the fulfillment of a predetermined generation condition (second operating port 34), and corresponds to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means. a specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on the elapse of a period;
Equipped with
Rather than acquiring first period information (fluctuation display time information of second long fluctuation) corresponding to the first period as the period information, second period information (corresponding to a second period different from the first period) is acquired. The second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information) is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to obtain the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time information.
The period information storage means stores a first period information group (normal table) including at least the first period information as the period information, and the second period information is acquired by the acquisition means rather than the first period information group. A second period information group (special table) that is likely to be used is stored,
From a first state (normal table selection state) in which the period information acquisition means acquires the period information from the first period information group to a first state (normal table selection state) in which the period information acquisition means acquires the period information from the second period information group. 2 state (special table selection state) (a function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing by the main controller 81 and table switching processing);
The state transition means is
special transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4104 to S4112 by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to the second state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition;
Based on the fact that the number corresponding to the number of executions of the predetermined process after transitioning to the second state (the number of executions of the second special figure game, the number of selections of the special table) becomes a specific number (specified number of times). A termination means capable of terminating the second state (a function for executing table restoration processing by the main controller 81);
Changing means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number up to the specific number based on a predetermined change condition (addition condition) being satisfied in the second state (addition determination processing by the main controller 81, step function to execute the processing of S5101 to S5103),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the establishment of the occurrence condition, and the specific event that occurs ends based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means. Under the above, the configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period as the above-mentioned period than to select the first period. In this way, by having a configuration in which the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the period in which a specific event occurs, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay and greatly contribute to increasing the attention of the game. be able to.

Further, in the above configuration, the period information includes a first period information group including at least first period information and a second period information group from which the second period information is more easily acquired than the first period information group, and which period information is provided. The configuration is such that a transition to a state advantageous to the player is achieved by switching whether period information is acquired from the information group. For this reason, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without using a special winning result such as a jackpot as a trigger, and it is different from conventional games, which are based on winning a jackpot through a lottery, and it leaves a fresh impression on the player. can be given.

In addition, in the above configuration, after transitioning to the second state in which the second period information is easily acquired, if a predetermined change condition is satisfied, the specific number or the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be changed. There is. Thereby, the transition period to the second state can be changed fluidly, and it becomes difficult to predict how long the second state will last, which improves the interest. Moreover, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which the remaining number of times in the second state changes during the game in the second state, which can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Feature N2. The terminating means terminates the second state based on a number corresponding to the number of acquisitions of the period information from the second period information group reaching the specific number when transitioning to the second state. equipped with the means to
A feature characterized in that the changing means includes means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number of numbers corresponding to the number of acquisitions up to the specific number based on the satisfaction of the changing condition. The gaming machine described in N1.

According to the above configuration, by managing the number of times period information is acquired from the second period information group, the maintenance period of the second state can be managed, thereby simplifying the control processing and reducing the processing load. becomes possible. Furthermore, by changing the specific number or the remaining number of acquisition times based on the establishment of the change condition, it is possible to fluidly change the maintenance period of the second state after the start of the second state, and the configuration of feature N1 described above can be realized in a practically preferable manner.

Feature N3. The terminating means includes means capable of terminating the second state based on the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the specific event reaching the specific number when transitioning to the second state;
A feature characterized in that the changing means includes means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number of the number corresponding to the number of occurrences up to the specific number based on the satisfaction of the changing condition. The gaming machine described in N1 or feature N2.

According to the above configuration, by managing the number of occurrences of a specific event, it is possible to manage the maintenance period of the second state, and it is possible to simplify the control process and reduce the processing load. Furthermore, by changing the specific number or the remaining number of occurrences based on the establishment of the change condition, it is possible to fluidly change the maintenance period of the second state after the start of the second state, and the configuration of feature N1 described above It becomes possible to realize this in a practically preferable manner.

Note that feature N3 is defined as "the specific event control means is configured to cause the specific event to occur as a first specific event, and the specific event control means is configured to cause the specific event to occur as a first specific event, and the specific event control means is configured to cause the specific event to occur as a first specific event, and when a predetermined second occurrence condition (winning to the first operating port 33) is met. A second specific event control means (a function for executing the second game cycle control process by the main control device 81) is provided, which generates a second specific event (game cycle of the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second specific event, and the termination means , the second state is set based on the fact that when the gaming state shifts to the second state, a number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes the specific number; The change means may include means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number of the number corresponding to the number of occurrences up to the specific number.''

In this case, "the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes a specific number" means that the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the first specific event becomes a specific number. the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the second specific event becomes a specific number, the number corresponding to the total number of occurrences of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes a specific number, the first specific event The same or different specific numbers are set for each of the and second specific events, and the number corresponding to at least one of the number of occurrences of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes the specific number.

Feature N4. The changing means is
an addition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5103 by the main controller 81) that adds a predetermined number to the specific number or the remaining number based on the fulfillment of the change condition;
means capable of setting the number to which the predetermined number has been added by the adding means as the new specific number or the remaining number (a function for executing table restoration processing by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the remaining number of times of the second state can be increased by satisfying the change condition, and it is possible to extend the transition period to the second state. This adds the fun of enjoying the change condition being satisfied in the second state, and improves the interest.

Feature N5. There are multiple types of numbers that can be added to the specific number or the remaining number,
comprising a selection means for selecting an addition number from the plurality of types of numbers,
The gaming machine according to feature N4, wherein the addition means adds the addition number selected by the selection means as the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add the fun of not only seeing whether the remaining number of times in the second state increases, but also how much the number of times remaining in the second state increases, thereby further improving the level of interest. becomes possible.

Feature N6. Privilege awarding means (game state transition processing by the main controller 81) that can award a privilege (V jackpot) to the player based on the fulfillment of a predetermined awarding condition (passing of a game ball in the V winning area 356) ),
Any of the features N1 to N5 characterized in that the provision condition is more easily satisfied when the second period information is acquired as the period information than when the first period information is acquired. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to receive benefits by transitioning to the second state, and furthermore, by changing the remaining period of the second state, the expectation level that the benefits will be granted by the end of the second state can be changed. For example, if the remaining period of the second state is extended, the expectation level for awarding benefits can be improved, and conversely, if the remaining period of the second state is shortened, the expectation level for awarding benefits can be lowered. That is, in the second state, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the degree of expectation for the award of the award increases and decreases while aiming for the award of the award, and the interest level is improved.

Feature N7. a state setting means capable of setting the state after the grant of the benefit to the second state when the benefit is granted based on the establishment of the grant condition in the second state;
When the second state is set by the state setting means, the specific number or the remaining number when the second state is started, the specific number or the remaining number at the time of awarding the award or immediately before the awarding of the award. a number setting means that can be set to a number corresponding to;
The gaming machine according to feature N6, comprising:

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to carry over the remaining period of the second state, which has been increased or decreased due to the establishment of the change condition, to the game after the bonus is granted. As a result, whether or not the change condition is met can be reflected in the ease with which the next benefit will be awarded, improving interest.

Feature N8. The state transition means includes an initial specified number setting means (step S4111 by the main controller 81) that sets a predetermined initial specified number (initial prescribed number of times) as the initial specified number when the gaming state shifts to the second state. function),
The number setting means, when the second state is set by the state setting means, sets the specific number or the remaining number when the second state is started to provide the benefit to the initial specific number. The gaming machine according to feature N7, further comprising means for setting the number to correspond to the sum of the specific number or the remaining number immediately before the award of the benefit.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to use the remaining number of times in the second state carried over from before the award of benefits as an addition to the initial specified number. This suppresses the inconvenience that the ease with which benefits are granted is limited when the carryover amount is less than the initial specified number.

Feature N9. The change means includes a subtraction means for subtracting a predetermined number from the specific number or the remaining number based on the change condition being satisfied;
means capable of setting the number after the predetermined number has been subtracted by the subtraction means as the new specific number or the remaining number;
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the remaining number of times in the second state can be reduced by satisfying the change condition, and it is possible to shorten the transition period to the second state. This adds the fun of avoiding satisfaction of the change condition in the second state, and improves the interest.

Feature N10. There is a first specific state and a second specific state in which the change condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the first specific state,
Features N1 to N9 include a changing state transition means capable of transitioning from the first specific state to the second specific state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined state transition condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to construct a period (zone) in which the remaining number of times is easily changed in the second state. As a result, the ease with which the remaining number of times is changed in the second state can be varied, and the interest level can be improved.

Feature N11. The change means includes means for performing a change determination process to determine whether the change condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N10, characterized in that the change determination process can be executed multiple times in the second state.

According to the above configuration, since the change determination process can be performed multiple times in the second state, it becomes easier for the player to experience changing the remaining number of times in the second state. For example, if changing the remaining number of times in the second state is desirable for the player, even if the change condition is not satisfied in the first change determination process, it can be expected in the subsequent change determination process. This makes it possible to enjoy the changes in the remaining period of the second state until the end of the second state.

Feature N12. A plurality of the second states are set, and each of the second states is configured such that the ease with which the change condition is met is different from each other,
According to any one of features N1 to N11, the special transition means includes means capable of transitioning to any one of a plurality of second states when transitioning to the second state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the gaming state will shift to the second state, but also the expectation that the gaming state will shift to the second state in which the change condition is likely to be satisfied, thereby improving interest. Note that the configurations of the features M2 to M7 described above may be applied to the feature N12. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature N13. A firing means (launching device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The specific event control means includes means for generating the specific event based on the ball entering the ball entry section,
The changing means includes means for determining whether or not the changing conditions are satisfied based on the ball entering the ball entering section (a function for executing processing for additional determination by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N12.

According to the above configuration, the change condition determination process can be incorporated into the specific event control process, and the change condition determination process can be executed as part of the control process. As a result, compared to a configuration in which both processes are performed separately, the control process can be simplified, and processing failures in determining whether the change condition is satisfied can be suppressed.

Feature N14. A firing means (launching device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
a winning/failure lottery means (a function for executing the processing of steps S611 and S911 by the main controller 81) for performing a win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the ball entry section;
The changing means is a means for making it possible to satisfy the changing condition based on the fact that the lottery result of the win/fail lottery becomes a specific non-winning result (special winning result) (execution of additional determination processing by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N13, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the lottery result of the win/fail lottery will be a winning result, but also the expectation and sense of crisis that the lottery result will be a specific non-winning result, thereby improving interest. I can do it. Furthermore, the processing for determining whether the change condition is met can be incorporated into the control processing for the winning/failure lottery, and the same effect as the feature N13 described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, each configuration described for any of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any of the features N1 to N14. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Characteristics Group O>
Feature O1. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a first ball entry part (first operating port 33) and a second ball entry part (second operating port 34) that are provided in the gaming area and into which game balls can enter;
A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part, and a first specific event period (first variable display time) elapses. a first specific event control means (a function for executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the first specific event;
A second specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry part, and a second specific event period (second variable display time) elapses. a second specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81) capable of terminating the second specific event based on the second specific event;
If one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. a benefit granting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a benefit (V jackpot) to the player based on the player's performance;
A limiting means capable of limiting the frequency of entry of game balls into the second ball entry section (through gate 35, electric accessory 34a, a function of executing electric accessory support processing by the main controller 81);
a state transition means for shifting the gaming state (a function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first gaming state (normal table selection state);
The state transition means transitions the gaming state to the second gaming state based on a predetermined transition condition (that the result of determining whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot result) is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S6201 to S6203 by the main control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first ball entry section, the first specific event is controlled to be performed over the first specific event period, and when the game ball enters the second ball entry section, Under the configuration in which the second specific event is controlled to occur over the second specific event period, sooner than the first specific event period has elapsed from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events. When the second specific event period has elapsed, a bonus is given to the player. In this way, by having a structure that determines whether or not a benefit is given depending on which period passes earlier, it is different from conventional games where the winning result is drawn through a lottery. This makes it possible to provide innovative gameplay. This can give a fresh impression to the players and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, a second gaming state in which a specific state is likely to be established is provided, and a transition to the second gaming state is made based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition. Thereby, it is possible to provide the fun of realizing a transition to the second gaming state by satisfying the transition condition. However, in this configuration, the establishment of a specific state is a condition for awarding the benefit, so in order to award the benefit, it is not enough to simply shift the gaming state to the second gaming state; It is necessary to enter the game ball into the ball entry section. This is because the establishment of the specific state requires the occurrence of the second specific event.

Furthermore, in this configuration, since the present configuration includes a limiting means that can limit the frequency of entry of game balls into the second ball entry section, it becomes easier to obtain benefits naturally when the gaming state shifts to the second gaming state. In addition to this simple gameplay, we also added a gameplay feature in which you can earn benefits if you manage to get the ball into the second ball area as the difficulty of entering the second ball area is increased. This makes it possible to improve interest.

Feature O2. The limiting means is
a passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the gaming area and through which a gaming ball can pass;
A first state provided in the gaming area, in which the second ball entry section can accept or easily accept a game ball, and a second state in which the second ball entry section cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) capable of switching between the state and the state;
Acceptance determining means (executing electric role support processing by the main controller 81 function) and
acceptance switching means (a function for executing electric power opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on the determination result of the acceptance determination means;
The gaming machine according to feature O1, comprising:

According to the above configuration, by adjusting the ease with which the game ball passes through the passage portion and the probability that the determination result of the acceptance determination means corresponds to setting the variable acceptance means in the first state, the second The frequency of balls entering the ball portion can be easily limited, and the configuration of the feature O1 described above can be realized in a practically preferable manner.

Feature O3. A game ball flowing down a first flowing path on the gaming area can or easily enters the second ball entry section, and a gaming ball flowing down a second flowing path on the gaming area can enter the second ball entering section. It is configured such that the ball cannot enter the ball part or it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down the first flow path,
On the upstream side of the first downstream path and the second downstream path, there is provided a distribution means capable of allocating game balls flowing down the gaming area to the first downstream path and the second downstream path. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the frequency of balls entering the second ball entering section depending on the distribution manner of the distribution means, in other words, the falling manner of the game balls. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the flow of game balls, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature O4. When the gaming state shifts to the second gaming state, the second gaming state is changed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined end condition (that the number of times the second special symbol is played is a specified number of times). The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a termination means that can terminate the game.

According to the above configuration, a game feature is provided in which the game ball enters the second ball entry section by the end of the second game state while the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry section is limited. can do. This makes it possible to play the game while feeling a sense of danger that the second game state will end without a ball entering the second ball entry area, thereby improving interest.

Feature O5. The ending means can end the second gaming state based on a number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event reaching a specific number (a specified number of times). The gaming machine according to feature O4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means.

According to the above configuration, the second gaming state ends when the number of occurrences of at least one of the first and second specific events reaches a specific number, so that the conditions for ending the second gaming state are easy to understand for the player. can do. In addition, by managing the number of occurrences of at least one of the first and second specific events, the maintenance period of the second gaming state can be managed, making it possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load. become.

In addition, in feature O5, "the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes a specific number" means that the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the first specific event is a specific number. the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the second specific event becomes a specific number; the number corresponding to the total number of occurrences of the first and second specific events becomes a specific number; This includes that the same or different specific numbers are set for each of the two specific events, and the specific number is a number corresponding to at least one of the number of occurrences of the first and second specific events.

In addition, in feature O5, "the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event" is changed to "the number of occurrences of the first specific event and the second specific event after transitioning to the second gaming state." It may be read as "the number of occurrences of at least one of them." Furthermore, it may be read as "the number of occurrences of the first specific event" or "the number of occurrences of the first specific event after transitioning to the second gaming state", and in this case, the number of occurrences of the first specific event after transitioning to the second gaming state. It is possible to achieve harmony with the configuration that limits the ball entry frequency (occurrence frequency of the second specific event).

Feature O6. The state transition means includes a change means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number up to the specific number based on a predetermined change condition (additional condition) being satisfied in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature O5.

According to the above configuration, the second gaming state ends when the number of occurrences of at least one of the first and second specific events reaches a specific number, and the predetermined change condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. Accordingly, the specific number or the remaining number can be changed. Thereby, the transition period of the second gaming state can be changed fluidly, making it difficult to predict how long the second gaming state will last, and improving the interest. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the remaining number of times in the second game state changes during the game in the second game state, which can greatly contribute to increasing the attention level of the game.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features N1 to N14 may be applied to the feature O6. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature O7. The limiting means is
a passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the gaming area and through which a gaming ball can pass;
A first state provided in the gaming area, in which the second ball entry section can accept or easily accept a game ball, and a second state in which the second ball entry section cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) capable of switching between the state and the state;
Acceptance determining means (executing electric role support processing by the main controller 81 function) and
acceptance switching means (a function for executing electric power opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on the determination result of the acceptance determination means;
Equipped with
Feature O4 is characterized in that the termination means includes means capable of terminating the second gaming state based on the number corresponding to the number of determinations made by the acceptance determination means reaching a specific number. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, by configuring the second gaming state to end when the number of times of determination by the acceptance determining means reaches a specific number, the conditions for ending the second gaming state can be made easy for the player to understand. In addition, by managing the number of determinations made by the acceptance determining means, the period during which the second gaming state is maintained can be managed, making it possible to simplify control processing and reduce processing load.

Note that the configuration of the feature O6 described above may be applied to the feature O7. Moreover, each configuration described in any one of the features N1 to N14 may be further applied to the configuration in which the feature O6 is applied to the feature O7. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature O8. Feature O1, characterized in that the restriction means includes means for standardizing the degree of restriction on the frequency of entry of game balls into the second ball entry section between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of O7 to O7.

According to the above configuration, it is sufficient to change the state between the first gaming state and the second gaming state while leaving the degree of restriction on the frequency of balls entering the second ball entering section unchanged, and the control process can be simplified. It becomes possible.

Feature O9. It is characterized by comprising a determining means for determining whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section (first operating port 33) different from the second ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O8.

According to the above configuration, since the transition condition is determined to be satisfied based on the ball entering the ball entering section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the trigger for transitioning to the second gaming state, thereby increasing the ease of play. It becomes possible to improve. Based on this premise, we created a configuration that uses a ball entry section different from the second ball entry section, thereby ensuring an appropriate opportunity for transition judgment even though the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry section is limited. becomes possible. Note that the ball entry section different from the second ball entry section can be understood to include the first ball entry section.

Feature O10. The transition conditions include a first transition condition (the result of the judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result, and 16R jackpots A and B are selected as the jackpot type); has a different second transition condition (a V jackpot in the opening/closing execution mode when the judgment result of the second special symbol is an advantageous special failure result A or B),
The special transition means is means capable of transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the fulfillment of either the first transition condition or the second transition condition (steps by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O9, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the processes of S6201 to S6203.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to have both the gameplay of shifting to the second gaming state upon the satisfaction of the first transition condition and the gameplay of shifting to the second gaming state upon the establishment of the second transition condition. , it is possible to improve the interest compared to a configuration in which the transition conditions are unified.

Feature O11. Means for making the second transition condition more likely to be satisfied than before the first transition condition is satisfied based on the first transition condition being satisfied (the first special figure or the second special figure is determined to be a jackpot) The gaming machine according to feature O10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of shifting to an advantageous state 603 in which a V jackpot can occur or can easily occur due to a result.

According to the above configuration, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be changed to one in which the second transition condition is easily satisfied. In this case, before the first transition condition is satisfied, the game is played with the aim of satisfying the first transition condition, and after the first transition condition is satisfied, the game is played with the aim of fulfilling the second transition condition, and so on. The gaming method can be switched once the above is established. As a result, even though the game feature is to shift to the second gaming state upon the satisfaction of the first transition condition, and the gameplay to shift to the second gaming state upon the satisfaction of the second transition condition, the player may be confused. This makes it possible to improve the ease of play.

Feature O12. The second transition condition can be satisfied in the second gaming state, or the second transition condition can be satisfied more easily in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state (in advantageous state 603). A configuration in which only a V jackpot occurs or a configuration in which a V jackpot is likely to occur when an advantageous state 603 is reached),
The special transition means is means capable of transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state again after the end of the second gaming state based on the second shifting condition being satisfied in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature O10 or feature O11, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with (a function of executing the processing of steps S6203 to S6205 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to satisfy the second transition condition in the second gaming state that is transitioned based on the establishment of the first transition condition, and the second transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. In this case, the configuration is such that the gaming state can be shifted to the second gaming state again after the end of the second gaming state. Thereby, if the second transition condition is satisfied in the previous second gaming state, it is possible to repeatedly shift to the second gaming state, and it becomes possible to cause the second gaming state to occur continuously. As a result, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the specific state will be satisfied in the second gaming state, but also the expectation that the second transition condition will be satisfied, and the interest will be improved.

Feature O13. The second gaming state includes a plurality of special gaming states (first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b) in which the ease of establishing the specific state differs,
The special transition means is a specific transition means (processing of steps S6206 to S6210 by the main controller 81) that can transition the gaming state to any one of the plurality of special gaming states when the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O12, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above functions.

According to the above configuration, since the second game state includes a plurality of special game states in which the ease with which the specific state is established is different, a plurality of advantageous states can be established, and the degree of advantage is diversified. It becomes possible to realize a gaming feature that moves the player to an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the gaming state will shift to the second gaming state, but also the expectation that the gaming state will shift to a special gaming state with a high degree of advantage, thereby improving interest.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features M2 to M7 above may be applied to the special feature O13. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature O14. The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state 603b) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first gaming state. Contains
The state transition means includes means capable of shifting the gaming state to the second special gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition (promotion condition) in the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature O13.

In a configuration in which a plurality of special gaming states with different degrees of advantage are provided as advantageous states that can be transitioned from the normal state, for example, in a configuration in which the gaming state is fixed until the end of the transition to the advantageous state, There is a risk that the player will be disappointed when the game shifts to the 1 special game state (special game state with lower advantage). In this regard, according to the present configuration, it is possible to shift to the second special gaming state even after shifting to the first special gaming state, so the first special gaming state can be changed while expecting to shift to the second special gaming state. This allows the player to play the game, reduce the player's disappointment, and increase the player's desire to play.

Feature O15. The plurality of special gaming states include a first special gaming state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special gaming state (second advantageous state 603b) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first gaming state. Contains
The state transition means includes means capable of shifting the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on a predetermined specific condition (demotion condition) being satisfied in the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature O13 or feature O14.

According to the above configuration, even if the game moves to the second special gaming state where the advantage is high, there is a possibility that the game moves to the first special gaming state where the advantage is low. As a result, it is possible to add the fun of playing the second special game state while avoiding transition to the first special game state, and the interest level is improved.

Incidentally, when applying this feature to feature O14, the "predetermined specific condition" may be read as "the specific condition or a predetermined condition different from the specific condition."

Note that each configuration described in any of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any of the features O1 to O15. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature O16. A firing means (launching operation device 28) capable of firing a game ball to a gaming area based on a predetermined firing operation;
a ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
a period information acquisition means (a function for executing a second variable display time setting process by the main controller 81) that acquires the period information from the period information storage means;
A specific event (game round of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, and a period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means is elapsed. a specific event control means (a function for executing the second game round control process by the main control device 81) capable of terminating the specific event based on the specified event;
Privilege awarding means (main controller) capable of awarding a privilege (V jackpot) to a player based on acquisition of specific period information (fluctuation display time information of second short variation) corresponding to a specific period as the period information; 81);
A limiting means capable of limiting the frequency of entry of game balls into the second ball entry section (through gate 35, electric accessory 34a, a function of executing electric accessory support processing by the main controller 81);
a state transition means for shifting the gaming state (a function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming states that can be transferred by the state transition means include a second gaming state (special table selection state) in which the specific period is easier to obtain than the first gaming state (normal table selection state);
The state transition means transitions the gaming state to the second gaming state based on a predetermined transition condition (that the result of determining whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot result) is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a special transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S6201 to S6203 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature O1 can be achieved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features O2 to O15 and features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration. In this case, "establishment of a specific state" can be read as "obtaining a specific period", and "number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and second specific event" is replaced with "number of occurrences of the specific event". be able to.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. a first acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process based on the first operating mouth winning by the main control device 81: the process of S301 to S306) that acquires the first determination information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first acquisition condition; ,
A first lottery means (a first variation start process by the main controller 81 (a function that executes validity judgment processing);
a first specific control means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the first specific control based on the lottery result by the first lottery means;
A second acquisition means that acquires second determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first acquisition condition (winning processing based on the second operating opening winning by the main controller 81) : a function to execute the processing of S307 to S312),
A second lottery means (second variation start process by the main controller 81 (a function that executes validity judgment processing);
a second specific control means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the second specific control based on the lottery result by the second lottery means;
Equipped with
The first lottery means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery after the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means until the second specific control is executed,
The second lottery means is capable of executing the second lottery between when the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means and when the first specific control is executed; A configuration in which execution of the second specific control based on the second lottery can be restricted by executing the specific control,
a first specific state (low frequency support mode) in which the second acquisition condition is satisfied between when the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means and when the first specific control is executed;
a second specific state (high-frequency support mode) in which the second acquisition condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first lottery is executed by the first lottery means;
A gaming machine characterized by being set.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the execution of the second specific control based on the second lottery can be restricted by the execution of the first specific control, the period from the first lottery to the execution of the first specific control is A first specific state in which it is possible to execute the second lottery only during the period, and a second specific state in which it is possible to execute the second lottery regardless of whether or not the first lottery is executed are set. Therefore, various gaming features can be realized by the first specific state in which the second lottery is limited in relation to the first lottery and the second specific state in which the second lottery is not limited. For example, if the second specific state is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state, the player may want to perform the second specific control. 2. Execution of specific control may be restricted. On the other hand, in the second specific state, the second specific control can be performed independently of the first specific control. In this way, it becomes possible to construct a game that utilizes the relationships between a plurality of specific controls, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature P2. The gaming machine according to feature P1, characterized in that the case where the second specific control is performed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the first specific control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the gameplay illustrated in feature P1 can be suitably realized.

Feature P3. It is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and has a first ball entry part (first operating port 33) and a second ball entry part (second operating port 34) into which a game ball can enter,
The first acquisition condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section,
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2, characterized in that the second acquisition condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, since each acquisition condition is satisfied by events such as the ball entering the first ball entering section and the ball entering the second ball entering section, an operation by the player is required. It is possible to avoid a situation where an acquisition condition is met without permission. Therefore, the gameplay in the first specific state in which the first acquisition condition is satisfied in order to satisfy the second acquisition condition, and the gameplay in the second specific state in which the second acquisition condition is satisfied regardless of whether the first acquisition condition is satisfied. , can be performed while allowing the player to select.

Feature P4. In the gaming area, as the second ball entry section,
a normal second ball entry portion (second operating port 34) that allows ball entry between the time when the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means and the time when the first specific control is executed;
a specific second ball entry portion (fifth operating port 34D) that allows ball entry regardless of whether or not the first lottery is executed by the first lottery means;
is provided,
A firing means (launching operation device 28) for firing a game ball toward the gaming area at a firing intensity corresponding to an operation by a player,
While the game ball ejected from the ejection means at the first ejection intensity reaches the normal second ball entry section, it does not reach the specific second ball entry section, and the game ball ejects at a first ejection intensity different from the first ejection intensity. The normal second ball entering section and the specific second ball entering section are arranged so that the game ball fired at the second shooting intensity reaches the specific second ball entering section but does not reach the normal second ball entering section. The gaming machine according to feature P3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a ball portion.

According to the above configuration, when playing a game in the first specific state and the second specific state, it is necessary to perform different bets. Specifically, when in the first specific state, it is necessary to fire the game ball at the first firing intensity, and when in the second specific state, it is necessary to fire the game ball at the second firing intensity. There is. By doing this, it becomes clear what kind of game should be played in each specific state (which second operating port should be aimed at), making the game easier to understand, and making it possible to change the game by changing the operation. It becomes easier to experience.

Feature P5. A passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming ball can pass;
Acceptance determination means (based on the main controller 81) capable of determining whether or not to accept a ball entering the second ball entry section (support lottery) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage section. function to execute processing for electrical support), and
A receiving means (electric accessory 34d) that is displaced to a receiving state in which a game ball can be received into the second ball receiving section based on a determination result by the receiving determining means;
The gaming machine according to feature P3 or feature P4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, the ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entry section unconditionally, but the ball enters the second ball entry section based on the acceptance determination based on passing through the passing section. becomes possible. By doing so, it is possible to make both the first specific state and the second specific state compatible with the gameplay.

Feature P6. The frequency or probability that the accepting means will be in the accepting state in the second specific state is set to be relatively higher than the frequency or probability that the accepting means will be in the accepting state in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature P5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the gameplay between the first specific state and the second specific state by utilizing the frequency or probability of the accepting means being in the accepting state. Specifically, in the first specified state, since the receiving means is unlikely to be in the receiving state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry section, and the first specified state control will be performed frequently. On the other hand, in the second specific state, since the receiving means is likely to be in the receiving state, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry section, and the second specific control will be frequently executed.

Note that any one of the technical ideas shown in each feature described above may be applied to other features, or the technical ideas shown in a plurality of features may be combined and applied to other features. It is also possible to extract a part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 27... Game ball launch mechanism, 28... Launch operation device, 32A... First variable winning device, 32B... Second variable winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 81... Main control device, 82... production control device, AS... first special figure display section, BS... second special figure display section, PE... game area.

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball into a gaming area based on a firing operation by a player;
a first ball entry part and a second ball entry part provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined entry mode that can be switched between a first mode in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter the ball or easily enter the ball, and a second mode in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter the ball than the first mode. ball means;
a first lottery means for executing a first lottery to determine whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section;
a second lottery means for executing a second lottery to determine whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section;
A first special game state in which switching control is performed to change the predetermined ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode and then to the second mode based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery. a means by which the transition can be made;
A first state in which a privilege is more likely to be awarded based on the first lottery than the second lottery, and a second state in which a benefit is more likely to be awarded based on the second lottery than the first lottery. and the means by which it is possible to
a first switching means capable of switching from the second state to the first state in response to the number of drawings of the first drawing or the second drawing reaching a predetermined number;
A second switching means capable of switching from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the first lottery or the second lottery becoming a specific result and a predetermined condition being satisfied based on the specific result. and,
a third switching means capable of switching from the first state to the second state without going through the first special game state based on the first lottery or the second lottery;
Equipped with
The predetermined number of times includes a first number of times and a second number of times different from the first number of times,
A gaming machine characterized in that, by switching from the first state to the second state by the third switching means, it is more advantageous for the player than before the switching.

Images